Manual VFD Delta
Manual VFD Delta
Manual VFD Delta
Preface
Thank you for choosing DELTA’s multifunction VFD-EL Series. The VFD-EL Series is manufactured
with high-quality components and materials and incorporate the latest microprocessor technology
available.
This manual is to be used for the installation, parameter setting, troubleshooting, and daily
maintenance of the AC motor drive. To guarantee safe operation of the equipment, read the following
safety guidelines before connecting power to the AC motor drive. Keep this operating manual at
hand and distribute to all users for reference.
To ensure the safety of operators and equipment, only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor
drive are to do installation, start-up and maintenance. Always read this manual thoroughly before
using VFD-EL series AC Motor Drive, especially the WARNING, DANGER and CAUTION notes.
Failure to comply may result in personal injury and equipment damage. If you have any questions,
please contact your dealer.
PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY.
DANGER!
1. AC input power must be disconnected before any wiring to the AC motor drive is made.
2. A charge may still remain in the DC-link capacitors with hazardous voltages, even if the power
has been turned off. To prevent personal injury, please ensure that power has turned off before
opening the AC motor drive and wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage
levels.
3. Never reassemble internal components or wiring.
4. The AC motor drive may be destroyed beyond repair if incorrect cables are connected to the
input/output terminals. Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and
W/T3 directly to the AC mains circuit power supply.
5. Ground the VFD-EL using the ground terminal. The grounding method must comply with the
laws of the country where the AC motor drive is to be installed. Refer to the Basic Wiring
Diagram.
6. VFD-EL series is used only to control variable speed of 3-phase induction motors, NOT for 1-
phase motors or other purpose.
7. VFD-EL series shall NOT be used for life support equipment or any life safety situation.
WARNING!
1. DO NOT use Hi-pot test for internal components. The semi-conductor used in AC motor drive
easily damage by high-voltage.
2. There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards. These components
are especially sensitive to static electricity. To prevent damage to these components, do not
touch these components or the circuit boards with metal objects or your bare hands.
3. Only qualified persons are allowed to install, wire and maintain AC motor drives.
CAUTION!
1. DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a place subjected to high temperature, direct sunlight,
high humidity, excessive vibration, corrosive gases or liquids, or airborne dust or metallic
particles.
2. Some parameters settings can cause the motor to run immediately after applying power
3. Only use AC motor drives within specification. Failure to comply may result in fire, explosion or
electric shock.
4. To prevent personal injury, please keep children and unqualified people away from the
equipment.
5. When the motor cable between AC motor drive and motor is too long, the layer insulation of the
motor may be damaged. Please use a frequency inverter duty motor or add an AC output
reactor to prevent damage to the motor. Refer to appendix B Reactor for details.
6. The rated voltage for AC motor drive must be ≤ 240V (≤ 480V for 460V models) and the mains
supply current capacity must be ≤ 5000A RMS.
Table of Contents
Preface ............................................................................................................. i
Table of Contents .......................................................................................... iii
Chapter 1 Introduction................................................................................1-1
1.1 Receiving and Inspection....................................................................1-2
1.1.1 Nameplate Information................................................................ 1-2
1.1.2 Model Explanation ...................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 Series Number Explanation ........................................................ 1-3
1.1.4 Drive Frames and Appearances ................................................. 1-3
1.1.5 Remove Instructions ................................................................... 1-5
1.2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring................................................1-5
1.2.1 Ambient Conditions..................................................................... 1-6
1.2.2 DC-bus Sharing: Connecting the DC-bus of the AC Motor Drives in
Parallel................................................................................................. 1-8
1.3 Dimensions.........................................................................................1-9
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring ..............................................................2-1
2.1 Wiring .................................................................................................2-2
2.2 External Wiring ...................................................................................2-8
2.3 Main Circuit.........................................................................................2-9
2.3.1 Main Circuit Connection.............................................................. 2-9
2.3.2 Main Circuit Terminals .............................................................. 2-11
2.4 Control Terminals .............................................................................2-12
Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up..................................................................3-1
3.1 Description of the Digital Keypad ....................................................... 3-1
3.2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad.................................................... 3-3
3.3 Reference Table for the 7-segment LED Display of the Digital Keypad3-
4
3.4 Operation Method .............................................................................. 3-4
3.5 Trial Run ............................................................................................ 3-5
Chapter 4 Parameters..................................................................................4-1
4.1 Summary of Parameter Settings ........................................................ 4-2
4.2 Parameter Settings for Applications................................................. 4-21
4.3 Description of Parameter Settings.................................................... 4-26
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting.........................................................................5-1
5.1 Over Current (OC).............................................................................. 5-1
5.2 Ground Fault ...................................................................................... 5-2
5.3 Over Voltage (OV).............................................................................. 5-2
5.4 Low Voltage (Lv) ................................................................................ 5-3
5.5 Over Heat (OH1)................................................................................ 5-4
5.6 Overload ............................................................................................ 5-4
5.7 Keypad Display is Abnormal .............................................................. 5-5
5.8 Phase Loss (PHL).............................................................................. 5-5
5.9 Motor cannot Run............................................................................... 5-6
5.10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed .................................................... 5-7
5.11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration....................................................... 5-8
5.12 The Motor does not Run as Expected.............................................. 5-8
5.13 Electromagnetic/Induction Noise...................................................... 5-9
5.14 Environmental Condition...................................................................5-9
5.15 Affecting Other Machines ...............................................................5-10
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance................................6-1
6.1 Fault Code Information .......................................................................6-1
6.1.1 Common Problems and Solutions............................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Reset .......................................................................................... 6-5
6.2 Maintenance and Inspections .............................................................6-5
Appendix A Specifications ........................................................................ A-1
Appendix B Accessories ........................................................................... B-1
B.1 All Brake Resistors & Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives............. B-1
B.1.1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors ............................B-4
B.2 No Fuse Circuit Breaker Chart .......................................................... B-7
B.3 Fuse Specification Chart ................................................................... B-8
B.4 AC Reactor........................................................................................ B-9
B.4.1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value.....................................B-9
B.4.2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value..................................B-9
B.4.3 Applications ..............................................................................B-10
B.5 Zero Phase Reactor (RF220X00A) ................................................. B-12
B.6 Remote Controller RC-01................................................................ B-13
B.7 PU06 ............................................................................................... B-14
B.7.1 Description of the Digital Keypad VFD-PU06 ...........................B-14
B.7.2 Explanation of Display Message...............................................B-14
B.7.3 Operation Flow Chart ...............................................................B-15
B.8 Fieldbus Modules ............................................................................ B-16
B.8.1 DeviceNet Communication Module (CME-DN01) .....................B-16
B.8.1.1 Panel Appearance and Dimensions ..................................B-16
B.8.1.2 Wiring and Settings ...........................................................B-16
B.8.1.3 Power Supply....................................................................B-17
B.8.1.4 LEDs Display.....................................................................B-17
B.8.2 LonWorks Communication Module (CME-LW01) .....................B-17
B.8.2.1 Introduction .......................................................................B-17
B.8.2.2 Dimensions .......................................................................B-17
B.8.2.3 Specifications....................................................................B-18
B.8.2.4 Wiring................................................................................B-18
B.8.2.5 LED Indications.................................................................B-18
B.8.3 Profibus Communication Module (CME-PD01).........................B-19
B.8.3.1 Panel Appearance.............................................................B-19
B.8.3.2 Dimensions .......................................................................B-20
B.8.3.3 Parameters Settings in VFD-EL ........................................B-20
B.8.3.4 Power Supply....................................................................B-20
B.8.3.5 PROFIBUS Address..........................................................B-20
B.8.4 CME-COP01 (CANopen)..........................................................B-21
B.8.4.1 Product Profile...................................................................B-21
B.8.4.2 Specifications....................................................................B-21
B.8.4.3 Components......................................................................B-22
B.8.4.4 LED Indicator Explanation & Troubleshooting...................B-23
B.9 MKE-EP & DIN Rail .........................................................................B-25
B.9.1 MKE-EP....................................................................................B-25
B.9.2 DIN Rail: MKEL-DRA (Only for frame A)...................................B-26
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive.............................. C-1
C.1 Capacity Formulas ............................................................................ C-2
C.2 General Precaution ........................................................................... C-4
C.3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor....................................................... C-5
This page intentionally left blank
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 1-1
Chapter 1 Introduction
The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate before installation. In order to
retain the warranty coverage, the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used
for an extended period of time. Storage conditions are:
CAUTION!
1. Store in a clean and dry location free from direct sunlight or corrosive fumes.
2. Store within an ambient temperature range of -20 °
C to +60 °
C.
3. Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing environment.
4. Store within an air pressure range of 86 kPA to 106kPA.
5. DO NOT place on the ground directly. It should be stored properly. Moreover, if the surrounding
environment is humid, you should put exsiccator in the package.
6. DO NOT store in an area with rapid changes in temperature. It may cause condensation and
frost.
7. If the AC motor drive is stored for more than 3 months, the temperature should not be higher
than 30 °C. Storage longer than one year is not recommended, it could result in the degradation
of the electrolytic capacitors.
8. When the AC motor drive is not used for longer time after installation on building sites or places
with humidity and dust, it’s best to move the AC motor drive to an environment as stated above.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
1-2 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
1.1 Receiving and Inspection
This VFD-EL AC motor drive has gone through rigorous quality control tests at the factory before
shipment. After receiving the AC motor drive, please check for the following:
Check to make sure that the package includes an AC motor drive, the User Manual/Quick
Start and CD.
Inspect the unit to assure it was not damaged during shipment.
Make sure that the part number indicated on the nameplate corresponds with the part
number of your order.
1.1.1 Nameplate Information
Example for 1HP/0.75kW 3-phase 230V AC motor drive
MODEL VFD007EL23A:
INPUT :3PH 200-240V 50/60Hz 5.1A
OUTPUT :3PH 0-240V 4.2A 1.6kVA 0.75kW/1HP
FREQUENCY RANGE : 0.1~600Hz
Serial Number & Bar Code
AC Drive Model
Input Spec.
Output Spec.
Output Frequency Range
007EL23A0T7140001
00.92Software Version
1.1.2 Model Explanation
VFD A
Version Type
23
Mains Input Voltage
11:115 phaseV 1- 21: phase230V 1-
23:230 phaseV 3-
EL
VFD-EL Series
007
Applicable motor capacity
004: 0.5 HP(0.4kW)
015: 2 HP(1.5kW)
022: 3 HP(2.2kW)
Series Name ( ariable requency rive)V F D
43:460 phaseV 3-
002: 0.25 HP(0.2kW)
037: 5 HP(3.7kW)
A: Standard drive
Chapter 1 Introduction|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 1-3
1.1.3 Series Number Explanation
0170T007EL23A
Production number
Production year 2007
Production factory
Production week
T: Taoyuan, W: Wujiang
Model
230V 3-phase 1HP(0.75kW)
If the nameplate information does not correspond to your purchase order or if there are
any problems, please contact your distributor.
1.1.4 Drive Frames and Appearances
0.25-2HP/0.2-1.5kW (Frame A) 1-5HP/0.75-3.7kW (Frame B)
Input terminals
(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
Digital keypad
Output terminals
(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)
Control board cover
Input terminals cover
(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
Case body
Digital keypad
Output terminals cover
(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)
Control board cover
Chapter 1 Introduction|
1-4 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Internal Structure
Digital keypad
ACI/AVI
RS485 port (RJ-45)
NPN/PNP
RFI Jumper Location
at the right side
NOTE
RFI jumper is near the input terminals as shown in the above figure and can be removed by taking
off screws.
Frame Power range Models
A 0.25-2hp (0.2-1.5kW)
VFD002EL11A/21A/23A,
VFD004EL11A/21A/23A/43A,
VFD007EL21A/23A/43A, VFD015EL23A/43A
B 1-5hp (0.75-3.7kW)
VFD007EL11A, VFD015EL21A,
VFD022EL21A/23A/43A, VFD037EL23A/43A
Chapter 1 Introduction|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 1-5
RFI Jumper
RFI Jumper: The AC motor drive may emit the electrical noise. The RFI jumper is used to suppress
the interference (Radio Frequency Interference) on the power line.
Main power isolated from earth:
If the AC motor drive is supplied from an isolated power (IT power), the RFI jumper must be cut off.
Then the RFI capacities (filter capacitors) will be disconnected from ground to prevent circuit damage
(according to IEC 61800-3) and reduce earth leakage current.
CAUTION!
1. After applying power to the AC motor drive, do not cut off the RFI jumper. Therefore,
please make sure that main power has been switched off before cutting the RFI jumper.
2. The gap discharge may occur when the transient voltage is higher than 1,000V. Besides,
electro-magnetic compatibility of the AC motor drives will be lower after cutting the RFI
jumper.
3. Do NOT cut the RFI jumper when main power is connected to earth.
4. The RFI jumper cannot be cut when Hi-pot tests are performed. The mains power and
motor must be separated if high voltage test is performed and the leakage currents are
too high.
5. To prevent drive damage, the RFI jumper connected to ground shall be cut off if the AC
motor drive is installed on an ungrounded power system or a high resistance-grounded
(over 30 ohms) power system or a corner grounded TN system.
1.1.5 Remove Instructions
1.2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring
Remove Front Cover
Step 1 Step 2
Remove Fan
Chapter 1 Introduction|
1-6 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
1.2.1 Ambient Conditions
Install the AC motor drive in an environment with the following conditions:
Air Temperature:
-10 ~ +50°C (14 ~ 122°F) for UL & cUL
-10 ~ +40°C (14 ~ 104°F) for side-by-side mounting
Relative Humidity: <90%, no condensation allowed
Atmosphere
pressure:
86 ~ 106 kPa
Installation Site
Altitude:
<1000m
Operation
Vibration:
<20Hz: 9.80 m/s2
(1G) max
20 ~ 50Hz: 5.88 m/s2
(0.6G) max
Temperature: -20°C ~ +60°C (-4°F ~ 140°F)
Relative Humidity: <90%, no condensation allowed
Atmosphere
pressure:
86 ~ 106 kPa
Storage
Transportation
Vibration:
<20Hz: 9.80 m/s2
(1G) max
20 ~ 50Hz: 5.88 m/s2
(0.6G) max
Pollution
Degree
2: good for a factory type environment.
Minimum Mounting Clearances
Frame A Mounting Clearances
Option 1 (-10 to +50°C) Option 2 (-10 to +40°C) Air flow
120mm
120mm
50mm
50mm
120mm
120mm
50mm
50mm
Air Flow
Chapter 1 Introduction|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 1-7
Frame B Mounting Clearances
Option 1 (-10 to +50°C) Option 2 (-10 to +40°C) Air flow
150mm
150mm
50mm
50mm
150mm
150mm50mm
50mm
Air Flow
CAUTION!
1. Operating, storing or transporting the AC motor drive outside these conditions may cause
damage to the AC motor drive.
2. Failure to observe these precautions may void the warranty!
3. Mount the AC motor drive vertically on a flat vertical surface object by screws. Other directions
are not allowed.
4. The AC motor drive will generate heat during operation. Allow sufficient space around the unit
for heat dissipation.
5. The heat sink temperature may rise to 90°C when running. The material on which the AC motor
drive is mounted must be noncombustible and be able to withstand this high temperature.
6. When AC motor drive is installed in a confined space (e.g. cabinet), the surrounding
temperature must be within 10 ~ 40°C with good ventilation. DO NOT install the AC motor drive
in a space with bad ventilation.
7. Prevent fiber particles, scraps of paper, saw dust, metal particles, etc. from adhering to the
heatsink.
8. When installing multiple AC more drives in the same cabinet, they should be adjacent in a row
with enough space in-between. When installing one AC motor drive below another one, use a
metal separation between the AC motor drives to prevent mutual heating.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
1-8 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Installation with Metal Separation Installation without Metal Separation
Air flow
Frame A Frame B
120mm
120mm
120mm
120mm
150mm
150mm
150mm
150mm
120mm
120mm
150mm
150mm
A B
A B
Frame A Frame B
1.2.2 DC-bus Sharing: Connecting the DC-bus of the AC Motor Drives
in Parallel
1. This function is not for 115V models.
2. The AC motor drives can absorb mutual voltage that generated to DC bus when
deceleration.
3. Enhance brake function and stabilize the voltage of the DC bus.
4. The brake module can be added to enhance brake function after connecting in parallel.
5. Only the same power system can be connected in parallel.
6. It is recommended to connect 5 AC motor drives in parallel (no limit in horsepower).
Chapter 1 Introduction|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 1-9
Power 208/220/230/380/440/480 (depend on models)
power should be applied at the same time
(only the same power system can be connected in parallel)
For frame A and B, terminal + (-) is connected to the terminal + (-) of the braking module.
U V W U V W U V W U V W
IM IM IM IM
Braking
modules
1.3 Dimensions
(Dimensions are in millimeter and [inch])
D
D
W
H H1
W1
Frame W W1 H H1 D Ø ØD
A 72.0[2.83] 59.0[2.32] 174.0[6.86] 151.6[5.97] 136.0[5.36] 5.4[0.21] 2.7[0.11]
B 100.0[3.94] 89.0[3.50] 174.0[6.86] 162.9[6.42] 136.0[5.36] 5.4[0.21] 2.7[0.11]
Chapter 1 Introduction|
1-10 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
NOTE
Frame A: VFD002EL11A/21A/23A, VFD004EL11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007EL21A/23A/43A,
VFD015EL23A/43A
Frame B: VFD007EL11A, VFD015EL21A, VFD022EL21A/23A/43A, VFD037EL23A/43A
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 2-1
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
After removing the front cover, check if the power and control terminals are clear. Be sure to observe
the following precautions when wiring.
General Wiring Information
Applicable Codes
All VFD-EL series are Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and Canadian Underwriters
Laboratories (cUL) listed, and therefore comply with the requirements of the National
Electrical Code (NEC) and the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC).
Installation intended to meet the UL and cUL requirements must follow the instructions
provided in “Wiring Notes” as a minimum standard. Follow all local codes that exceed UL
and cUL requirements. Refer to the technical data label affixed to the AC motor drive and
the motor nameplate for electrical data.
The "Line Fuse Specification" in Appendix B, lists the recommended fuse part number for
each VFD-EL Series part number. These fuses (or equivalent) must be used on all
installations where compliance with U.L. standards is a required.
CAUTION!
1. Make sure that power is only applied to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 terminals. Failure to comply may
result in damage to the equipment. The voltage and current should lie within the range as
indicated on the nameplate.
2. All the units must be grounded directly to a common ground terminal to prevent lightning strike
or electric shock.
3. Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks which is
made by the loose screws due to vibration.
4. Check following items after finishing the wiring:
A. Are all connections correct?
B. No loose wires?
C. No short-circuits between terminals or to ground?
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
2-2 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
DANGER!
1. A charge may still remain in the DC bus capacitors with hazardous voltages even if the power
has been turned off. To prevent personal injury, please ensure that the power is turned off and
wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels before opening the AC
motor drive.
2. Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives is allowed to perform installation, wiring
and commissioning.
3. Make sure that the power is off before doing any wiring to prevent electric shock.
2.1 Wiring
Users must connect wires according to the circuit diagrams on the following pages. Do not plug a
modem or telephone line to the RS-485 communication port or permanent damage may result. The
pins 1 & 2 are the power supply for the optional copy keypad only and should not be used for RS-485
communication.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 2-3
AVI/ACI
ACM
+
+10V
5K
3
2
1
Figure 1 for models of VFD-EL Series
VFD002EL11A/21A, VFD004EL11A/21A, VFD007EL11A/21A, VFD015EL21A, VFD022EL21A
Power supply
+10V/3mA
Master Frequency
0- 10V 47K
/4-20mA
Analog S ignal Common E
Main circuit (power) terminals Control circuit terminals Shielded l eads & Cable
E
R(L1)
S(L2)
Fuse/NFB(No Fuse B reaker)
SA
OFF ON
MC
MC
RB
RC
Recommended Circuit
when power suppl y
is turned OFF by a
fault output
If the fault occurs, the
contact will be ON to
turn off the power and
protect the power system.
R(L1)
S(L2)
E
Analog Multi-function Output
Terminal
Refer to chapter 2.4 for details.
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
IM
3~
AFM
ACM
RA
RB
RC
Motor
Analog S ignal common
E
E
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI6
MI5
DCM
+24V
FWD/Stop
REV/Stop
Multi-step 1
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
Digital Signal Common
Factory
setting
AVI
ACI
Factory setting:
AVI Mode
-
RS-485
Serial interface
1: Reserved
2: EV
5: SG+
6: Reserved
7: Reserved
8: Reserved
3: GND
4: SG-
8 1
Sw1
NPN
PNP
Factory setting:
NPN Mode
Please refer to Figur e 3
for wiring of NPN
mode and PNP
mode.
BUE
brake unit
(optional)
BR brake resistor
(optional)
Multi-function contact output
Refer to chapter 2.4 for details.
Factory setting is
malfunction indication
Factory setting: output frequency
Sw2
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
2-4 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
AVI/ACI
ACM
+
+10V
5K
3
2
1
Figure 2 for models of VFD-EL Series
VFD002EL23A, VFD004EL23A/43A, VFD007EL23A/43A, VFD015EL23A/43A,
VFD022EL23A/43A, VFD037EL23A/43A
Power supply
+10V/3mA
Master Frequency
0-10V 47K
/4-20mA
Analog S ignal Common E
Main circuit (power) terminals Control circuit terminals Shielded leads & Cable
E
R(L1)
S(L2)
Fuse/NFB(No Fuse B reaker)
SA
OFF ON
MC
MC
RB
RC
Recommended Circuit
when power supply
is turned OFF by a
fault output.
If the fault occurs, the
contact will be ON to
turn off the power and protect the power system.
R(L1)
S(L2)
E
Analog Multi-function Output
Terminal
Refer to chapter 2.4 for details.
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
IM
3~
AFM
ACM
RA
RB
RC
Motor
Analog S ignal common
E
E
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI6
MI5
DCM
+24V
FWD/Stop
REV/Stop
Multi-step 1
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
Digital Signal Common
Factory
setting
AVI
ACI
Factory setting:
AVI Mode
-
RS-485
Serial interface
1: Reserved
2: EV
5: SG+
6: Reserved
7: Reserved
8:
3: GND
4: SG-
Reserved
8 1
NPN
PNP
Factory setting:
NPN Mode
Please refer to Figure 3
for wiring of NPN
mode and P NP
mode.
BUE
brake unit
(optional)
BR brake resi stor
(optional)
Multi-function contact output
Refer to chapter 2.4 for details.
Factory setting is
malfunction indication
Factory setting: output frequency
T(L3)T(L3)
Sw1
Sw2
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 2-5
Figure 3 Wiring for NPN mode and PNP mode
A. NPN mode without external power
Factory
setting
NPN
PNP
B. NPN mode with external power
Factory
setting
NPN
PNP
24
Vdc
-
+
C. PNP mode without external power
Sw1
Factory
setting
NPN
PNP
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
2-6 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
D. PNP mode with external power
Sw1
Factory
setting
NPN
PNP
24
Vdc -
+
CAUTION!
1. The wiring of main circuit and control circuit should be separated to prevent erroneous actions.
2. Please use shield wire for the control wiring and not to expose the peeled-off net in front of the
terminal.
3. Please use the shield wire or tube for the power wiring and ground the two ends of the shield
wire or tube.
4. Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits/equipment if it
comes in contact with high voltage.
5. The AC motor drive, motor and wiring may cause interference. To prevent the equipment
damage, please take care of the erroneous actions of the surrounding sensors and the
equipment.
6. When the AC drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 are connected to the motor terminals
U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, respectively. To permanently reverse the direction of motor rotation,
switch over any of the two motor leads.
7. With long motor cables, high capacitive switching current peaks can cause over-current, high
leakage current or lower current readout accuracy. To prevent this, the motor cable should be
less than 20m for 3.7kW models and below. And the cable should be less than 50m for 5.5kW
models and above. For longer motor cables use an AC output reactor.
8. The AC motor drive, electric welding machine and the greater horsepower motor should be
grounded separately.
9. Use ground leads that comply with local regulations and keep them as short as possible.
10. No brake resistor is built in the VFD-EL series, it can install brake resistor for those occasions
that use higher load inertia or frequent start/stop. Refer to Appendix B for details.
11. Multiple VFD-EL units can be installed in one location. All the units should be grounded directly
to a common ground terminal, as shown in the figure below. Ensure there are no ground
loops.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 2-7
Excellent
Good
Not allowed
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
2-8 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
2.2 External Wiring
Motor
Output AC
Line Reactor
Power Supply
Magnetic
contactor
Input AC
Line Reactor
EMI Filter
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
+
Zero-phase
Reactor
Zero-phase
Reactor
FUSE/NFB
-
BR
BUE
Brakeresistor
Brakunit
Items Explanations
Power
supply
Please follow the specific power
supply requirements shown in
Appendix A.
Fuse/NFB
(Optional)
There may be an inrush current
during power up. Please check the
chart of Appendix B and select the
correct fuse with rated current. Use of
an NFB is optional.
Magnetic
contactor
(Optional)
Please do not use a Magnetic
contactor as the I/O switch of the AC
motor drive, as it will reduce the
operating life cycle of the AC drive.
Input AC
Line Reactor
(Optional)
Used to improve the input power
factor, to reduce harmonics and
provide protection from AC line
disturbances. (surges, switching
spikes, short interruptions, etc.). AC
line reactor should be installed when
the power supply capacity is 500kVA
or more or advanced capacity is
activated. The wiring distance should
be ≤ 10m. Refer to appendix B for
details.
Zero-phase
Reactor
(Ferrite Core
Common
Choke)
(Optional)
Zero phase reactors are used to
reduce radio noise especially when
audio equipment is installed near the
inverter. Effective for noise reduction
on both the input and output sides.
Attenuation quality is good for a wide
range from AM band to 10MHz.
Appendix B specifies the zero phase
reactor. (RF220X00A)
EMI filter
It is used to reduce electromagnetic
interference. All 230V and 460V
models are built-in EMI filter.
Brake
Resistor and
Brake Unit
(Optional)
Used to reduce the deceleration time
of the motor. Please refer to the chart
in Appendix B for specific Brake
Resistors.
Output AC
Line Reactor
(Optional)
Motor surge voltage amplitude
depends on motor cable length. For
applications with long motor cable
(>20m), it is necessary to install a
reactor at the inverter output side
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 2-9
2.3 Main Circuit
2.3.1 Main Circuit Connection
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
R
S
T
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
IM
3~
MC
E
E
+ -
No fuse breaker
(NFB)
Brake Resistor(Optional)
Motor
BUE
BR
Brake Unit
(Optional)
Terminal Symbol Explanation of Terminal Function
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 AC line input terminals (1-phase/3-phase)
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 AC drive output terminals for connecting 3-phase induction motor
+, - Connections for External Brake unit (BUE series)
Earth connection, please comply with local regulations.
CAUTION!
Mains power terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
Connect these terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) via a non-fuse breaker or earth leakage
breaker to 3-phase AC power (some models to 1-phase AC power) for circuit protection. It
is unnecessary to consider phase-sequence.
It is recommended to add a magnetic contactor (MC) in the power input wiring to cut off
power quickly and reduce malfunction when activating the protection function of AC motor
drives. Both ends of the MC should have an R-C surge absorber.
Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks
which is made by the loose screws due to vibration.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
2-10 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Please use voltage and current within the regulation shown in Appendix A.
When using a GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter), select a current sensor with
sensitivity of 200mA, and not less than 0.1-second detection time to avoid nuisance
tripping. For specific GFCI of the AC motor drive, please select a current sensor with
sensitivity of 30mA or above.
Do NOT run/stop AC motor drives by turning the power ON/OFF. Run/stop AC motor
drives by RUN/STOP command via control terminals or keypad. If you still need to
run/stop AC drives by turning power ON/OFF, it is recommended to do so only ONCE per
hour.
Do NOT connect 3-phase models to a 1-phase power source.
Output terminals for main circuit (U, V, W)
The factory setting of the operation direction is forward running. The method to control the
operation direction is to set by the communication parameters. Please refer to the group 9
for details.
When it needs to install the filter at the output side of terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 on the
AC motor drive. Please use inductance filter. Do not use phase-compensation capacitors
or L-C (Inductance-Capacitance) or R-C (Resistance-Capacitance), unless approved by
Delta.
DO NOT connect phase-compensation capacitors or surge absorbers at the output
terminals of AC motor drives.
Use well-insulated motor, suitable for inverter operation.
Terminals [+, -] for connecting brake resistor
All VFD-EL series don’t have a built-in brake chopper. Please connect an external
optional brake unit (BUE-series) and brake resistor. Refer to BUE series user manual for
details.
When not used, please leave the terminals [+, -] open.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 2-11
2.3.2 Main Circuit Terminals
Frame A Frame B
Frame Power Terminals Torque Wire Wire type
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
A
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
14.2-16.3kgf-cm
(12-14in-lbf)
12-18 AWG.
(3.3-0.8mm2
)
Copper only, 75o
C
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3B
+, -,
16.3-19.3kgf-cm
(14-17in-lbf)
8-18 AWG. (8.4-
0.8mm2
)
Copper only, 75o
C
NOTE
Frame A: VFD002EL11A/21A/23A, VFD004EL11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007EL21A/23A/43A,
VFD015EL23A/43A
Frame B: VFD007EL11A, VFD015EL21A, VFD022EL21A/23A/43A, VFD037EL23A/43A
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
2-12 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
2.4 Control Terminals
Circuit diagram for digital inputs (NPN current 16mA.)
+24V
DCM
NPN Mode
1
3
4
2
2
1
+24V
DCM
PNP Mode
1
3
4
2
2
1
The position of the control terminals
RS-485
10VMI1 MI3 MI524V AVI
RA RB RC MI2 MI4 MI6 DCM ACMAFM
Terminal symbols and functions
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal Function
Factory Settings (NPN mode)
ON: Connect to DCM
MI1 Forward-Stop command
ON: Run in MI1 direction
OFF: Stop acc. to Stop Method
MI2 Reverse-Stop command
ON: Run in MI2 direction
OFF: Stop acc. to Stop Method
MI3 Multi-function Input 3
MI4 Multi-function Input 4
Refer to Pr.04.05 to Pr.04.08 for programming the
Multi-function Inputs.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 2-13
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal Function
Factory Settings (NPN mode)
ON: Connect to DCM
MI5 Multi-function Input 5
MI6 Multi-function Input 6
ON: the activation current is 5.5mA.
OFF: leakage current tolerance is 10μA.
+24V DC Voltage Source +24VDC, 50mA used for PNP mode.
DCM Digital Signal Common
Common for digital inputs and used for NPN
mode.
RA
Multi-function Relay output
(N.O.) a
RB
Multi-function Relay output
(N.C.) b
RC Multi-function Relay common
Resistive Load:
5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 240VAC
5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 24VDC
Inductive Load:
1.5A(N.O.)/0.5A(N.C.) 240VAC
1.5A(N.O.)/0.5A(N.C.) 24VDC
Refer to Pr.03.00 for programming
+10V Potentiometer power supply +10VDC 3mA
AVI
Analog voltage Input
ACM
AVI
+10V
internal circuit
AVI circuit
Impedance: 47kΩ
Resolution: 10 bits
Range: 0 ~ 10VDC/4~20mA =
0 ~ Max. Output Frequency
(Pr.01.00)
Selection: Pr.02.00, Pr.02.09, Pr.10.00
Set-up: Pr.04.14 ~ Pr.04.17
ACM
Analog control signal
(common)
Common for AVI= and AFM
AFM
Analog output meter
AFM
ACM
0~10V
Max. 2mA
potentiometer
ACM circuit
internal circuit
0 to 10V, 2mA
Impedance: 47Ω
Output current 2mA max
Resolution: 8 bits
Range: 0 ~ 10VDC
Function: Pr.03.03 to Pr.03.04
NOTE
The voltage output type for this analog signal is
PWM. It needs to read value by the movable coil
meter and is not suitable for A/D signal conversion.
NOTE: Control signal wiring size: 18 AWG (0.75 mm2
) with shielded wire.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
2-14 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Analog inputs (AVI, ACM)
Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise. Use shielded wiring and keep it
as short as possible (<20m) with proper grounding. If the noise is inductive, connecting
the shield to terminal ACM can bring improvement.
If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive, please connect
a capacitor (0.1 μ F and above) and ferrite core as indicated in the following diagrams:
C
AVI
ACM
ferrite core
wind each wires 3 times or more around the core
Digital inputs (MI1~MI6, DCM)
When using contacts or switches to control the digital inputs, please use high quality
components to avoid contact bounce.
General
Keep control wiring as far away as possible from the power wiring and in separate
conduits to avoid interference. If necessary let them cross only at 90º angle.
The AC motor drive control wiring should be properly installed and not touch any live
power wiring or terminals.
NOTE
If a filter is required for reducing EMI (Electro Magnetic Interference), install it as close as
possible to AC drive. EMI can also be reduced by lowering the Carrier Frequency.
DANGER!
Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits/equipment if it comes
in contact with high voltage.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 2-15
The specification for the control terminals
The position of the control terminals
RS-485
10VMI1 MI3 MI524V AVI
RA RB RC MI2 MI4 MI6 DCM ACMAFM
Frame Torque Wire
A, B 5.1-8.1kgf-cm (4.4-7in-lbf) 16-24 AWG. (1.3-0.2mm2
)
NOTE
Frame A: VFD002EL11A/21A/23A, VFD004EL11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007EL21A/23A/43A,
VFD015EL23A/43A
Frame B: VFD007EL11A, VFD015EL21A, VFD022EL21A/23A/43A, VFD037EL23A/43A
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
2-16 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
This page intentionally left blank
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 3-1
Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up
3.1 Description of the Digital Keypad
LED Display
Indicates frequency, voltage, current, user
defined units and etc.
Status Display
Display the driver's current status.
STOP/RESET
Stops AC drive operation and reset the drive
after fault occurred.
RUN Key
Start AC drive operation.
MODE
Change between different display mode.
UP and DOWN Key
Set the parameter number and changes the
numerical data, such as Master Frequency.
Potentiometer
For master Frequency setting.
1 2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5
6
7
There are four LEDs on the keypad:
LED STOP: It will light up when the motor is stop.
LED RUN: It will light up when the motor is running.
LED FWD: It will light up when the motor is forward running.
LED REV: It will light up when the motor is reverse running.
Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up|
3-2 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Display Message Descriptions
Displays the AC drive Master Frequency.
Displays the actual output frequency at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
User defined unit (where U = F x Pr.00.05)
Displays the output current at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
Displays the AC motor drive forward run status.
Displays the AC motor drive reverse run status.
The counter value (C).
Displays the selected parameter.
Displays the actual stored value of the selected parameter.
External Fault.
Display “End” for approximately 1 second if input has been accepted.
After a parameter value has been set, the new value is automatically
stored in memory. To modify an entry, use the and keys.
Display “Err”, if the input is invalid.
Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 3-3
3.2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad
To shift data
Setting direction
Setting Mode
Setting parameters
Success to
set parameter.
Input data error
NOTE:In the parameter setting mode, you can press to return the selecting mode.
(When operation source is digital keypad)
START
GO START
MODE MODE MODE MODE MODE
NOTE: In the selection mode, press to set the parameters.MODE
or
ENTER ENTER ENTER
MODE
or
MODE MODE MODE MODE
Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up|
3-4 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
3.3 Reference Table for the 7-segment LED Display of the Digital Keypad
Digit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LED
Display
English
alphabet
A b Cc d E F G Hh Ii Jj
LED
Display
English
alphabet
K L n Oo P q r S Tt U
LED
Display
English
alphabet
v Y Z
LED
Display
3.4 Operation Method
The operation method can be set via communication, control terminals and digital keypad.
Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 3-5
3.5 Trial Run
You can perform a trial run by using digital keypad with the following steps. by following steps
1. Setting frequency to F5.0 by pressing .
2. If you want to change direction from forward running to reverse running: 1. press MODE
key to find FWD. 2. press UP/DOWN key to REV to finish changing direction.
Operation
Method
Frequency Source Operation Command Source
Operate from
the
communication
When setting communication by the PC, it needs to use VFD-USB01 or IFD8500
converter to connect to the PC.
Refer to the communication address 2000H and 2101H setting for details.
* Don't apply the mains voltage directly
to above terminals.
E
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI6
MI5
DCM
+24V
FWD/Stop
REV/Stop
Multi-step 1
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
Digital Signal Common
Factory
settingSw1
NPN
PNP
Factory setting:
NPN Mode
AVI
ACI/AVI
ACM
+10V
5K
3
2
1
Power supply
+10V 3mA
Master Frequency
0 to 10V 47K
Analog Signal Common E
Sw2
AVI
ACI
Factory setting:
ACI Mode
4-20mA/0-10V
Operate from
external signal
MI3-DCM (Set Pr.04.05=10)
MI4-DCM (Set Pr.04.06=11)
External terminals input:
MI1-DCM (set to FWD/STOP)
MI2-DCM (set to REV/STOP)
Operate from
the digital
keypad
Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up|
3-6 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
1. After applying the power, verify that LED
display shows F 60.0Hz.
2. Press key to set frequency to around
5Hz.
3. Press key for forward running. And if
you want to change to reverse running, you
should press . And if you want to
decelerate to stop, please press
key.
4. Check following items:
Check if the motor direction of rotation
is correct.
Check if the motor runs steadily
without abnormal noise and vibration.
Check if acceleration and deceleration
are smooth.
RUN
If the results of trial run are normal, please start the formal run.
NOTE
1. Stop running immediately if any fault occurs and refer to the troubleshooting guide for
solving the problem.
2. Do NOT touch output terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 when power is still applied to R/L1,
S/L2, T/L3 even when the AC motor drive has stopped. The DC-link capacitors may still
be charged to hazardous voltage levels, even if the power has been turned off.
3. To avoid damage to components, do not touch them or the circuit boards with metal
objects or your bare hands.
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-1
Chapter 4 Parameters
The VFD-EL parameters are divided into 11 groups by property for easy setting. In most applications,
the user can finish all parameter settings before start-up without the need for re-adjustment during
operation.
The 11 groups are as follows:
Group 0: User Parameters
Group 1: Basic Parameters
Group 2: Operation Method Parameters
Group 3: Output Function Parameters
Group 4: Input Function Parameters
Group 5: Multi-Step Speed Parameters
Group 6: Protection Parameters
Group 7: Motor Parameters
Group 8: Special Parameters
Group 9: Communication Parameters
Group 10: PID Control Parameters
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-2 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
4.1 Summary of Parameter Settings
: The parameter can be set during operation.
Group 0 User Parameters
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
00.00 Identity Code of the
AC motor drive
Read-only ##
00.01 Rated Current
Display of the AC
motor drive
Read-only #.#
0: Parameter can be read/written
1: All parameters are read only
8: Keypad lock
9: All parameters are reset to factory settings
(50Hz, 230V/400V or 220V/380V depends on
Pr.00.12)
00.02 Parameter Reset
10: All parameters are reset to factory
settings (60Hz, 220V/440V)
0
0: Display the frequency command value
(Fxxx)
1: Display the actual output frequency (Hxxx)
2: Display the content of user-defined unit
(Uxxx)
3: Multifunction display, see Pr.00.04
00.03
Start-up Display
Selection
4: FWD/REV command
0
0: Display the content of user-defined unit
(Uxxx)
1: Display the counter value (c)
2: Display the status of multi-function input
terminals (d)
3: Display DC-BUS voltage (u)
4: Display output voltage (E)
5: Display PID analog feedback signal value
(b) (%)
00.04
Content of Multi-
function Display
6: Output power factor angle (n)
0
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-3
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
7: Display output power (P)
8: Display PID setting and feedback signal
9: Display AVI (I) (V)
10: Display ACI (i) (mA)
11: Display the temperature of IGBT (h) (°C)
00.05
User-Defined
Coefficient K
0. 1 to 160.0 1.0
00.06 Software Version Read-only #.##
00.07 Reserved
00.08 Password Input 0 to 9999 0
00.09 Password Set 0 to 9999 0
00.10 Reserved
00.11 Reserved
00.12
50Hz Base Voltage
Selection
0: 230V/400V
1: 220V/380V
0
00.13
User-defined Value 1
(correspond to max.
frequency)
0 to 9999
0
00.14
Position of Decimal
Point of User-
defined Value 1
0 to 3
0
Group 1 Basic Parameters
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
01.00
Maximum Output
Frequency (Fmax)
50.00 to 600.0 Hz 60.00
01.01
Maximum Voltage
Frequency (Fbase)
0.10 to 600.0 Hz 60.00
115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V 220.0
01.02
Maximum Output
Voltage (Vmax)
460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V 440.0
01.03
Mid-Point Frequency
(Fmid) 0.10 to 600.0 Hz 1.50
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-4 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V 10.0
01.04
Mid-Point Voltage
(Vmid)
460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V 20.0
01.05
Minimum Output
Frequency (Fmin)
0.10 to 600.0 Hz 1.50
115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V 10.0
01.06
Minimum Output
Voltage (Vmin)
460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V 20.0
01.07
Output Frequency
Upper Limit
0.1 to 120.0%
110.0
01.08
Output Frequency
Lower Limit
0.0 to100.0 %
0.0
01.09 Accel Time 1 0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec 10.0
01.10 Decel Time 1 0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec 10.0
01.11 Accel Time 2 0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec 10.0
01.12 Decel Time 2 0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec 10.0
01.13 Jog Acceleration
Time
0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec
1.0
01.14 Jog Deceleration
Time
0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec
1.0
01.15 Jog Frequency 0.10 Hz to Fmax (Pr.01.00) Hz 6.00
0: Linear Accel/Decel
1: Auto Accel, Linear Decel
2: Linear Accel, Auto Decel
3: Auto Accel/Decel (Set by load)
01.16
Auto acceleration /
deceleration (refer
to Accel/Decel time
setting)
4: Auto Accel/Decel (set by Accel/Decel
Time setting)
0
01.17
Acceleration S-
Curve
0.0 to 10.0 / 0.00 to 10.00 sec 0.0
01.18
Deceleration S-
Curve
0.0 to 10.0 / 0.00 to 10.00 sec 0.0
0: Unit: 0.1 sec
01.19
Accel/Decel Time
Unit
1: Unit: 0.01 sec
0
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-5
Group 2 Operation Method Parameters
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
02.00
Source of First
Master Frequency
Command
0: Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys or Multi-
function Inputs UP/DOWN. Last used
frequency saved.
1: 0 to +10V from AVI
2: 4 to 20mA from ACI
3: RS-485 (RJ-45) communication
4: Digital keypad potentiometer
1
0: Digital keypad
1: External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET
enabled.
2: External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET
disabled.
3: RS-485 (RJ-45) communication. Keypad
STOP/RESET enabled.
02.01
Source of First
Operation
Command
4: RS-485 (RJ-45) communication. Keypad
STOP/RESET disabled.
1
0: STOP: ramp to stop; E.F.: coast to stop
1: STOP: coast to stop; E.F.: coast to stop
2: STOP: ramp to stop; E.F.: ramp to stop
02.02 Stop Method
3: STOP: coast to stop; E.F.: ramp to stop
0
02.03
PWM Carrier
Frequency
Selections
2 to 12kHz 8
0: Enable forward/reverse operation
1: Disable reverse operation02.04
Motor Direction
Control
2: Disabled forward operation
0
0: Disable. Operation status is not changed
even if operation command source Pr.02.01
is changed.
1: Enable. Operation status is not changed
even if operation command source Pr.02.01
is changed.
02.05 Line Start Lockout
2: Disable. Operation status will change if
operation command source Pr.02.01 is
changed.
1
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-6 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
3: Enable. Operation status will change if
operation command source Pr.02.01 is
changed.
0: Decelerate to 0 Hz
1: Coast to stop and display “AErr”
02.06
Loss of ACI Signal
(4-20mA)
2: Continue operation by last frequency
command
1
0: by UP/DOWN Key
1: Based on accel/decel time
2: Constant speed (Pr.02.08)
02.07 Up/Down Mode
3: Pulse input unit (Pr.02.08)
0
02.08
Accel/Decel Rate of
Change of
UP/DOWN
Operation with
Constant Speed
0.01~10.00 Hz 0.01
02.09
Source of Second
Frequency
Command
0: Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys or Multi-
function Inputs UP/DOWN. Last used
frequency saved.
1: 0 to +10V from AVI
2: 4 to 20mA from ACI
3: RS-485 (RJ-45) communication
4: Digital keypad potentiometer
0
02.10
Combination of the
First and Second
Master Frequency
Command
0: First Master Frequency Command
1: First Master Frequency Command+
Second Master Frequency Command
2: First Master Frequency Command -
Second Master Frequency Command
0
02.11
Keypad Frequency
Command
0.00 to 600.0Hz
60.00
02.12
Communication
Frequency
Command
0.00 to 600.0Hz
60.00
0: Save Keypad & Communication
Frequency
1: Save Keypad Frequency only02.13
The Selections for
Saving Keypad or
Communication
Frequency
Command
2: Save Communication Frequency only
0
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-7
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
0: by Current Freq Command
1: by Zero Freq Command02.14
Initial Frequency
Selection (for
keypad & RS485)
2: by Frequency Display at Stop
0
02.15
Initial Frequency
Setpoint (for keypad
& RS485)
0.00 ~ 600.0Hz 60.00
02.16
Display the Master
Freq Command
Source
Read Only
Bit0=1: by First Freq Source (Pr.02.00)
Bit1=1: by Second Freq Source (Pr.02.09)
Bit2=1: by Multi-input function
##
02.17
Display the
Operation
Command Source
Read Only
Bit0=1: by Digital Keypad
Bit1=1: by RS485 communication
Bit2=1: by External Terminal 2/3 wire mode
Bit3=1: by Multi-input function
##
02.18
User-defined Value
2 Setting
0 to Pr.00.13 0
02.19
User-defined Value
2
0 to 9999 ##
Group 3 Output Function Parameters
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
0: No function
1: AC drive operational
2: Master frequency attained
3: Zero speed
4: Over torque detection
5: Base-Block (B.B.) indication
6: Low-voltage indication
7: Operation mode indication
8: Fault indication
9: Desired frequency attained
03.00 Multi-function
Output Relay (RA1,
RB1, RC1)
10: Terminal count value attained
8
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-8 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
11: Preliminary count value attained
12: Over Voltage Stall supervision
13: Over Current Stall supervision
14: Heat sink overheat warning
15: Over Voltage supervision
16: PID supervision
17: Forward command
18: Reverse command
19: Zero speed output signal
20: Warning(FbE,Cexx, AoL2, AUE, SAvE)
21: Brake control (Desired frequency
attained)
22: AC motor drive ready
03.01 Reserved
03.02 Desired Frequency
Attained
0.00 to 600.0Hz 0.00
0: Analog frequency meter
03.03
Analog Output
Signal Selection
(AFM) 1: Analog current meter
0
03.04 Analog Output Gain 1 to 200% 100
03.05 Terminal Count
Value
0 to 9999 0
03.06
Preliminary Count
Value
0 to 9999 0
0: Terminal count value attained, no EF
display03.07
EF Active When
Terminal Count
Value Attained
1: Terminal count value attained, EF active
0
0: Fan always ON
1: 1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan
will be OFF
2: Fan ON when AC motor drive runs, fan
OFF when AC motor drive stops
03.08 Fan Control
3: Fan ON when preliminary heatsink
temperature attained
0
03.09 Reserved
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-9
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
03.10 Reserved
03.11
Brake Release
Frequency
0.00 to 20.00Hz 0.00
03.12
Brake Engage
Frequency
0.00 to 20.00Hz 0.00
03.13
Display the Status of
Relay
Read only ##
Group 4 Input Function Parameters
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
04.00
Keypad
Potentiometer Bias
0.0 to 100.0 % 0.0
04.01
Keypad
Potentiometer Bias
Polarity
0: Positive bias
1: Negative bias 00
04.02
Keypad
Potentiometer Gain
0.1 to 200.0 % 100.0
0: No negative bias command
04.03
Keypad
Potentiometer
Negative Bias,
Reverse Motion
Enable/Disable
1: Negative bias: REV motion enabled
0
0: 2-wire: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP
1: 2-wire: FWD/REV, RUN/STOP
04.04 2-wire/3-wire
Operation Control
Modes
2: 3-wire operation
0
0: No function 1
1: Multi-Step speed command 1
04.05 Multi-function Input
Terminal (MI3)
2: Multi-Step speed command 2
3: Multi-Step speed command 3 2
4: Multi-Step speed command 4
04.06 Multi-function Input
Terminal (MI4)
5: External reset
6: Accel/Decel inhibit 3
7: Accel/Decel time selection command
04.07 Multi-function Input
Terminal (MI5)
8: Jog Operation
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-10 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
9: External base block 4
10: Up: Increment master frequency
04.08 Multi-function Input
Terminal (MI6)
11: Down: Decrement master frequency
12: Counter Trigger Signal
13: Counter reset
14: E.F. External Fault Input
15: PID function disabled
16: Output shutoff stop
17: Parameter lock enable
18: Operation command selection (external
terminals)
19: Operation command selection(keypad)
20: Operation command
selection(communication)
21: FWD/REV command
22: Source of second frequency command
04.09
Multi-function Input
Contact Selection
Bit0:MI1
Bit1:MI2
Bit2:MI3
Bit3:MI4
Bit4:MI5
Bit5:MI6
0:N.O., 1:N.C.
P.S.:MI1 to MI3 will be invalid when it is 3-
wire control.
0
04.10
Digital Terminal
Input Debouncing
Time
1 to 20 (*2ms) 1
04.11 Min AVI Voltage 0.0 to 10.0V 0.0
04.12 Min AVI Frequency 0.0 to 100.0%
0.0
04.13 Max AVI Voltage 0.0 to 10.0V 10.0
04.14 Max AVI Frequency 0.0 to 100.0% 100.0
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-11
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
04.15 Min ACI Current 0.0 to 20.0mA 4.0
04.16 Min ACI Frequency 0.0 to 100.0%
0.0
04.17 Max ACI Current 0.0 to 20.0mA 20.0
04.18 Max ACI Frequency 0.0 to 100.0% 100.0
04.19
|
04.25
Reserved
Read only.
Bit0: MI1 Status
Bit1: MI2 Status
Bit2: MI3 Status
Bit3: MI4 Status
Bit4: MI5 Status
04.26
Display the Status
of Multi-function
Input Terminal
Bit5: MI6 Status
##
04.27
Internal/External
Multi-function Input
Terminals Selection
0~4095 0
04.28
Internal Terminal
Status
0~4095 0
Group 5 Multi-Step Speed Parameters
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
05.00 1st Step Speed
Frequency
0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
05.01 2nd Step Speed
Frequency
0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
05.02 3rd Step Speed
Frequency
0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
05.03 4th Step Speed
Frequency
0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
05.04 5th Step Speed
Frequency
0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-12 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
05.05 6th Step Speed
Frequency
0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
05.06 7th Step Speed
Frequency
0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
05.07 8th Step Speed
Frequency
0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
05.08 9th Step Speed
Frequency
0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
05.09 10th Step Speed
Frequency
0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
05.10 11th Step Speed
Frequency
0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
05.11 12th Step Speed
Frequency
0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
05.12 13th Step Speed
Frequency
0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
05.13 14th Step Speed
Frequency
0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
05.14 15th Step Speed
Frequency
0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
Group 6 Protection Parameters
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
115/230V series: 330.0V to 410.0V 390.0V
460V series: 660.0V to 820.0V 780.0V06.00
Over-Voltage Stall
Prevention
0.0: Disable over-voltage stall prevention
06.01
Over-Current Stall
Prevention during
Accel
0:Disable
20 to 250%
170
06.02
Over-Current Stall
Prevention during
Operation
0:Disable
20 to 250%
170
0: Disabled06.03 Over-Torque
Detection Mode
(OL2) 1: Enabled during constant speed operation.
After the over-torque is detected, keep
running until OL1 or OL occurs.
0
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-13
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
2: Enabled during constant speed operation.
After the over-torque is detected, stop
running.
3: Enabled during accel. After the over-torque
is detected, keep running until OL1 or OL
occurs.
4: Enabled during accel. After the over-torque
is detected, stop running.
06.04
Over-Torque
Detection Level
10 to 200% 150
06.05
Over-Torque
Detection Time
0.1 to 60.0 sec 0.1
0: Standard motor (self cooled by fan)
1: Special motor (forced external cooling)06.06
Electronic Thermal
Overload Relay
Selection
2: Disabled
2
06.07
Electronic Thermal
Characteristic
30 to 600 sec 60
0: No fault
1: Over current (oc)
2: Over voltage (ov)
3: IGBT Overheat (oH1)
06.08
Present Fault
Record
4: Reserved
5: Overload (oL)
6: Overload1 (oL1)
7: Motor over load (oL2)
8: External fault (EF)
9: Current exceeds 2 times rated current
during accel.(ocA)
06.09 Second Most
Recent Fault Record
10: Current exceeds 2 times rated current
during decel.(ocd)
11: Current exceeds 2 times rated current
during steady state operation (ocn)
12: Ground fault (GFF)
13: Reserved
0
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-14 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
14: Phase-Loss (PHL)
15: Reserved
16: Auto Acel/Decel failure (CFA)
17: SW/Password protection (codE)
18: Power Board CPU WRITE failure (cF1.0)
19: Power Board CPU READ failure (cF2.0)
06.10
Third Most Recent
Fault Record
20: CC, OC Hardware protection failure
(HPF1)
21: OV Hardware protection failure (HPF2)
22: GFF Hardware protection failure (HPF3)
06.11 Fourth Most Recent
Fault Record
23: OC Hardware protection failure (HPF4)
24: U-phase error (cF3.0)
25: V-phase error (cF3.1)
06.12
Fifth Most Recent
Fault Record
26: W-phase error (cF3.2)
27: DCBUS error (cF3.3)
28: IGBT Overheat (cF3.4)
29: Reserved
30: Reserved
31: Reserved
32: ACI signal error (AErr)
33: Reserved
34: Motor PTC overheat protection (PtC1)
35-40: Reserved
Group 7 Motor Parameters
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
07.00 Motor Rated Current 30 %FLA to 120% FLA FLA
07.01
Motor No-Load
Current
0%FLA to 99% FLA 0.4*FLA
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-15
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
07.02
Torque
Compensation
0.0 to 10.0 0.0
07.03 Slip Compensation 0.00 to 10.00 0.00
07.04
|
07.09
Reserved
07.10
Accumulative Motor
Operation Time
(Min.)
0 to 1439 Min. 0
07.11
Accumulative Motor
Operation Time
(Day)
0 to 65535 Day 0
07.12
Motor PTC
Overheat Protection
0: Disable
1: Enable
0
07.13
Input Debouncing
Time of the PTC
Protection
0~9999(*2ms) 100
07.14
Motor PTC
Overheat Protection
Level
0.1~10.0V 2.4
07.15
Motor PTC
Overheat Warning
Level
0.1~10.0V 1.2
07.16
Motor PTC
Overheat Reset
Delta Level
0.1~5.0V 0.6
07.17
Treatment of the
Motor PTC
Overheat
0: Warn and RAMP to stop
1: Warn and COAST to stop
2: Warn and keep running
0
Group 8 Special Parameters
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
08.00
DC Brake Current
Level
0 to 100% 0
08.01
DC Brake Time
during Start-Up
0.0 to 60.0 sec 0.0
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-16 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
08.02
DC Brake Time
during Stopping
0.0 to 60.0 sec 0.0
08.03
Start-Point for DC
Brake
0.00 to 600.0Hz 0.00
0: Operation stops after momentary power
loss
1: Operation continues after momentary
power loss, speed search starts with the
Master Frequency reference value
08.04
Momentary Power
Loss Operation
Selection
2: Operation continues after momentary
power loss, speed search starts with the
minimum frequency
0
08.05
Maximum Allowable
Power Loss Time
0.1 to 5.0 sec 2.0
08.06
Base-block Speed
Search
0: Disable speed search
1: Speed search starts with last frequency
command
2: Starts with minimum output frequency
1
08.07
B.B. Time for Speed
Search
0.1 to 5.0 sec 0.5
08.08
Current Limit for
Speed Search
30 to 200% 150
08.09
Skip Frequency 1
Upper Limit
0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
08.10
Skip Frequency 1
Lower Limit
0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
08.11
Skip Frequency 2
Upper Limit
0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
08.12
Skip Frequency 2
Lower Limit
0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
08.13
Skip Frequency 3
Upper Limit
0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
08.14
Skip Frequency 3
Lower Limit
0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
08.15 Auto Restart After
Fault
0 to 10 (0=disable) 0
08.16
Auto Reset Time at
Restart after Fault
0.1 to 6000 sec
60.0
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-17
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
0: Disable
08.17 Auto Energy Saving
1: Enable
0
0: AVR function enable
1: AVR function disable
2: AVR function disable for decel.
08.18 AVR Function
3: AVR function disable for stop
0
08.19 Reserved
08.20
Compensation
Coefficient for Motor
Instability
0.0~5.0
0.0
Group 9 Communication Parameters
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
09.00
Communication
Address
1 to 254 1
0: Baud rate 4800bps
1: Baud rate 9600bps
2: Baud rate 19200bps
09.01 Transmission Speed
3: Baud rate 38400bps
1
0: Warn and keep operating
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
09.02
Transmission Fault
Treatment
3: No warning and keep operating
3
09.03 Time-out Detection
0.1 ~ 120.0 seconds
0.0: Disable
0.0
0: 7,N,2 (Modbus, ASCII)
1: 7,E,1 (Modbus, ASCII)
2: 7,O,1 (Modbus, ASCII)
09.04 Communication
Protocol
3: 8,N,2 (Modbus, RTU)
0
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-18 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
4: 8,E,1 (Modbus, RTU)
5: 8,O,1 (Modbus, RTU)
6: 8,N,1 (Modbus, RTU)
7: 8,E,2 (Modbus, RTU)
8: 8,O,2 (Modbus, RTU)
9: 7,N,1 (Modbus, ASCII)
10: 7,E,2 (Modbus, ASCII)
11: 7,O,2 (Modbus, ASCII)
09.05 Reserved
09.06 Reserved
09.07
Response Delay
Time
0 ~ 200 (unit: 2ms)
1
Group 10 PID Control Parameters
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
0: Disable PID operation
1: Keypad (based on Pr.02.00)
2: 0 to +10V from AVI
3: 4 to 20mA from ACI
10.00
PID Set Point
Selection
4: PID set point (Pr.10.11)
0
10.01
Input Terminal for
PID Feedback
0: Positive PID feedback from external
terminal AVI (0 ~ +10VDC)
1: Negative PID feedback from external
terminal AVI (0 ~ +10VDC)
2: Positive PID feedback from external
terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA)
3: Negative PID feedback from external
terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA)
0
10.02
Proportional Gain
(P)
0.0 to 10.0 1.0
10.03 Integral Time (I) 0.00 to 100.0 sec (0.00=disable) 1.00
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-19
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
10.04
Derivative Control
(D)
0.00 to 1.00 sec
0.00
10.05
Upper Bound for
Integral Control
0 to 100% 100
10.06
Primary Delay Filter
Time
0.0 to 2.5 sec 0.0
10.07
PID Output Freq
Limit
0 to 110% 100
10.08
PID Feedback
Signal Detection
Time
0.0 to 3600 sec (0.0 disable) 60.0
0: Warn and RAMP to stop
1: Warn and COAST to stop10.09
Treatment of the
Erroneous PID
Feedback Signals
2: Warn and keep operation
0
10.10
Gain Over the PID
Detection Value
0.0 to 10.0 1.0
10.11
Source of PID Set
point
0.00 to 600.0Hz
0.00
10.12 PID Feedback Level 1.0 to 50.0% 10.0
10.13
Detection Time of
PID Feedback
0.1 to 300.0 sec 5.0
10.14
Sleep/Wake Up
Detection Time
0.0 to 6550 sec 0.0
10.15 Sleep Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
10.16 Wakeup Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
0: By PID control
10.17
Minimum PID
Output Frequency
Selection 1: By minimum output frequency (Pr.01.05)
0
10.18
PID Control
Detection Signal
Reference
1.0 to 99.9 99.9
10.19
PID Calculation
Mode Selection
0: Series mode
1: Parallel mode
0
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-20 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Parameter Explanation Settings
Factory
Setting
Customer
10.20
Treatment of the
Erroneous PID
Feedback Level
0: Keep operating
1: Coast to stop
2: Ramp to stop
3: Ramp to stop and restart after time set in
Pr.10.21
0
10.21
Restart Delay Time
after Erroneous PID
Deviation Level
1 to 9999 sec 60
10.22
Set Point Deviation
Level
0 to 100% 0
10.23
Detection Time of
Set Point Deviation
Level
0 to 9999 sec 10
10.24
Offset Level of
Liquid Leakage
0 to 50% 0
10.25
Liquid Leakage
Change Detection
0 to 100% (0: disable) 0
10.26
Time Setting for
Liquid Leakage
Change
0.1 to 10.0 sec (0: disable) 0.5
10.27
|
10.33
Reserved
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-21
4.2 Parameter Settings for Applications
Speed Search
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
Windmill, winding
machine, fan and all
inertia loads
Restart free-
running motor
Before the free-running motor is
completely stopped, it can be restarted
without detection of motor speed. The
AC motor drive will auto search motor
speed and will accelerate when its
speed is the same as the motor speed.
08.04~08.08
DC Brake before Running
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
When e.g. windmills,
fans and pumps rotate
freely by wind or flow
without applying power
Keep the free-
running motor at
standstill.
If the running direction of the free-
running motor is not steady, please
execute DC brake before start-up.
08.00
08.01
Energy Saving
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
Punching machines
fans, pumps and
precision machinery
Energy saving and
less vibrations
Energy saving when the AC motor
drive runs at constant speed, yet full
power acceleration and deceleration
For precision machinery it also helps
to lower vibrations.
08.17
Multi-step Operation
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
Conveying machinery
Cyclic operation by
multi-step speeds.
To control 15-step speeds and duration
by simple contact signals.
04.05~04.08
05.00~05.14
Switching acceleration and deceleration times
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
Auto turntable for
conveying machinery
Switching
acceleration and
deceleration times
by external signal
When an AC motor drive drives two or
more motors, it can reach high-speed
but still start and stop smoothly.
01.09~01.12
04.05~04.08
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-22 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Overheat Warning
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
Air conditioner Safety measure
When AC motor drive overheats, it
uses a thermal sensor to have
overheat warning.
03.00
04.05~04.08
Two-wire/three-wire
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
General application
To run, stop,
forward and
reverse by external
terminals
VFD-EL
MI1:("OPEN":STOP)
("CLOSE":FWD)
MI2:("OPEN": STOP)
("CLOSE": REV)
DCM
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
MI1:("OPEN":STOP)
("CLOSE":RUN)
MI2:("OPEN": FWD)
("CLOSE": REV)
DCM
RUN/STOP
FWD/REV
VFD-EL
3-wire
MI3:("OPEN":STOP)
MI1 ("CLOSE":RUN):
MI2:("OPEN": FWD)
("CLOSE": REV)
DCM
STOP
REV/FWD
RUN
VFD-EL
02.00
02.01
02.09
04.04
Operation Command
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
General application
Selecting the
source of control
signal
Selection of AC motor drive control by
external terminals, digital keypad or
RS485.
02.01
04.05~04.08
Frequency Hold
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
General application
Acceleration/
deceleration pause
Hold output frequency during
Acceleration/deceleration
04.05~04.08
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-23
Auto Restart after Fault
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
Air conditioners,
remote pumps
For continuous and
reliable operation
without operator
intervention
The AC motor drive can be
restarted/reset automatically up to 10
times after a fault occurs.
08.15~08.16
Emergency Stop by DC Brake
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
High-speed rotors
Emergency stop
without brake
resistor
AC motor drive can use DC brake for
emergency stop when quick stop is
needed without brake resistor. When
used often, take motor cooling into
consideration.
08.00
08.02
08.03
Over-torque Setting
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
Pumps, fans and
extruders
To protect
machines and to
have continuous/
reliable operation
The over-torque detection level can be
set. Once OC stall, OV stall and over-
torque occurs, the output frequency
will be adjusted automatically. It is
suitable for machines like fans and
pumps that require continuous
operation.
06.00~06.05
Upper/Lower Limit Frequency
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
Pump and fan
Control the motor
speed within
upper/lower limit
When user cannot provide
upper/lower limit, gain or bias from
external signal, it can be set
individually in AC motor drive.
01.07
01.08
Skip Frequency Setting
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
Pumps and fans
To prevent
machine vibrations
The AC motor drive cannot run at
constant speed in the skip frequency
range. Three skip frequency ranges
can be set.
08.09~08.14
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-24 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Carrier Frequency Setting
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
General application Low noise
The carrier frequency can be
increased when required to reduce
motor noise.
02.03
Keep Running when Frequency Command is Lost
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
Air conditioners
For continuous
operation
When the frequency command is lost
by system malfunction, the AC motor
drive can still run. Suitable for
intelligent air conditioners.
02.06
Output Signal during Running
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
General application
Provide a signal for
running status
Signal available to stop braking (brake
release) when the AC motor drive is
running. (This signal will disappear
when the AC motor drive is free-
running.)
03.00
Output Signal in Zero Speed
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
General application
Provide a signal for
running status
When the output frequency is lower
than the min. output frequency, a
signal is given for external system or
control wiring.
03.00
Output Signal at Desired Frequency
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
General application
Provide a signal for
running status
When the output frequency is at the
desired frequency (by frequency
command), a signal is given for
external system or control wiring
(frequency attained).
03.00
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-25
Output Signal for Base Block
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
General application
Provide a signal for
running status
When executing Base Block, a signal
is given for external system or control
wiring.
03.00
Overheat Warning for Heat Sink
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
General application For safety
When heat sink is overheated, it will
send a signal for external system or
control wiring.
03.00
Multi-function Analog Output
Applications Purpose Functions
Related
Parameters
General application
Display running
status
The value of frequency, output
current/voltage can be read by
connecting a frequency meter or
voltage/current meter.
03.06
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-26 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
4.3 Description of Parameter Settings
Group 0: User Parameters This parameter can be set during operation.
00.00 Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive
Settings Read Only Factory setting: ##
00.01 Rated Current Display of the AC Motor Drive
Settings Read Only Factory setting: #.#
Pr. 00.00 displays the identity code of the AC motor drive. The capacity, rated current, rated
voltage and the max. carrier frequency relate to the identity code. Users can use the following
table to check how the rated current, rated voltage and max. carrier frequency of the AC motor
drive correspond to the identity code.
Pr.00.01 displays the rated current of the AC motor drive. By reading this parameter the user
can check if the AC motor drive is correct.
115V/230V Series
kW 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7
HP 0.25 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0
Pr.00-00 0 2 4 6 8 10
Rated Output
Current (A)
1.6 2.5 4.2 7.5 11.0 17.0
Max. Carrier
Frequency
12kHz
460V Series
kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7
HP 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0
Pr.00-00 3 5 7 9 11
Rated Output
Current (A)
1.5 2.5 4.2 5.5 8.2
Max. Carrier
Frequency
12kHz
00.02 Parameter Reset
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Parameter can be read/written
1 All parameters are read-only
8 Keypad lock
9 All parameters are reset to factory settings (50Hz, 230V/400V or
220V/380V depends on Pr.00.12)
10 All parameters are reset to factory settings (60Hz, 115V/220V/440V)
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-27
This parameter allows the user to reset all parameters to the factory settings except the fault
records (Pr.06.08 ~ Pr.06.12).
50Hz: Pr.01.00 and Pr.01.01 are set to 50Hz and Pr.01.02 will be set by Pr.00.12.
60Hz: Pr.01.00 and Pr.01.01 are set to 60Hz and Pr.01.02 is set to 115V, 230V or 460V.
When Pr.00.02=1, all parameters are read-only. To write all parameters, set Pr.00.02=0.
00.03 Start-up Display Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Display the frequency command value (Fxxx)
1 Display the actual output frequency (Hxxx)
2 Display the output current in A supplied to the motor
(Axxx)
3 Display the content of user-defined unit (Uxxx)
4 FWD/REV command
This parameter determines the start-up display page after power is applied to the drive.
00.04 Content of Multi-function Display
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Display the content of user-defined unit (Uxxx)
1
Display the counter value which counts the number of
pulses on TRG terminal
2 Display status of multi-input terminals (d)
3
Display the actual DC BUS voltage in VDC of the AC
motor drive
4
Display the output voltage in VAC of terminals U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3 to the motor.
5 Display PID analog feedback signal value in %
6
Display the power factor angle in º of terminals U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3 to the motor
7
Display the output power in kW of terminals U, V and W
to the motor.
8 Display PID setting and feedback signal.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-28 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
00.04 Content of Multi-function Display
9 Display the signal of AVI analog input terminal (V).
10 Display the signal of ACI analog input terminal (mA).
11 Display the temperature of IGBT (h) in °C
When Pr00.03 is set to 03, the display is according to the setting of Pr00.04.
00.05 User Defined Coefficient K Unit: 0. 1
Settings 0. 1 to d 160.0 Factory Setting: 1.0
The coefficient K determines the multiplying factor for the user-defined unit.
The display value is calculated as follows:
U (User-defined unit) = Actual output frequency * K (Pr.00.05)
Example:
A conveyor belt runs at 13.6m/s at motor speed 60Hz.
K = 13.6/60 = 0.22 (0.226667 rounded to 1 decimal), therefore Pr.00.05=0.2
With Frequency command 35Hz, display shows U and 35*0.2=7.0m/s.
(To increase accuracy, use K=2.2 or K=22.7 and disregard decimal point.)
00.06 Software Version
Settings Read Only
Display #.##
00.07 Reserved
00.08 Password Input Unit: 1
Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting: 0
Display 0~2 (times of wrong password)
The function of this parameter is to input the password that is set in Pr.00.09. Input the correct
password here to enable changing parameters. You are limited to a maximum of 3 attempts.
After 3 consecutive failed attempts, a blinking “codE” will show up to force the user to restart
the AC motor drive in order to try again to input the correct password.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-29
00.09 Password Set Unit: 1
Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting: 0
Display 0 No password set or successful input in Pr. 00.08
1 Password has been set
To set a password to protect your parameter settings.
If the display shows 0, no password is set or password has been correctly entered in Pr.00.08.
All parameters can then be changed, including Pr.00.09.
The first time you can set a password directly. After successful setting of password the display
will show 1.
Be sure to record the password for later use.
To cancel the parameter lock, set the parameter to 0 after inputting correct password into Pr.
00.08.
The password consists of min. 1 digits and max. 4 digits.
How to make the password valid again after decoding by Pr.00.08:
Method 1: Re-input original password into Pr.00.09 (Or you can enter a new password if you
want to use a changed or new one).
Method 2: After rebooting, password function will be recovered.
Password Decode Flow Chart
3 chances to enter the correct
password.
1st time displays "1" if
password is incorrect.
2nd time displays "2", if
password is incorrect.
3rd time displays " code"
(blinking)
If the password was entered
incorrectly after three tries,
the keypad will be locked.
Turn the power OFF/ON to
re-enter the password.
Incorrect Password
END
Displays 0 when
entering correct
password into
Pr.00.08.
00.09 00.08
00.08
Displays 0 when
entering correct
password into
Pr.00.08.
Correct Password
END
00.09
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-30 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
00.10 Reserved
00.11 Reserved
00.12 50Hz Base Voltage Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 230V/400V
1 220V/380V
This parameter determines the base voltage for 50Hz.
00.13 User-defined Value 1 (correspond to max. frequency) Unit: 1
Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting: 0
This parameter corresponds to max. frequency.
When Pr.00-13 is not set to 0, “F” will disappear in frequency mode and the right-most digit will
blink. Many ranges will be changed to Pr.00.13, including potentiometer, UP/DOWN key, AVI,
ACI, multi-step, JOG function and PID function.
When Pr.00.13 is not set to 0 and the frequency source is from communication, please use
Pr.02-18 to change frequency setting because it can’t be set at address 2001H.
00.14 Position of Decimal Point of User-defined Value 1 Unit: 1
Settings 0 to 3 Factory Setting: 0
It is used to set the position of decimal point of Pr.00.13.
Example: when you want to set 10.0, you need to set Pr.00.13 to 100 and Pr.00.14 to 1.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-31
Group 1: Basic Parameters
01.00 Maximum Output Frequency (Fmax) Unit: 0.01
Settings 50.00 to 600.0 Hz Factory Setting: 60.00
This parameter determines the AC motor drive’s Maximum Output Frequency. All the AC
motor drive frequency command sources (analog inputs 0 to +10V and 4 to 20mA) are scaled
to correspond to the output frequency range.
01.01 Maximum Voltage Frequency (Fbase) Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 60.00
This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the
motor nameplate. Maximum Voltage Frequency determines the v/f curve ratio. For example, if
the drive is rated for 460 VAC output and the Maximum Voltage Frequency is set to 60Hz, the
drive will maintain a constant ratio of 7.66 V/Hz (460V/60Hz=7.66V/Hz). This parameter value
must be equal to or greater than the Mid-Point Frequency (Pr.01.03).
01.02 Maximum Output Voltage (Vmax) Unit: 0.1
Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V Factory Setting: 220.0
460V series 0.1 to 510.0V Factory Setting: 440.0
This parameter determines the Maximum Output Voltage of the AC motor drive. The Maximum
Output Voltage setting must be smaller than or equal to the rated voltage of the motor as
indicated on the motor nameplate. This parameter value must be equal to or greater than the
Mid-Point Voltage (Pr.01.04).
01.03 Mid-Point Frequency (Fmid) Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 1.50
This parameter sets the Mid-Point Frequency of the V/f curve. With this setting, the V/f ratio
between Minimum Frequency and Mid-Point frequency can be determined. This parameter
must be equal to or greater than Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) and equal to or less
than Maximum Voltage Frequency (Pr.01.01).
01.04 Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid) Unit: 0.1
Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V Factory Setting: 10.0
460V series 0.1 to 510.0V Factory Setting: 20.0
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-32 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
This parameter sets the Mid-Point Voltage of any V/f curve. With this setting, the V/f ratio
between Minimum Frequency and Mid-Point Frequency can be determined. This parameter
must be equal to or greater than Minimum Output Voltage (Pr.01.06) and equal to or less than
Maximum Output Voltage (Pr.01.02).
01.05 Minimum Output Frequency (Fmin) Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 1.50
This parameter sets the Minimum Output Frequency of the AC motor drive. This parameter
must be equal to or less than Mid-Point Frequency (Pr.01.03).
01.06 Minimum Output Voltage (Vmin) Unit: 0.1
Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V Factory Setting: 10.0
460V series 0.1 to 510.0V Factory Setting: 20.0
This parameter sets the Minimum Output Voltage of the AC motor drive. This parameter must
be equal to or less than Mid-Point Voltage (Pr.01.04).
The settings of Pr.01.01 to Pr.01.06 have to meet the condition of Pr.01.02 ≥ Pr.01.04 ≥
Pr.01.06 and Pr.01.01 ≥ Pr.01.03 ≥ Pr.01.05.
01.07 Output Frequency Upper Limit Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.1 to 120.0% Factory Setting: 110.0
This parameter must be equal to or greater than the Output Frequency Lower Limit (Pr.01.08).
The Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) is regarded as 100%.
Output Frequency Upper Limit value = (Pr.01.00 * Pr.01.07)/100.
01.05 01.03 01.01
01.06
01.04
01.02
01.00
01.0701.08
V/f Curve
Voltage
Frequency
Output Frequency
Lower Limit
Output Frequency
Upper Limit
The limit of
Output
Frequency
Mid-point
Freq.
Maximum
Output
Frequency
Maximum
Output
Voltage
Mid-point
Voltage
Minimum
Output
Voltage Minimum
Output
Freq.
Maximum Voltage
Frequency
(Base Frequency)
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-33
01.08 Output Frequency Lower Limit Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.0 to 100.0% Factory Setting: 0.0
The Upper/Lower Limits are to prevent operation errors and machine damage.
If the Output Frequency Upper Limit is 50Hz and the Maximum Output Frequency is 60Hz, the
Output Frequency will be limited to 50Hz.
If the Output Frequency Lower Limit is 10Hz, and the Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) is
set to 1.0Hz, then any Command Frequency between 1.0-10Hz will generate a 10Hz output
from the drive. If the command frequency is less than 1.0Hz, drive will be in ready status
without output.
This parameter must be equal to or less than the Output Frequency Upper Limit (Pr.01.07).
The Output Frequency Lower Limit value = (Pr.01.00 * Pr.01.08) /100.
01.09 Acceleration Time 1 (Taccel 1) Unit: 0.1/0.01
01.10 Deceleration Time 1 (Tdecel 1) Unit: 0.1/0.01
01.11 Acceleration Time 2 (Taccel 2) Unit: 0.1/0.01
01.12 Deceleration Time 2 (Tdecel 2) Unit: 0.1/0.01
Settings 0.1 to 600.0 sec / 0.01 to 600.0 sec Factory Setting: 10.0
Acceleration/deceleration time 1 or 2 can be switched by setting the external terminals MI3~
MI12 to 7 (set Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08 to 7 or Pr.11.06~Pr.11.11 to 7).
01.19 Accel/Decel Time Unit
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Unit: 0.1 sec
1 Unit: 0.01 sec
The Acceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to ramp
from 0 Hz to Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00). The rate is linear unless S-Curve is
“Enabled”; see Pr.01.17.
The Deceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to
decelerate from the Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) down to 0 Hz. The rate is linear
unless S-Curve is “Enabled.”, see Pr.01.18.
The Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1, 2, 3, 4 are selected according to the Multi-function Input
Terminals Settings. See Pr.04.05 to Pr.04.08 for more details.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-34 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
In the diagram shown below, the Acceleration/Deceleration Time of the AC motor drive is the
time between 0 Hz to Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00). Suppose the Maximum Output
Frequency is 60 Hz, Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) is 1.0 Hz, and
Acceleration/Deceleration Time is 10 seconds. The actual time for the AC motor drive to
accelerate from start-up to 60 Hz and to decelerate from 60Hz to 1.0Hz is in this case 9.83
seconds. ((60-1) * 10/60=9.83secs).
01.00
01.09 01.11 01.10 01.12
Frequency
TimeAccel. Time Decel. Time
The definition of
Accel./Decel. Time
Max. output
Frequency
setting
operation
frequency
Min. output
frequency
01.05
Resulting Resulting
Accel. Time Decel. Time
Resulting Accel./Decel. Time
0 Hz
01.13 Jog Acceleration Time Unit: 0.1/0.01
Settings 0.1 to 600.0/0.01 to 600.0 sec Factory Setting: 1.0
01.14 Jog Deceleration Time Unit: 0.1/0.01
Settings 0.1 to 600.0/0.01 to 600.0 sec Factory Setting: 1.0
01.15 Jog Frequency Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.10 to Fmax (Pr.01.00)Hz Factory Setting: 6.00
Only external terminal JOG (MI3 to MI12) can be used. When the Jog command is “ON”, the
AC motor drive will accelerate from Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) to Jog Frequency
(Pr.01.15). When the Jog command is “OFF”, the AC motor drive will decelerate from Jog
Frequency to zero. The used Accel/Decel time is set by the Jog Accel/Decel time (Pr.01.13,
Pr.01.14).
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-35
Before using the JOG command, the drive must be stopped first. And during Jog operation,
other operation commands are not accepted, except FORWARD/REVERSE commands.
01.13 01.12
01.21
Frequency
TimeJOG Accel. Time JOG Decel. Time
The definition of JOG Accel./Decel. Time
01.15
JOG
Frequency
Min. output
frequency
01.05
0 Hz
01.14
01.16 Auto-Acceleration / Deceleration
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Linear acceleration / deceleration
1 Auto acceleration, linear Deceleration.
2 Linear acceleration, auto Deceleration.
3 Auto acceleration / deceleration (set by load)
4 Auto acceleration / deceleration (set by Accel/Decel Time setting)
With Auto acceleration / deceleration it is possible to reduce vibration and shocks during
starting/stopping the load.
During Auto acceleration the torque is automatically measured and the drive will accelerate to
the set frequency with the fastest acceleration time and the smoothest starting current.
During Auto deceleration, regenerative energy is measured and the motor is smoothly stopped
with the fastest deceleration time.
But when this parameter is set to 4, the actual accel/decel time will be equal to or more than
parameter Pr.01.09 ~Pr.01.12.
Auto acceleration/deceleration makes the complicated processes of tuning unnecessary. It
makes operation efficient and saves energy by acceleration without stall and deceleration
without brake resistor.
In applications with brake resistor or brake unit, Auto deceleration shall not be used.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-36 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
01.17 Acceleration S-Curve Unit: 0.1/0.01
01.18 Deceleration S-Curve Unit: 0.1/0.01
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0.0 S-curve disabled
0.1 to 10.0/0.01 to 10.00 S-curve enabled (10.0/10.00 is the smoothest)
This parameter is used to ensure smooth acceleration and deceleration via S-curve.
The S-curve is disabled when set to 0.0 and enabled when set to 0.1 to 10.0/0.01 to 10.00.
Setting 0.1/0.01 gives the quickest and setting 10.0/10.00 the longest and smoothest S-curve.
The AC motor drive will not follow the Accel/Decel Times in Pr.01.09 to Pr.01.12.
The diagram below shows that the original setting of the Accel/Decel Time is only for reference
when the S-curve is enabled. The actual Accel/Decel Time depends on the selected S-curve
(0.1 to 10.0).
The total Accel. Time=Pr.01.09 + Pr.01.17 or Pr.01.11 + Pr.01.17
The total Decel. Time=Pr.01.10 + Pr.01.18 or Pr.01.12 + Pr.01.18
3
1 2
4
1
3
4
2
1 2
3 4
Disable S curve
Enable S curve
Acceleration/deceleration Characteristics
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-37
Group 2: Operation Method Parameters
02.00 Source of First Master Frequency Command
Factory Setting: 1
02.09 Source of Second Master Frequency Command
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys or Multi-function Inputs UP/DOWN.
Last used frequency saved. (Digital keypad is optional)
1 0 to +10V from AVI
2 4 to 20mA from ACI
3 RS-485 (RJ-45) communication
4 Digital keypad potentiometer
These parameters set the Master Frequency Command Source of the AC motor drive.
The factory setting for master frequency command is 1. (digital keypad is optional.)
Setting 2: use the ACI/AVI switch on the AC motor drive to select ACI or AVI.
When the AC motor drive is controlled by external terminal, please refer to Pr.02.05 for details.
The first /second frequency/operation command is enabled/disabled by Multi Function Input
Terminals. Please refer to Pr.04.05 ~ 04.08.
02.01 Source of First Operation Command
Factory Setting: 1
Settings 0 Digital keypad (Digital keypad is optional)
1 External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled.
2 External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled.
3 RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication. Keypad STOP/RESET
enabled.
4 RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication. Keypad STOP/RESET
disabled.
The factory setting for source of first operation command is 1. (digital keypad is optional.)
When the AC motor drive is controlled by external terminal, please refer to Pr.02.05/Pr.04.04
for details.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-38 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
02.10
Combination of the First and Second Master Frequency
Command
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 First Master Frequency Command Only
1 First Master Frequency + Second Master Frequency
2 First Master Frequency - Second Master Frequency
02.02 Stop Method
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 STOP: ramp to stop E.F.: coast to stop
1 STOP: coast to stop E.F.: coast to stop
2 STOP: ramp to stop E.F.: ramp to stop
3 STOP: coast to stop E.F.: ramp to stop
The parameter determines how the motor is stopped when the AC motor drive receives a valid
stop command or detects External Fault.
Ramp: the AC motor drive decelerates to Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05)
according to the deceleration time and then stops.
Coast: the AC motor drive stops the output instantly upon command, and the motor
free runs until it comes to a complete standstill.
The motor stop method is usually determined by the characteristics of the motor load and
how frequently it is stopped.
(1) It is recommended to use “ramp to stop” for safety of personnel or to prevent
material from being wasted in applications where the motor has to stop after the
drive is stopped. The deceleration time has to be set accordingly.
(2) If motor free running is allowed or the load inertia is large, it is recommended to
select “coast to stop”. For example: blowers, punching machines, centrifuges
and pumps.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-39
RUN STOP RUN STOP
Frequency Frequency
TimeTime
output
frequency
output
frequency
motor
speed
motor
speed
operation
command
operation
command
stops according to
decel eration time
free run to stop
ramp to stop and free run to stop
EF
Frequency Frequency
frequency output
motor
speed
EF
operation
command
stops according to
decel eration time
When Pr.02.02 is set to 2 or 3
frequency
output
free run to stop
operation
command
When Pr.02.02 is set to 0 or 1
motor
speed
02.03 PWM Carrier Frequency Selections Unit: 1
115V/230V/460V Series
Power 0.25 to 5hp (0.2kW to 3.7kW)
Setting Range 2 to 12 kHz
Factory Setting 8 kHz
This parameter determines the PWM carrier frequency of the AC motor drive.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-40 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
2kHz
8kHz
12kHz
Carrier
Frequency
Acoustic
Noise
Electromagnetic
Noise or leakage
current
Heat
Dissipation
Current
Wave
Significant
MinimalSignificant
Minimal
Minimal
Significant
Minimal
Significant
From the table, we see that the PWM carrier frequency has a significant influence on the
electromagnetic noise, AC motor drive heat dissipation, and motor acoustic noise.
The PWM carrier frequency will be decreased automatically by the ambient temperature and
output current of the AC motor drives. It is used to prevent AC motor drive overheat and
extend IGBT’s life. Therefore, it is necessary to have this kind of protection method. Take an
example of 460V models, assume that the carrier frequency is 12kHz, ambient temperature is
50 degrees C with single AC motor drive. If the output current exceeds 80% * rated current,
the AC motor drive will decrease the carrier frequency automatically by the following chart. If
output current is around 100% * rated current, the carrier frequency will decrease from 12k Hz
to 8k Hz.
Mounting method
Method A
Frame BFrame A
150mm
150mm
50mm
50mm
Frame BFrame A
Method B
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-41
40%
50%
60%
For 460V Series
80%
90%
100%
70%
Carrier
Frequency
RatedCurrent(%)
2kHz
4kHz 8kHz
10kHz
12kHz
6kHz
50 with mounting method A℃
40 with mounting method B℃
25 with mounting method B℃
40%
50%
60%
For 115V/230V Series
80%
90%
100%
2kHz
4kHz 8kHz
10kHz
12kHz
6kHz
70%
RatedCurrent(%)
Carrier
Frequency
50 with mounting method A℃
40 with mounting method B℃
35 with mounting method A℃
25 with mounting method B℃
02.04 Motor Direction Control
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Forward/Reverse operation enabled
1 Reverse operation disabled
2 Forward operation disabled
This parameter is used to disable one direction of rotation of the AC motor drive direction of
rotation.
02.05 Line Start Lockout
Factory Setting: 1
Settings 0 Disable. Operation status is not changed even if operation
command source Pr.02.01 is changed.
1 Enable. Operation status is not changed even if operation command
source Pr.02.01 is changed.
2 Disable. Operation status will change if operation command source
Pr.02.01 is changed.
3 Enable. Operation status will change if operation command source
Pr.02.01 is changed.
This parameter determines the response of the drive upon power on and operation command
source is changed.
Pr.02.05 Start lockout (Run when power is ON)
Operation status when operation
command source is changed
0 Disable (AC motor drive will run) Keep previous status
1 Enable (AC motor drive doesn’t run) Keep previous status
2 Disable (AC motor drive will run)
Change according to the new
operation command source
3 Enable (AC motor drive doesn’t run)
Change according to the new
operation command source
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-42 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
When the operation command source is from external terminal and operation command is ON
(MI1/MI2-DCM=closed), the AC motor drive will operate according to Pr.02.05 after power is
applied. <For terminals MI1 and MI2 only>
1. When Pr.02.05 is set to 0 or 2, AC motor drive will run immediately.
2. When Pr.02.05 is set to 1 or 3, AC motor drive will remain stopped until operation
command is received after previous operation command is cancelled.
RUN RUN
STOP STOP
Pr.02.01=1 or 2
This action will follow MI1/DCM
or MI2/DCM status
(ON is close/OFF is open)
ON OFFMI1-DCM (close)
Pr.02.01=0
output frequency
Pr.02.05=0 or 2
Change operation
command source
output frequency
Pr.02.05=1 or 3
When the operation command source isn’t from the external terminals, independently from
whether the AC motor drive runs or stops, the AC motor drive will operate according to
Pr.02.05 if the two conditions below are both met.
1. When operation command source is changed to external terminal (Pr.02.01=1 or 2)
2. The status of terminal and AC motor drive is different.
And the operation of the AC motor drive will be:
1. When setting 0 or 1, the status of AC motor drive is not changed by the terminal status.
2. When setting 2 or 3, the status of AC motor drive is changed by the terminal status.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-43
It needs to received a run command
after previous command is cancelled
ON OFFMI1-DCM (close)
power is applied
output frequency
Pr.02.05=0 or 1
output frequency
Pr.02.05=2 or 3
ON
OFF ON
it will run
it won't run
when power is applied
The Line Start Lockout feature does not guarantee that the motor will never start under this
condition. It is possible the motor may be set in motion by a malfunctioning switch.
02.06 Loss of ACI Signal (4-20mA)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Decelerate to 0Hz
1 Coast to stop and display “AErr”
2 Continue operation by the last frequency command
This parameter determines the behavior when ACI is lost.
When set to 1, it will display warning message “AErr” on the keypad in case of loss of ACI
signal and execute the setting. When ACI signal is recovered, the warning message will stop
blinking. Please press “RESET” key to clear it.
02.07 Up/Down Mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 By digital keypad up/down keys mode
1 Based on Accel/Decel Time acc. to Pr.01.09 to 01.12
2 Constant speed (acc. to Pr. 02.08)
3 Pulse input unit (acc. to Pr. 02.08)
02.08
Accel/Decel Rate of Change of UP/DOWN Operation with
Constant Speed
Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.01~10.00 Hz/2ms Factory Setting: 0.01
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-44 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
These parameters determine the increase/decrease of the master frequency when operated
via the Multi-function Inputs when Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08 are set to 10 (Up command) or 11 (Down
command).
When Pr.02.07 is set to 0: increase/decrease the frequency by using UP/DOWN key. It is valid
only when the AC motor drive is running.
When Pr.02.07 is set to 1: increase/decrease the frequency by acceleration/deceleration
settings. It is valid only when the AC motor drive is running.
When Pr.02.07 is set to 2: increase/decrease the frequency by Pr.02.08.
When Pr.02.07 is set to 3: increase/decrease the frequency by Pr.02.08 (unit: pulse input).
02.11 Keypad Frequency Command Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 60.00
This parameter can be used to set frequency command or read keypad frequency command.
02.12 Communication Frequency Command Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 60.00
This parameter can be used to set frequency command or read communication frequency
command.
02.13
The Selections for Saving Keypad or Communication Frequency
Command
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Save Keypad & Communication Frequency
1 Save Keypad Frequency only
2 Save Communication Frequency only
This parameter is used to save keypad or RS-485 frequency command.
02.14 Initial Frequency Selection (for keypad & RS485)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 By Current Freq Command
1 By Zero Freq Command
2 By Frequency Display at Stop
02.15 Initial Frequency Setpoint (for keypad & RS485) Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.00 ~ 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 60.00
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-45
These parameters are used to determinate the frequency at stop:
When setting Pr.02.14 to 0: the initial frequency will be current frequency.
When setting Pr.02.14 to 1: the initial frequency will be 0.
When setting Pr.02.14 to 2: the initial frequency will be Pr.02.15.
02.16 Display the Master Freq Command Source
Settings Read Only Factory setting: ##
You can read the master frequency command source by this parameter.
Display Value Bit Function
1 Bit0=1 Master Freq Command Source by First Freq Source (Pr.02.00).
2 Bit1=1 Master Freq Command Source by Second Freq Source (Pr.02.09).
4 Bit2=1 Master Freq Command Source by Multi-input function
02.17 Display the Operation Command Source
Settings Read Only Factory setting: ##
You can read the operation source by this parameter.
Display Value Bit Function
1 Bit0=1 Operation Command Source by Digital Keypad
2 Bit1=1 Operation Command Source by RS485 communication
4 Bit2=1 Operation Command Source by External Terminal
8 Bit3=1 Operation Command Source by Multi-input function
02.18 User-defined Value 2 Setting Unit: 1
Settings 0 to Pr.00.13 Factory Setting: 0
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-46 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Use this parameter to change frequency when (1) Pr.00.13 is not set to 0 and frequency
source is from communication or (2) Pr.02.10 is not set to 0.
02.19 User-defined Value 2 Unit: 1
Settings Read-only Factory Setting: 0
For example: suppose that the frequency source is the first master frequency + second master
frequency command (first master frequency is from keypad and second master frequency is
from AVI), user-defined value 1 is set to 180.0(Pr.00.13 is set to 1800, Pr.00.14 is set to 1).
AVI=2V=180.0/(2V/10V)=36.0, frequency is 36.0/(180.0/60.0)=12.0Hz
Pr.02.18=30.0, frequency is 30.0/(60.0/180.0)=10.0Hz
At this moment, the keypad will display 66.0(36.0+30.0) and the output frequency is
22.0Hz(12.0+10.0). When reading the value from communication address, the value will be
shown as follows: 2102H and 2103H are 22.0Hz, 0212H(Pr.02.18) is 30.0, 0213H(Pr.02.19) is
66.0.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-47
Group 3: Output Function Parameters
03.00 Multi-function Output Relay (RA1, RB1, RC1)
Factory Setting: 8
Settings Function Description
0 No Function
1 AC Drive Operational Active when the drive is ready or RUN command is “ON”.
2
Master Frequency
Attained
Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output
frequency setting.
3 Zero Speed
Active when Command Frequency is lower than the
Minimum Output Frequency.
4 Over-Torque Detection
Active as long as over-torque is detected. (Refer to Pr.06.03
~ Pr.06.05)
5
Baseblock (B.B.)
Indication
Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off
during baseblock. Base block can be forced by Multi-function
input (setting 09).
6 Low-Voltage Indication Active when low voltage(Lv) is detected.
7
Operation Mode
Indication
Active when operation command is controlled by external
terminal.
8 Fault Indication
Active when a fault occurs (oc, ov, oH1, oL, oL1, EF, cF3,
HPF, ocA, ocd, ocn, GFF).
9
Desired Frequency
Attained
Active when the desired frequency (Pr.03.02) is attained.
10
Terminal Count Value
Attained
Active when the counter reaches Terminal Count Value.
11
Preliminary Count Value
Attained
Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Count Value.
12
Over Voltage Stall
supervision
Active when the Over Voltage Stall function operating
13
Over Current Stall
supervision
Active when the Over Current Stall function operating
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-48 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Settings Function Description
14
Heat Sink Overheat
Warning
When heatsink overheats, it will signal to prevent OH turn off
the drive. When it is higher than 85o
C (185o
F), it will be ON.
15 Over Voltage supervision Active when the DC-BUS voltage exceeds level
16 PID supervision
Active when the PID feedback signal is abnormal (Refer to
Pr.10.12 and Pr.13.)
17 Forward command Active when the direction command is FWD
18 Reverse command Active when the direction command is REV
19
Zero Speed Output
Signal
Active when the drive is standby or stop
20
Communication Warning
(FbE,Cexx, AoL2, AUE,
SAvE)
Active when there is a Communication Warning
21
Brake Control (Desired
Frequency Attained)
Active when output frequency ≥Pr.03.11. Deactivated when
output frequency ≤Pr.03.12 after STOP command.
22 AC Motor Drive Ready Active when AC motor drive is ready.
03.01 Reserved
03.02 Desired Frequency Attained Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.00 to 600.0 Hz Factory Setting: 0.00
If a multi-function output terminal is set to function as Desired Frequency Attained (Pr.03.00
=09), then the output will be activated when the programmed frequency is attained.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-49
-2Hz
4Hz2Hz
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF ON OFF
OFF ON OFF
ON
ON
detection
range
Frequency
master
frequency
desired
frequency
03.02
detection range detection
range
DC braking time
during stop
Time
waiting time
for
frequency
run/stop
master freq. attained
(output signal)
desired freq. attained
setting 03 zero speed indication
setting 19 zero speed indication
output timing chart of multiple function terminals
when setting to frequency attained or zero speed indication
03.03 Analog Output Signal (AFM)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Analog Frequency Meter (0 to Maximum Output Frequency)
1 Analog Current Meter (0 to 250% of rated AC motor drive current)
This parameter sets the function of the AFM output 0~+10VDC (ACM is common).
03.04 Analog Output Gain Unit: 1
Settings 1 to 200% Factory Setting: 100
This parameter sets the voltage range of the analog output signal AFM.
When Pr.03.03 is set to 0, the analog output voltage is directly proportional to the output
frequency of the AC motor drive. With Pr.03.04 set to 100%, the Maximum Output Frequency
(Pr.01.00) of the AC motor drive corresponds to +10VDC on the AFM output.
Similarly, if Pr.03.03 is set to 1, the analog output voltage is directly proportional to the output
current of the AC drive. With Pr.03.04 set to 100%, then 2.5 times the rated current
corresponds to +10VDC on the AFM output.
NOTE
Any type of voltmeter can be used. If the meter reads full scale at a voltage less than 10V, Pr.
03.04 should be set using the following formula:
Pr. 03.04 = ((meter full scale voltage)/10) x 100%
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-50 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
For Example: When using the meter with full scale of 5 volts, adjust Pr.03.04 to 50%. If
Pr.03.03 is set to 0, then 5VDC will correspond to Maximum Output Frequency.
03.05 Terminal Count Value Unit: 1
Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting: 0
This parameter sets the count value of the internal counter. To increase the internal counter,
one of Pr.04.05 to 04.08 should be set to 12. Upon completion of counting, the specified output
terminal will be activated. (Pr.03.00 set to 10).
When the display shows c555, the drive has counted 555 times. If display shows c555•, it
means that real counter value is between 5,550 and 5,559.
03.06 Preliminary Count Value Unit: 1
Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting: 0
When the counter value reaches this value, the corresponding multi-function output terminal
will be activated, provided one of Pr.03.00set to 11 (Preliminary Count Value Setting). This
multi-function output terminal will be deactivated upon completion of Terminal Count Value
Attained.
The timing diagram:
Terminal Count Value
(Pr. 03.00=10)
Preliminary Count Value
(Pr. 03.00=11)
Display
(Pr.00.04=1)
TRG
Counter Trigger
The width of trigger signal
should not be less than
2ms(<250 Hz)
2msec
2msec
Ex:03.05=5,03.06=3
03.07 EF Active when Terminal Count Value Attained
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Terminal count value attained, no EF display
1 Terminal count value attained, EF active
If this parameter is set to 1 and the desired value of counter is attained, the AC drive will treat
it as a fault. The drive will stop and show the “EF” message on the display.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-51
03.08 Fan Control
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Fan always ON
1 1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF
2 Fan ON when AC motor drive runs, fan OFF when AC motor drive
stops
3 Fan ON when preliminary heatsink temperature attained
This parameter determines the operation mode of the cooling fan.
03.09 Reserved
03.10 Reserved
03.11 Brake Release Frequency Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 0.00
03.12 Brake Engage Frequency Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 0.00
These two parameters are used to set control of mechanical brake via the output terminals
(Relay) when Pr.03.00is set to 21. Refer to the following example for details.
Example:
1. Case 1: Pr.03.12 ≥ Pr.03.11
2. Case 2: Pr.03.12 ≤ Pr.03.11
Case 1: Pr.03.12
Case 2: Pr.03.12
Pr. 03.11
Frequency
Output
Time
Run/Stop
Case 1: Pr.03.00=21
Case 2: Pr.03.00=21
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-52 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
03.13 Display the Status of Relay
Settings Read Only Factory setting: ##
For standard AC motor drive, the multi-function output terminals are falling-edge triggered.
0: Relay is ON; 1: Relay is OFF.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-53
Group 4: Input Function Parameters
04.00 Keypad Potentiometer Bias Unit: 0. 1
Settings 0.0 to 100.0% Factory Setting: 0.0
04.01 Keypad Potentiometer Bias Polarity
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Positive Bias
1 Negative Bias
04.02 Keypad Potentiometer Gain Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.1 to 200.0% Factory Setting: 100.0
04.03
Keypad Potentiometer Negative Bias, Reverse Motion
Enable/Disable
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 No Negative Bias Command
1 Negative Bias: REV Motion Enabled
Example 1: Standard application
This is the most used setting. The user only needs to set Pr.02.00 to 04. The frequency command
comes from keypad potentiometer.
60Hz
0Hz
0V 5V 10V
Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
Potentiometer
Pr.04.00 =0%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04.01 =0--Positive bias
Pr.04.02 =100%--Input gain
Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command
30Hz
Example 2: Use of bias
This example shows the influence of changing the bias. When the input is 0V the output frequency is
10 Hz. At mid-point a potentiometer will give 40 Hz. Once the Maximum Output Frequency is reached,
any further increase of the potentiometer or signal will not increase the output frequency. (To use the
full potentiometer range, please refer to Example 3.) The value of external input voltage/current 0-
8.33V corresponds to the setting frequency 10-60Hz.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-54 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
60Hz
0Hz 0V 5V 10V
Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
Potentiometer
Pr.04.00 =16.7%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04.01 =0--Positive bias
Pr.04.02 =100%--Input gain
Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command
Gain:100%
Bias adjustment:((10Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=16.7%
10Hz
Bias
Adjustment
40Hz
Example 3: Use of bias and gain for use of full range
This example also shows a popular method. The whole scale of the potentiometer can be used as
desired. In addition to signals of 0 to 10V, the popular voltage signals also include signals of 0 to 5V,
or any value under 10V. Regarding the setting, please refer to the following examples.
60Hz
0Hz0V 5V 10V
Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
Potentiometer
Pr.04.00 =20.0%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04.01 =0--Positive bias
Pr.04.02 =83.3%--Input gain
Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command
Gain:(10V/(10V+2V))*100%=83.3%
Bias adjustment:((10Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=20.0%
10HzBias
Adjustment
-2V
XV
Example 4: Use of 0-5V potentiometer range via gain adjustment
This example shows a potentiometer range of 0 to 5 Volts. Instead of adjusting gain as example
below, you can set Pr. 01.00 to 120Hz to achieve the same results.
Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
Potentiometer
Pr.04.00 =0.0%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04.01 =0--Positive bias
Pr.04.02 =200%--Input gain
Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command
Gain:(10V/5V)*100%=200%
60Hz
0Hz 0V 5V
30Hz
Gain
adjustment
10V
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-55
Example 5: Use of negative bias in noisy environment
In this example, a 1V negative bias is used. In noisy environments it is advantageous to use negative
bias to provide a noise margin (1V in this example).
60Hz
0Hz
0V 10V
Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
Potentiometer
Pr.04.00 =10.0%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04.01 =1--Negative bias
Pr.04.02 =100%--Input gain
Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command
Gain:100%
Bias adjustment:((6Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=10.0%
Negative
bias 6Hz 1V
54Hz
Example 6: Use of negative bias in noisy environment and gain adjustment to use full
potentiometer range
In this example, a negative bias is used to provide a noise margin. Also a potentiometer frequency
gain is used to allow the Maximum Output Frequency to be reached.
60Hz
0Hz
0V 10V
Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
Negative
bias 6.6Hz
1V
Bias
adjustment
Potentiometer
Pr.04.00 =10.0%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04.01 =1--Negative bias
Pr.04.02 =111%--Input gain
Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command
Gain:(10V/9V)*100%=111%
Bias adjustment:((6.6Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=10.0%
Example 7: Use of 0-10V potentiometer signal to run motor in FWD and REV direction
In this example, the input is programmed to run a motor in both forward and reverse direction. The
motor will be idle when the potentiometer position is at mid-point of its scale. Using the settings in this
example disables the external FWD and REV controls.
Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
Potentiometer
Pr.04.00 =50.0%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04.01 =1--Negative bias
Pr.04.02 =200%--Input gain
Pr.04.03 =1--Negative bias: REV motion enabled
Gain:(10V/5V)*100%=200%
Bias adjustment:((60Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=200%
60Hz
30Hz
0Hz0V
5V 10V
30Hz
60Hz
REV
FWD
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-56 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Example 8: Use negative slope
In this example, the use of negative slope is shown. Negative slopes are used in applications for
control of pressure, temperature or flow. The sensor that is connected to the input generates a large
signal (10V) at high pressure or flow. With negative slope settings, the AC motor drive will slow stop
the motor. With these settings the AC motor drive will always run in only one direction (reverse). This
can only be changed by exchanging 2 wires to the motor.
60Hz
0Hz
0V 10V
Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
Potentiometer
Pr.04.00 =100%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04.01 =0--Positive bias
Pr.04.02 =100%--Input gain
Pr.04.03 =1--Negative bias: REV motion enabled
Gain:(10V/10V)*100%=100%
Bias adjustment:((60Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=100%
negative slope
04.11 Minimum AVI Voltage Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.0 to 10.0V Factory Setting: 0.0
04.12 Minimum AVI Frequency (percentage of Pr.01.00) Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.0 to 100.0% Factory Setting: 0.0
04.13 Maximum AVI Voltage Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.0 to 10.0V Factory Setting: 10.0
04.14 Maximum AVI Frequency (percentage of Pr. 01.00) Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.0 to 100.0% Factory Setting: 100.0
04.15 Minimum ACI Current Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.0 to 20.0mA Factory Setting: 4.0
04.16 Minimum ACI Frequency (percentage of Pr. 01.00) Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.0 to 100.0% Factory Setting: 0.0
04.17 Maximum ACI Current Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.0 to 20.0mA Factory Setting: 20.0
04.18 Maximum ACI Frequency (percentage of Pr. 01.00) Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.0 to 100.0% Factory Setting: 100.0
The above parameters are used to set the analog input reference values. The min and max
frequencies are based on Pr.01.00 (during open-loop control) as shown in the following.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-57
01.00
analog input
04.14
04.18
04.12
04.16
04.11
04.15 04.17
01.00=60.00 Hz
AVI
ACI
analog input
04.14=70
04.18=50
04.12=30
04.16=0
04.11=0V 04.15=4mA 04.13=10V
04.17=20mA
04.19 Reserved
04.20 Reserved
04.21 Reserved
04.22 Reserved
04.23 Reserved
04.24 Reserved
04.25 Reserved
04.04
Multi-function Input Terminal (MI1, MI2) 2-wire/ 3-wire Operation
Control Modes
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 2-wire: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP
1 2-wire: FWD/REV, RUN/STOP
2 3-wire Operation
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-58 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
There are three different types of control modes:
04.04
External Terminal
0
2-wire
FWD /STOP
REV / STOP VFD-EL
MI1:("OPEN":STOP)
("CLOSE":FWD)
MI2:("OPEN": STOP)
("CLOSE": REV)
DCM
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
1
2-wire
FWD/ REV
RUN / STOP
MI1:("OPEN":STOP)
("CLOSE":RUN)
MI2:("OPEN": FWD)
("CLOSE": REV)
DCM
RUN/STOP
FWD/REV
VFD-EL
2 3-wire
MI3:("OPEN":STOP)
MI1 ("CLOSE":RUN):
MI2:("OPEN": FWD)
("CLOSE": REV)
DCM
STOP
REV/FWD
RUN
VFD-EL
04.05 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI3)
Factory Setting: 1
04.06 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI4)
Factory Setting: 2
04.07 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI5)
Factory Setting: 3
04.08 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI6)
Factory Setting: 4
Settings Function Description
0 No Function
Any unused terminals should be programmed to 0 to insure they
have no effect on operation.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-59
Settings Function Description
1
Multi-Step Speed
Command 1
2
Multi-Step Speed
Command 2
3
Multi-Step Speed
Command 3
4
Multi-Step Speed
Command 4
These four inputs select the multi-speed defined by Pr.05.00 to
Pr.05.14 as shown in the diagram at the end of this table.
NOTE: Pr.05.00 to Pr.05.14 can also be used to control output
speed. There are 17 step speed frequencies (including
Master Frequency and Jog Frequency) to select for
application.
5 External Reset
The External Reset has the same function as the Reset key on
the Digital keypad. After faults such as O.H., O.C. and O.V. are
cleared this input can be used to reset the drive.
6 Accel/Decel Inhibit
When the command is active, acceleration and deceleration is
stopped and the AC motor drive maintains a constant speed.
7
Accel/Decel Time
Selection
Command
Used to select the one of 2 Accel/Decel Times (Pr.01.09 to
Pr.01.12). See explanation at the end of this table.
8
Jog Operation
Control
Parameter value 08 programs one of the Multi-function Input
Terminals MI3 ∼ MI6 (Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08) for Jog control.
NOTE: Programming for Jog operation by 08 can only be
done while the motor is stopped. (Refer to parameter
Pr.01.13~Pr.01.15)
9
External Base
Block
(Refer to Pr. 08.06)
Parameter value 09 programs a Multi-function Input Terminals for
external Base Block control.
NOTE: When a Base-Block signal is received, the AC motor
drive will block all output and the motor will free run. When
base block control is deactivated, the AC drive will start its
speed search function and synchronize with the motor
speed, and then accelerate to Master Frequency.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-60 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Settings Function Description
10
UP: Increase
Master Frequency
11
DOWN: Decrease
Master Frequency
Increase/decrease the Master Frequency each time an input is
received or continuously when the input stays active. When both
inputs are active at the same time, the Master Frequency
increase/decrease is halted. Please refer to Pr.02.07, 02.08. This
function is also called “motor potentiometer”.
12 Counter Trigger
Parameter value 12 programs one of the Multi-function Input
Terminals MI3~MI6 (Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08) to increment the AC
drive’s internal counter. When an input is received, the counter is
incremented by 1.
13 Counter Reset
When active, the counter is reset and inhibited. To enable
counting the input should be OFF. Refer to Pr.03.05 and 03.06.
14 External Fault
Parameter value 14 programs one of the Multi-function Input
Terminals MI3~MI6 (Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08) to be External Fault
(E.F.) inputs.
15
PID function
disabled
When an input ON with this setting is ON, the PID function will be
disabled.
16 Output Shutoff Stop
AC motor drive will stop output and the motor free run if one of
these settings is enabled. If the status of terminal is changed, AC
motor drive will restart from 0Hz.
17
Parameter lock
enable
When this setting is enabled, all parameters will be locked and
write parameters is disabled.
18
Operation
Command
Selection (Pr.02.01
setting/external
terminals)
ON: Operation command via Ext. Terminals
OFF: Operation command via Pr.02.01 setting
Pr.02.01 is disabled if this parameter value 18 is set. See the
explanation below this table.
19
Operation
Command
Selection (Pr 02.01
setting/Digital
Keypad)
ON: Operation command via Digital Keypad
OFF: Operation command via Pr.02.01 setting
Pr.02.01 is disabled if this parameter value 19 is set. See the
explanation below this table.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-61
Settings Function Description
20
Operation
Command
Selection (Pr 02.01
setting/
Communication)
ON: Operation command via Communication
OFF: Operation command via Pr.02.01 setting
Pr.02.01 is disabled if this parameter value 20 is set. See the
explanation below this table.
21 Forward/Reverse
This function has top priority to set the direction for running (If
“Pr.02.04=0”)
22
Source of second
frequency
command enabled
Used to select the first/second frequency command source. Refer
to Pr.02.00 and 02.09.
ON: 2nd
Frequency command source
OFF: 1st
Frequency command source
04.09 Multi-function Input Contact Selection Unit: 1
Settings 0 to 4095 Factory Setting: 0
This parameter can be used to set the status of multi-function terminals (MI1~MI6 (N.O./N.C.)
for standard AC motor drive).
The MI1~MI3 setting will be invalid when the operation command source is external terminal
(2/3wire).
12345 0
0=N.O
1=N.C
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
Weights
Bit
The Setting method: It needs to convert binary number (6-bit) to decimal number for input.
For example: if setting MI3, MI5, MI6 to be N.C. and MI1, MI2, MI4 to be N.O. The setting
value Pr.04.09 should be bit5X25
+bit4X24
+bit2X22
= 1X25
+1X24
+1X22
= 32+16+4=52 as shown
in the following.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-62 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
01011 0
Weights
Bit
0=N.O
1=N.C
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
The setting value
= bit5x2 +bit4x2 +bit2x2
5 4 2
= 1x2 +1x2 +1x2
5 4 2
=32+16+4
Setting 04.09
=52
NOTE:
2 =16384 2 =8192 2 =4096 2 =2048 2 =1024
2 =512 2 =256 2 =128 2 =64 2 =32
2 =16 2 =8 2 =4 2 =2 2 =1
14 13 12 11 10
9 8 7 6 5
4 3 2 1 0
This parameter is to delay the signals on digital input terminals. 1 unit is 2 msec, 2 units are 4
msec, etc. The delay time is to debounce noisy signals that could cause the digital terminals to
malfunction.
04.26 Display the Status of Multi-function Input Terminal
Settings Read Only Factory setting: ##
Display Bit0: MI1 Status
Bit1: MI2 Status
Bit2: MI3 Status
Bit3: MI4 Status
Bit4: MI5 Status
Bit5: MI6 Status
The multi-function input terminals are falling-edge triggered. For standard AC motor drive,
there are MI1 to MI6 and Pr.04.26 will display 63 (111111) for no action.
12345 0
0=Active
1=off
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
Weights
Bit
04.10 Digital Terminal Input Debouncing Time Unit: 2 msec
Settings 1 to 20 Factory Setting: 1
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-63
For Example:
If Pr.04.26 displays 52, it means MI1, MI2 and MI4 are active.
The display value 52= 32+16+4 =1 X 25
+ 1X 24
+ 1X 22
= bit 6 X 25
+ bit 5 X 24
+ bit 3 X 22
01011 0
0=Active
1=Off
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
Weights
Bit
This parameter is used to select the terminals to be internal terminal or external terminal. You
can activate internal terminals by Pr.04.28. A terminal cannot be both internal terminal and
external terminal at the same time.
For standard AC motor drive, the multi-function input terminals are MI1 to MI6 as shown in the
following.
12345 0
0=external terminal
1=internal terminal
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
Weights
Bit
The Setting method is convert binary number to decimal number for input.
For example: if setting MI3, MI5, MI6 to be internal terminals and MI1, MI2, MI4 to be external
terminals. The setting value should be bit5X25
+bit4X24
+bit2X22
= 1X25
+1X24
+1X22
=
32+16+4=52 as shown in the following.
04.27 Internal/External Multi-function Input Terminals Selection Unit: 1
Settings 0 to 4095 Factory Setting: 0
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-64 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
01011 0
Weights
Bit
0=external terminal
1=internal terminal
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
This parameter is used to set the internal terminal action via keypad or communication.
For standard AC motor drive, the multi-function input terminals are MI1 to MI6 as shown in the
following.
12345 0
0=set internal terminal to be OFF
1= ONset internal terminal to be
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
Weights
Bit
For example, if setting MI3, MI5 and MI6 to be ON, Pr.04.28 should be set to
bit5X25
+bit4X24
+bit2X22
= 1X25
+1X24
+1X22
= 32+16+4=52 as shown in the following.
01011 0
Weights
Bit
0=OFF
1=ON
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
04.28 Internal Terminal Status Unit: 1
Settings 0 to 4095 Factory Setting: 0
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-65
Group 5: Multi-step speeds parameters
05.00 1st Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01
05.01 2nd Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01
05.02 3rd Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01
05.03 4th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01
05.04 5th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01
05.05 6th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01
05.06 7th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01
05.07 8th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01
05.08 9th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01
05.09 10th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01
05.10 11th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01
05.11 12th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01
05.12 13th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01
05.13 14th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01
05.14 15th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 0.00
The Multi-function Input Terminals (refer to Pr.04.05 to 04.08) are used to select one of the AC
motor drive Multi-step speeds. The speeds (frequencies) are determined by Pr.05.00 to 05.14
as shown in the following.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-66 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
ONONONON
ON
ON
ON
ON
05.00
05.01
05.02
05.03
05.04
05.05
05.06
05.07
05.08
05.09
05.10
05.11
05.12
05.13
05.14
01.15
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Multi-function
terminals
04.05~04.08
Frequency
Master Speed
JOG Freq.
2nd speed
( 2)MI3 to MI6
1st speed
( to MI6 1)MI3
Jog Freq.
Multi-speed via External Terminals
Run/Stop
PU/external terminals
/communication
3rd speed
( 3)MI3 to MI6
4th speed
( 4)MI3 to MI6
MI6=4 MI5=3 MI4=2 MI3=1
Master frequency OFF OFF OFF OFF
1st
speed OFF OFF OFF ON
2nd
speed OFF OFF ON OFF
3rd
speed OFF OFF ON ON
4th
speed OFF ON OFF OFF
5th
speed OFF ON OFF ON
6th
speed OFF ON ON OFF
7th
speed OFF ON ON ON
8th
speed ON OFF OFF OFF
9th
speed ON OFF OFF ON
10th
speed ON OFF ON OFF
11th
speed ON OFF ON ON
12th
speed ON ON OFF OFF
13th
speed ON ON OFF ON
14th
speed ON ON ON OFF
15th
speed ON ON ON ON
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-67
Group 6: Protection Parameters
06.00 Over-Voltage Stall Prevention Unit: 0.1
Settings 115V/230V series 330.0 to 410.0V Factory Setting: 390.0
460V series 660.0 to 820.0V Factory Setting: 780.0
0 Disable Over-voltage Stall Prevention (with brake unit or
brake resistor)
During deceleration, the DC bus voltage may exceed its Maximum Allowable Value due to
motor regeneration. When this function is enabled, the AC motor drive will not decelerate
further and keep the output frequency constant until the voltage drops below the preset value
again.
Over-Voltage Stall Prevention must be disabled (Pr.06.00=0) when a brake unit or brake
resistor is used.
NOTE
With moderate inertia load, over-voltage stall prevention will not occur and the real deceleration time
will be equal to the setting of deceleration time. The AC drive will automatically extend the
deceleration time with high inertia loads. If the deceleration time is critical for the application, a brake
resistor or brake unit should be used.
high voltage at DC side
over-voltage
detection level
output
frequency
time
Deceleration characteristic
when Over-Voltage Stall
Prevention enabled
Frequency Held
time
previous deceleration time
actual time to decelerate to stop when over-voltage
stall prevention is enabled
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-68 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
06.01 Over-Current Stall Prevention during Acceleration Unit: 1
Settings 20 to 250% Factory Setting: 170
0: disable
A setting of 100% is equal to the Rated Output Current of the drive.
During acceleration, the AC drive output current may increase abruptly and exceed the value
specified by Pr.06.01 due to rapid acceleration or excessive load on the motor. When this
function is enabled, the AC drive will stop accelerating and keep the output frequency constant
until the current drops below the maximum value.
06.01
Over-Current
Detection
Level
Output
Frequency
Over-Current Stall
prevention during
Acceleration,
frequency held
output current
time
setting
frequency
previous acceleration time
actual acceleration time when over-current stall
prevention is enabled
06.02 Over-current Stall Prevention during Operation Unit: 1
Settings 20 to 250% Factory Setting: 170
0: disable
If the output current exceeds the setting specified in Pr.06.02 when the drive is operating, the
drive will decrease its output frequency to prevent the motor stall. If the output current is lower
than the setting specified in Pr.06.02, the drive will accelerate again to catch up with the set
frequency command value.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-69
Over-Current
Detection
Level
06.02 Output Current
Output
Frequency
Over-Current Stall
Prevention during
Operation, output
frequency decrease
over-current stall prevention during operation
06.03 Over-Torque Detection Mode (OL2)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Over-Torque detection disabled.
1 Over-Torque detection enabled during constant speed operation.
After over-torque is detected, keep running until OL1 or OL occurs.
2 Over-Torque detection enabled during constant speed operation.
After over-torque is detected, stop running.
3 Over-Torque detection enabled during acceleration. After over-
torque is detected, keep running until OL1 or OL occurs.
4 Over-Torque detection enabled during acceleration. After over-
torque is detected, stop running.
This parameter determines the operation mode of the drive after the over-torque (OL2) is
detected via the following method: if the output current exceeds the over-torque detection level
(Pr.06.04) longer than the setting of Pr.06.05 Over-Torque Detection Time, the warning
message “OL2” is displayed. If a Multi-functional Output Terminal is set to over-torque
detection (Pr.03.00=04), the output is on. Please refer to Pr.03.00 for details.
06.04 Over-Torque Detection Level (OL2) Unit: 1
Settings 10 to 200% Factory Setting: 150
This setting is proportional to the Rated Output Current of the drive.
06.05 Over-Torque Detection Time (OL2) Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.1 to 60.0 sec Factory Setting: 0.1
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-70 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
This parameter sets the time for how long over-torque must be detected before “OL2” is
displayed.
06.06 Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Selection (OL1)
Factory Setting: 2
Settings 0 Operate with a Standard Motor (self-cooled by fan)
1 Operate with a Special Motor (forced external cooling)
2 Operation disabled
This function is used to protect the motor from overloading or overheating.
40
20
60
80
100
25 50 100 150
rated frequency of the motor %
ratedcurrentofthemotor%
Standard motor
(self-cooled by fan)
rated frequency of the motor %
ratedcurrentofthemotor%
Special Motor
(forced external cooling)
25 50 100 150
40
20
60
80
100
06.07 Electronic Thermal Characteristic Unit: 1
Settings 30 to 600 sec Factory Setting: 60
The parameter determines the time required for activating the I2
t electronic thermal protection
function. The graph below shows I2
t curves for 150% output power for 1 minute.
350
50Hz or more
10Hz
5Hz
0 50 100 150 250200
300
250
200
150
100
50
Operation
time (seconds)
Load
factor (%)
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-71
06.08 Present Fault Record
06.09 Second Most Recent Fault Record
06.10 Third Most Recent Fault Record
06.11 Fourth Most Recent Fault Record
06.12 Fifth Most Recent Fault Record
Factory Setting: 0
Readings 0 No fault
1 Over-current (oc)
2 Over-voltage (ov)
3 IGBT Overheat (oH1)
4 Reserved
5 Overload(oL)
6 Overload (oL1)
7 Motor Overload (oL2)
8 External Fault (EF)
9 Hardware protection failure (HPF)
10 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel.(ocA)
11 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel.(ocd)
12 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state
operation (ocn)
13 Reserved
14 Phase-loss (PHL)
15 Reserved
16 Auto accel/decel failure (CFA)
17 Software/password protection (codE)
18 Power Board CPU WRITE Failure (cF1.0)
19 Power Board CPU READ Failure (cF2.0)
20 CC, OC Hardware protection failure (HPF1)
21 OV Hardware protection failure (HPF2)
22 GFF Hardware protection failure (HPF3)
23 OC Hardware protection failure (HPF4)
24 U-phase error (cF3.0)
25 V-phase error (cF3.1)
26 W-phase error (cF3.2)
27 DCBUS error (cF3.3)
28 IGBT Overheat (cF3.4)
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-72 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
29-31 Reserved
32 ACI signal error (AErr)
33 Reserved
34 Motor PTC overheat protection (PtC1)
35-40 Reserved
In Pr.06.08 to Pr.06.12 the five most recent faults that occurred, are stored. After removing the
cause of the fault, use the reset command to reset the drive.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-73
Group 7: Motor Parameters
07.00 Motor Rated Current Unit: 1
Settings 30% FLA to 120% FLA Factory Setting: FLA
Use the following formula to calculate the percentage value entered in this parameter:
(Motor Current / AC Drive Current) x 100%
with Motor Current=Motor rated current in A on type shield
AC Drive Current=Rated current of AC drive in A (see Pr.00.01)
07.01 Motor No-load Current Unit: 1
Settings 0% FLA to 90% FLA Factory Setting: 0.4*FLA
The rated current of the AC drive is regarded as 100%. The setting of the Motor no-load
current will affect the slip compensation.
The setting value must be less than Pr.07.00 (Motor Rated Current).
07.02 Torque Compensation Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.0 to 10.0 Factory Setting: 0.0
This parameter may be set so that the AC drive will increase its voltage output to obtain a
higher torque.
Too high torque compensation can overheat the motor.
07.03 Slip Compensation Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.00 to 10.00 Factory Setting: 0.00
While driving an asynchronous motor, increasing the load on the AC motor drive will cause an
increase in slip and decrease in speed. This parameter may be used to compensate the slip by
increasing the output frequency. When the output current of the AC motor drive is bigger than
the motor no-load current (Pr.07.01), the AC drive will adjust its output frequency according to
this parameter.
07.04 Reserved
07.05 Reserved
07.06 Reserved
07.07 Reserved
07.08 Reserved
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-74 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
07.09 Reserved
07.10 Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Min.) Unit: 1
Settings 0~1439 Factory Setting: 0
07.11 Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Day) Unit: 1
Settings 0 ~65535 Factory Setting: 0
Pr.07.10 and Pr.07.11 are used to record the motor operation time. They can be cleared by
setting to 0 and time is less than 1 minute is not recorded.
07.12 Motor PTC Overheat Protection Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Disable
1 Enable
07.14 Motor PTC Overheat Protection Level Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.1~10.0V Factory Setting: 2.4
When the motor is running at low frequency for a long time, the cooling function of the motor
fan will be lower. To prevent overheating, it needs to have a Positive Temperature Coefficient
thermoistor on the motor and connect its output signal to the drive’s corresponding control
terminals.
When the source of first/second frequency command is set to AVI (02.00=1/02.09=1), it will
disable the function of motor PTC overheat protection (i.e. Pr.07.12 cannot be set to 1).
If temperature exceeds the setting level, motor will be coast to stop and is
displayed. When the temperature decreases below the level of (Pr.07.15-Pr.07.16) and
stops blinking, you can press RESET key to clear the fault.
Pr.07.14 (overheat protection level) must exceed Pr.07.15 (overheat warning level).
The PTC uses the AVI-input and is connected via resistor-divider as shown below.
1. The voltage between +10V to ACM: lies within 10.4V~11.2V.
2. The impedance for AVI is around 47kΩ.
3. Recommended value for resistor-divider R1 is 1~10kΩ.
4. Please contact your motor dealer for the curve of temperature and resistance value for
PTC.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-75
AVI
ACM
+10V
PTC
VFD-EL
47kΩ
resistor-divider
R1
internal circuit
Refer to following calculation for protection level and warning level.
1. Protection level
Pr.07.14= V+10 * (RPTC1//47K) / [R1+( RPTC1//47K)]
2. Warning level
Pr.07.16= V+10 * (RPTC2//47K) / [R1+( RPTC2//47K)]
3. Definition:
V+10: voltage between +10V-ACM, Range 10.4~11.2VDC
RPTC1: motor PTC overheat protection level. Corresponding voltage level set in Pr.07.14,
RPTC2: motor PTC overheat warning level. Corresponding voltage level set in Pr.07.15,
47kΩ: is AVI input impedance, R1: resistor-divider (recommended value: 1~20kΩ)
Take the standard PTC thermistor as example: if protection level is 1330Ω, the voltage
between +10V-ACM is 10.5V and resistor-divider R1 is 4.4kΩ. Refer to following calculation
for Pr.07.14 setting.
1330//47000=(1330*47000)/(1330+47000)=1293.4
10.5*1293.4/(4400+1293.4)=2.38(V) ≒2.4(V)
Therefore, Pr.07.14 should be set to 2.4.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-76 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
550
1330
temperature ( )℃
resistor value ( )Ω
Tr
Tr-5℃ Tr+5℃
07.15 Motor PTC Overheat Warning Level Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.1~10.0V Factory Setting: 1.2
07.16 Motor PTC Overheat Reset Delta Level Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.1~5.0V Factory Setting: 0.6
07.17 Treatment of the motor PTC Overheat
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Warn and RAMP to stop
1 Warn and COAST to stop
2 Warn and keep running
If temperature exceeds the motor PTC overheat warning level (Pr.07.15), the drive will act
according to Pr.07.17 and display . If the temperature decreases below the result
(Pr.07.15 minus Pr.07.16), the warning display will disappear.
07.13 Input Debouncing Time of the PTC Protection Unit: 2ms
Settings 0~9999 (is 0-19998ms) Factory Setting: 100
This parameter is to delay the signals on PTC analog input terminals. 1 unit is 2 msec, 2 units
are 4 msec, etc.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-77
Group 8: Special Parameters
08.00 DC Brake Current Level Unit: 1
Settings 0 to 100% Factory Setting: 0
This parameter sets the level of DC Brake Current output to the motor during start-up and
stopping. When setting DC Brake Current, the Rated Current (Pr.00.01) is regarded as 100%.
It is recommended to start with a low DC Brake Current Level and then increase until proper
holding torque has been achieved.
08.01 DC Brake Time during Start-up Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.0 to 60.0 sec Factory Setting: 0.0
This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current after a RUN command. When
the time has elapsed, the AC motor drive will start accelerating from the Minimum Frequency
(Pr.01.05).
08.02 DC Brake Time during Stopping Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.0 to 60.0 sec Factory Setting: 0.0
This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current during stopping. If stopping
with DC Brake is desired, Pr.02.02 Stop Method must be set to 0 or 2 for Ramp to Stop.
08.03 Start-Point for DC Brake Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 0.00
This parameter determines the frequency when DC Brake will begin during deceleration.
Run/Stop
ON OFF
01.05 08.03
Output Frequency
Minimum Output
Frequency
Start-Point for
DC Brake
Time during
Stopping
DC Brake Time
during Stopping
DC Brake Time
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-78 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
DC Brake during Start-up is used for loads that may move before the AC drive starts, such as
fans and pumps. Under such circumstances, DC Brake can be used to hold the load in
position before setting it in motion.
DC Brake during stopping is used to shorten the stopping time and also to hold a stopped load
in position. For high inertia loads, a brake resistor for dynamic brake may also be needed for
fast decelerations.
08.04 Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Operation stops (coast to stop) after momentary power loss.
1 Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search
starts with the Master Frequency reference value.
2 Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search
starts with the minimum frequency.
This parameter determines the operation mode when the AC motor drive restarts from a
momentary power loss.
08.05 Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.1 to 5.0 sec Factory Setting: 2.0
If the duration of a power loss is less than this parameter setting, the AC motor drive will
resume operation. If it exceeds the Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time, the AC motor drive
output is then turned off (coast stop).
The selected operation after power loss in Pr.08.04 is only executed when the maximum
allowable power loss time is ≤5 seconds and the AC motor drive displays “Lu”.
But if the AC motor drive is powered off due to overload, even if the maximum allowable power
loss time is ≤5 seconds, the operation mode as set in Pr.08.04 is not executed. In that case it
starts up normally.
08.06 Base Block Speed Search
Factory Setting: 1
Settings 0 Disable
1 Speed search starts with last frequency command
2 Speed search starts with minimum output frequency (Pr.01.05)
This parameter determines the AC motor drive restart method after External Base Block is
enabled.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-79
Output frequency
(H)
Output voltage(V)
08.08 Current Limit
for Speed SearchSpeed
FWD Run
Time
B.B.
Fig 1:B.B. Speed Search with Last Output Frequency Downward Timing Chart
(Speed Search Current Attains Speed Search Level)
A
Input B.B. signal
Stop output voltage
Disable B.B. signal
Waiting time 08.07
Speed Search
Synchronization speed detection
Time
B.B.
Fig 2: B.B. Speed Search with Last Output Frequency Downward Timing Chart
(Speed Search Current doesn't Attain Speed Search Level)
A
Input B.B. signal
Stop output voltage
Disable B.B. signal
Waiting time 08.07
Speed Search
Synchronization speed detection
Output frequency
(H)
08.08 Current Limit
for Speed SearchSpeed
FWD Run
Time
B.B.
Fig3: B.B. Speed Search with Minimum Output Frequency Upward Timing Chart
A
Input B.B. signal
Stop output voltage
Disable B.B. signal
Waiting time 08.07
Restart
Synchronization speed detection
Keep accelerating
A
Output frequency
(H)
06.01
Over current
stall prevention
during acceleration
FWD Run
08.07 Baseblock Time for Speed Search (BB) Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.1 to 5.0 sec Factory Setting: 0.5
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-80 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
When momentary power loss is detected, the AC motor drive will block its output and then wait
for a specified period of time (determined by Pr.08.07, called Base-Block Time) before
resuming operation. This parameter should be set at a value to ensure that any residual
regeneration voltage from the motor on the output has disappeared before the drive is
activated again.
This parameter also determines the waiting time before resuming operation after External
Baseblock and Auto Restart after Fault (Pr.08.15).
08.08 Current Limit for Speed Search Unit: 1
Settings 30 to 200% Factory Setting: 150
Following a momentary power loss, the AC motor drive will start its speed search operation
only if the output current is greater than the value set by Pr.08.08. When the output current is
less than the value of Pr.08.08, the AC motor drive output frequency is at “speed
synchronization point”. The drive will start to accelerate or decelerate back to the operating
frequency at which it was running prior to the power loss.
Output
Frequency
Output
Voltage
08.06
08.05
08.04=1
08.06
08.05
08.04=2
Power
Input
Maximum Allowable
Power Loss Time
Baseblock Time
Speed Search
Speed
Synchronization
Detection
Maximum
Allowable Power
Baseblock Time
08.09 Skip Frequency 1 Upper Limit Unit: 0.01
08.10 Skip Frequency 1 Lower Limit Unit: 0.01
08.11 Skip Frequency 2 Upper Limit Unit: 0.01
08.12 Skip Frequency 2 Lower Limit Unit: 0.01
08.13 Skip Frequency 3 Upper Limit Unit: 0.01
08.14 Skip Frequency 3 Lower Limit Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 0.00
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-81
These parameters set the Skip Frequencies. It will cause the AC motor drive never to remain
within these frequency ranges with continuous frequency output.
These six parameters should be set as follows Pr.08.09 ≥ Pr.08.10 ≥ Pr.08.11 ≥ Pr.08.12 ≥
Pr.08.13 ≥ Pr.08.14.
The frequency ranges may be overlapping.
0
08.09
08.10
08.11
08.12
08.13
08.14
setting frequency
internalfrequencycommand
08.15 Auto Restart After Fault Unit: 1
Settings 0 to 10 Factory Setting: 0
0 Disable
Only after an over-current OC or over-voltage OV fault occurs, the AC motor drive can be
reset/restarted automatically up to 10 times.
Setting this parameter to 0 will disable automatic reset/restart operation after any fault has
occurred.
When enabled, the AC motor drive will restart with speed search, which starts at the frequency
before the fault. To set the waiting time before restart after a fault, please set Pr. 08.07 Base
Block Time for Speed Search.
08.16 Auto Reset Time at Restart after Fault Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.1 to 6000 sec Factory Setting: 60.0
This parameter should be used in conjunction with Pr.08.15.
For example: If Pr.08.15 is set to 10 and Pr.08.16 is set to 600s (10 min), and if there is no
fault for over 600 seconds from the restart for the previous fault, the auto reset times for restart
after fault will be reset to 10.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-82 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
08.17 Automatic Energy-saving
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Energy-saving operation disabled
1 Energy-saving operation enabled
70%
100%
Output
Voltage
Output Frequency
During auto-energy saving
operation is the output
voltage lowered as much
as possible to keep the load.
The output voltage is maximally
lowered to 70% of the normal
output voltage
08.18 Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 AVR function enabled
1 AVR function disabled
2 AVR function disabled for deceleration
3 AVR function disabled for stop
The rated voltage of the motor is usually 230V/200VAC 50Hz/60Hz and the input voltage of
the AC motor drive may vary between 180V to 264 VAC 50Hz/60Hz. Therefore, when the AC
motor drive is used without AVR function, the output voltage will be the same as the input
voltage. When the motor runs at voltages exceeding the rated voltage with 12% - 20%, its
lifetime will be shorter and it can be damaged due to higher temperature, failing insulation and
unstable torque output.
AVR function automatically regulates the AC motor drive output voltage to the Maximum
Output Voltage (Pr.01.02). For instance, if Pr.01.02 is set at 200 VAC and the input voltage is
at 200V to 264VAC, then the Maximum Output Voltage will automatically be reduced to a
maximum of 200VAC.
When the motor ramps to stop, the deceleration time is longer. When setting this parameter to
2 with auto acceleration/deceleration, the deceleration will be quicker.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-83
08.19 Reserved
08.20 Compensation Coefficient for Motor Instability Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.0~5.0 Factory Setting: 0.0
The drift current will occur in a specific zone of the motor and it will make motor instable. By
using this parameter, it will improve this situation greatly.
The drift current zone of the high-power motors is usually in the low frequency area.
It is recommended to set to more than 2.0.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-84 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Group 9: Communication Parameters
There is a built-in RS-485 serial interface, marked RJ-45 near to the control terminals. The pins are
defined below:
RS-485
Serial interface
1: Reserved 2: EV
5: SG+ 6: Reserved
7: Reserved 8: Reserved
3: GND
4: SG-
8 1
Each VFD-EL AC motor drive has a pre-assigned communication address specified by Pr.09.00. The
RS485 master then controls each AC motor drive according to its communication address.
09.00 Communication Address
Settings 1 to 254 Factory Setting: 1
If the AC motor drive is controlled by RS-485 serial communication, the communication
address for this drive must be set via this parameter. And the communication address for each
AC motor drive must be different and unique.
09.01 Transmission Speed
Factory Setting: 1
Settings 0 Baud rate 4800 bps (bits / second)
1 Baud rate 9600 bps
2 Baud rate 19200 bps
3 Baud rate 38400 bps
This parameter is used to set the transmission speed between the RS485 master (PC, etc.)
and AC motor drive.
09.02 Transmission Fault Treatment
Factory Setting: 3
Settings 0 Warn and keep operating
1 Warn and RAMP to stop
2 Warn and COAST to stop
3 No warning and keep operating
This parameter is set to how to react if transmission errors occur.
See list of error messages below (see section 3.6.)
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-85
09.03 Time-out Detection Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.0 to 120.0 sec Factory Setting: 0.0
0.0 Disable
If Pr.09.03 is not equal to 0.0, Pr.09.02=0~2, and there is no communication on the bus during
the Time Out detection period (set by Pr.09.03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad.
09.04 Communication Protocol
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,2>
1 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,1>
2 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,1>
3 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,2>
4 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,1>
5 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,1>
6 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,1>
7 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,2>
8 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,2>
9 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,1>
10 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,2>
11 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,2>
1. Control by PC
A VFD-EL can be set up to communicate in Modbus networks using one of the following
modes: ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) or RTU (Remote
Terminal Unit). Users can select the desired mode along with the serial port
communication protocol in Pr.09.04.
Code Description:
The CPU will be about 1 second delay when using communication reset. Therefore, there
is at least 1 second delay time in master station.
ASCII mode:
Each 8-bit data is the combination of two ASCII characters. For example, a 1-byte data:
64 Hex, shown as ‘64’ in ASCII, consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex).
Character ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘4’ ‘5’ ‘6’ ‘7’
ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-86 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Character ‘8’ ‘9’ ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘E’ ‘F’
ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H
RTU mode:
Each 8-bit data is the combination of two 4-bit hexadecimal characters. For example, 64
Hex.
2. Data Format
For ASCII:
( 7.N.2)
( 7.E.1)
Start
bit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Stop
bit
10-bit character frame
( 7.O.1)
Odd
parity
Start
bit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Stop
bit
10-bit character frame
Even
parity
Start
bit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Stop
bit
7-bit character
10-bit character frame
Stop
bit
7-bit character
7-bit character
( 7.N.1)
( 7.E.2)
Start
bit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Stop
bit
11-bit character frame
( 7.O.2)
Odd
parity
Start
bit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Stop
bit
11-bit character frame
Even
parity
Start
bit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Stop
bit
7-bit character
9-bit character frame
7-bit character
7-bit character
Stop
bit
Stop
bit
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-87
For RTU:
Start
bit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Stop
bit
Stop
bit
8-bit character
11-bit character frame
( 8.N.2 )
Start
bit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Even
parity
Stop
bit
11-bit character frame
( 8.E.1 )
Start
bit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Stop
bit
11-bit character frame
( 8.O.1 )
Odd
parity
7
7
7
8-bit character
8-bit character
Start
bit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Stop
bit
8-bit character
10-bit character frame
( 8.N.1 )
Start
bit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Even
parity
Stop
bit
12-bit character frame
( 8.E.2 )
Start
bit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Stop
bit
12-bit character frame
( 8.O.2 )
Odd
parity
7
7
7
8-bit character
8-bit character
Stop
bit
Stop
bit
3. Communication Protocol
3.1 Communication Data Frame:
ASCII mode:
STX Start character ‘:’ (3AH)
Address Hi
Address Lo
Communication address:
8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes
Function Hi
Function Lo
Command code:
8-bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes
DATA (n-1)
to
DATA 0
Contents of data:
Nx8-bit data consist of 2n ASCII codes
n<=20, maximum of 40 ASCII codes
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-88 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
LRC CHK Hi
LRC CHK Lo
LRC check sum:
8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCII codes
END Hi
END Lo
End characters:
END1= CR (0DH), END0= LF(0AH)
RTU mode:
START A silent interval of more than 10 ms
Address Communication address: 8-bit address
Function Command code: 8-bit command
DATA (n-1)
to
DATA 0
Contents of data:
n×8-bit data, n<=40 (20 x 16-bit data)
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
CRC check sum:
16-bit check sum consists of 2 8-bit characters
END A silent interval of more than 10 ms
3.2 Address (Communication Address)
Valid communication addresses are in the range of 0 to 254. A communication address equal
to 0, means broadcast to all AC drives (AMD). In this case, the AMD will not reply any
message to the master device.
00H: broadcast to all AC drives
01H: AC drive of address 01
0FH: AC drive of address 15
10H: AC drive of address 16
:
FEH: AC drive of address 254
For example, communication to AMD with address 16 decimal (10H):
ASCII mode: Address=’1’,’0’ => ‘1’=31H, ‘0’=30H
RTU mode: Address=10H
3.3 Function (Function code) and DATA (data characters)
The format of data characters depends on the function code.
03H: read data from register
06H: write single register
08H: loop detection
The available function codes and examples for VFD-EL are described as follows:
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-89
(1) 03H: multi read, read data from registers.
Example: reading continuous 2 data from register address 2102H, AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Command message: Response message:
STX ‘:’ STX ‘:’
‘0’ ‘0’
Address
‘1’
Address
‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function
‘3’
Function
‘3’
‘2’ ‘0’
‘1’
Number of data
(Count by byte) ‘4’
‘0’ ‘1’
Starting data
address
‘2’ ‘7’
‘0’ ‘7’
‘0’
Content of starting
address
2102H
‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
Number of data
(count by word)
‘2’ ‘0’
‘D’ ‘0’
LRC Check
‘7’
Content of address
2103H
‘0’
CR ‘7’
END
LF
LRC Check
‘1’
CR
END
LF
RTU mode:
Command message: Response message:
Address 01H Address 01H
Function 03H Function 03H
21HStarting data
address 02H
Number of data
(count by byte)
04H
00H 17HNumber of data
(count by word) 02H
Content of address
2102H 70H
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-90 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
CRC CHK Low 6FH 00H
CRC CHK High F7H
Content of address
2103H 00H
CRC CHK Low FEH
CRC CHK High 5CH
(2) 06H: single write, write single data to register.
Example: writing data 6000(1770H) to register 0100H. AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Command message: Response message:
STX ‘:’ STX ‘:’
‘0’ ‘0’
Address
‘1’
Address
‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function
‘6’
Function
‘6’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Data address
‘0’
Data address
‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
‘7’ ‘7’
‘7’ ‘7’
Data content
‘0’
Data content
‘0’
‘7’ ‘7’
LRC Check
‘1’
LRC Check
‘1’
CR CR
END
LF
END
LF
RTU mode:
Command message: Response message:
Address 01H Address 01H
Function 06H Function 06H
01H 01H
Data address
00H
Data address
00H
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-91
17H 17H
Data content
70H
Data content
70H
CRC CHK Low 86H CRC CHK Low 86H
CRC CHK High 22H CRC CHK High 22H
3.4 Check sum
ASCII mode:
LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check) is calculated by summing up, module 256, the values
of the bytes from ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal
representation of the 2’s-complement negation of the sum.
For example, reading 1 word from address 0401H of the AC drive with address 01H.
STX ‘:’
‘0’Address 1
Address 0 ‘1’
‘0’Function 1
Function 0 ‘3’
‘0’
‘4’
‘0’
Starting data address
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
Number of data
‘1’
‘F’LRC Check 1
LRC Check 0
‘6’
CREND 1
END 0
LF
01H+03H+04H+01H+00H+01H=0AH, the 2’s-complement negation of 0AH is F6H.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-92 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
RTU mode:
Address 01H
Function 03H
21HStarting data address
02H
00HNumber of data
(count by word) 02H
CRC CHK Low 6FH
CRC CHK High F7H
CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps:
Step 1: Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFH.
Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of
the 16-bit CRC register, putting the result in the CRC register.
Step 3: Examine the LSB of CRC register.
Step 4: If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB
zero filling, then repeat step 3. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit
to the right with MSB zero filling, Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value
A001H, then repeat step 3.
Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 until eight shifts have been performed. When this is done, a
complete 8-bit byte will have been processed.
Step 6: Repeat step 2 to 5 for the next 8-bit byte of the command message. Continue doing
this until all bytes have been processed. The final contents of the CRC register are the CRC
value. When transmitting the CRC value in the message, the upper and lower bytes of the
CRC value must be swapped, i.e. the lower order byte will be transmitted first.
The following is an example of CRC generation using C language. The function takes two
arguments:
Unsigned char* data a pointer to the message buffer
Unsigned char length the quantity of bytes in the message buffer
The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer.
Unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length){
int j;
unsigned int reg_crc=0xFFFF;
while(length--){
reg_crc ^= *data++;
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-93
for(j=0;j<8;j++){
if(reg_crc & 0x01){ /* LSB(b0)=1 */
reg_crc=(reg_crc>>1) ^ 0xA001;
}else{
reg_crc=reg_crc >>1;
}
}
}
return reg_crc;
}
3.5 Address list
The contents of available addresses are shown as below:
Content Address Function
AC drive
Parameters GGnnH
GG means parameter group, nn means parameter number,
for example, the address of Pr 04.01 is 0401H. Refer to
chapter 5 for the function of each parameter. When reading
parameter by command code 03H, only one parameter can
be read at one time.
Bit 0-1
00B: No function
01B: Stop
10B: Run
11B: Jog + Run
Bit 2-3 Reserved
Bit 4-5
00B: No function
01B: FWD
10B: REV
11B: Change direction
Bit 6-7
00B: Comm. forced 1st accel/decel
01B: Comm. forced 2nd accel/decel
2000H
Bit 8-15 Reserved
2001H Frequency command
Bit 0 1: EF (external fault) on
Bit 1 1: Reset
Command
Write only
2002H
Bit 2-15 Reserved
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-94 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Content Address Function
Error code:
0: No error occurred
Status
monitor
Read only
2100H
1: Over-current (oc)
2: Over-voltage (ov)
3: IGBT Overheat (oH1)
4: Reserved
5: Overload (oL)
6: Overload1 (oL1)
7: Overload2 (oL2)
8: External fault (EF)
9: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel (ocA)
10: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel (ocd)
11: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state
operation (ocn)
12: Ground Fault (GFF)
13: Reserved
14: PHL (Phase-Loss)
2100H 15: Reserved
Status
monitor
Read only
16: Auto accel/decel failure (cFA)
17: Software protection enabled (codE)
18: Power Board CPU WRITE failure (CF1.0)
19: Power Board CPU READ failure (CF2.0)
20: CC, OC Hardware protection failure (HPF1)
21: OV Hardware protection failure (HPF2)
22: GFF Hardware protection failure (HPF3)
23: OC Hardware protection failure (HPF4)
24: U-phase error (cF3.0)
25: V-phase error (cF3.1)
26: W-phase error (cF3.2)
27: DCBUS error (cF3.3)
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-95
Content Address Function
28: IGBT Overheat (cF3.4)
29: Reserved
30: Reserved
31: Reserved
32: ACI signal error (AErr)
33: Reserved
34: Motor PTC overheat protection (PtC1)
Status of AC drive
00B: RUN LED is off, STOP LED is on (The AC
motor Drive stops)
01B: RUN LED blinks, STOP LED is on (When
AC motor drive decelerates to stop)
10B: RUN LED is on, STOP LED blinks (When
AC motor drive is standby)
Bit 0-1
11B: RUN LED is on, STOP LED is off (When AC
motor drive runs)
Bit 2 1: JOG command
00B: FWD LED is on, REV LED is off (When AC
motor drive runs forward)
01B: FWD LED is on, REV LED blinks (When AC
motor drive runs from reverse to forward)
10B: FWD LED blinks, REV LED is on (When AC
motor drive runs from forward to reverse)
Bit 3-4
11B: FWD LED is off, REV LED is on (When AC
motor drive runs reverse)
Bit 5-7 Reserved
Bit 8
1: Master frequency Controlled by communication
interface
Bit 9 1: Master frequency controlled by analog signal
Bit 10
1: Operation command controlled by
communication interface
2101H
Bit 11-15 Reserved
2102H Frequency command (F)
2103H Output frequency (H)
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-96 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Content Address Function
2104H Output current (AXX.X)
2105H Reserved
2106H Display analog signal of PID feedback input terminal
2107H Reserved
2108H DC-BUS Voltage (UXXX.X)
2109H Output voltage (EXXX.X)
210AH Display temperature of IGBT (°C)
2116H User defined (Low word)
2117H User defined (High word)
Note: 2116H is number display of Pr.00.04. High byte of 2117H is number of decimal places
of 2116H. Low byte of 2117H is ASCII code of alphabet display of Pr.00.04.
3.6 Exception response:
The AC motor drive is expected to return a normal response after receiving command
messages from the master device. The following depicts the conditions when no normal
response is replied to the master device.
The AC motor drive does not receive the messages due to a communication error; thus, the
AC motor drive has no response. The master device will eventually process a timeout
condition.
The AC motor drive receives the messages without a communication error, but cannot handle
them. An exception response will be returned to the master device and an error message
“CExx” will be displayed on the keypad of AC motor drive. The xx of “CExx” is a decimal code
equal to the exception code that is described below.
In the exception response, the most significant bit of the original command code is set to 1,
and an exception code which explains the condition that caused the exception is returned.
Example of an exception response of command code 06H and exception code 02H:
ASCII mode: RTU mode:
STX ‘:’ Address 01H
‘0’ Function 86HAddress Low
Address High ‘1’ Exception code 02H
‘8’ CRC CHK Low C3HFunction Low
Function High ‘6’ CRC CHK High A1H
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-97
‘0’
Exception code
‘2’
‘7’LRC CHK Low
LRC CHK High ‘7’
CREND 1
END 0 LF
The explanation of exception codes:
Exception
code Explanation
01
Illegal function code:
The function code received in the command message is not
available for the AC motor drive.
02
Illegal data address:
The data address received in the command message is not
available for the AC motor drive.
03
Illegal data value:
The data value received in the command message is not available
for the AC drive.
04
Slave device failure:
The AC motor drive is unable to perform the requested action.
10
Communication time-out:
If Pr.09.03 is not equal to 0.0, Pr.09.02=0~2, and there is no
communication on the bus during the Time Out detection period (set
by Pr.09.03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad.
3.7 Communication program of PC:
The following is a simple example of how to write a communication program for Modbus
ASCII mode on a PC in C language.
#include<stdio.h>
#include<dos.h>
#include<conio.h>
#include<process.h>
#define PORT 0x03F8 /* the address of COM1 */
/* the address offset value relative to COM1 */
#define THR 0x0000
#define RDR 0x0000
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-98 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
#define BRDL 0x0000
#define IER 0x0001
#define BRDH 0x0001
#define LCR 0x0003
#define MCR 0x0004
#define LSR 0x0005
#define MSR 0x0006
unsigned char rdat[60];
/* read 2 data from address 2102H of AC drive with address 1 */
unsigned char tdat[60]={':','0','1','0','3','2','1','0',’2', '0','0','0','2','D','7','r','n'};
void main(){
int i;
outportb(PORT+MCR,0x08); /* interrupt enable */
outportb(PORT+IER,0x01); /* interrupt as data in */
outportb(PORT+LCR,(inportb(PORT+LCR) | 0x80));
/* the BRDL/BRDH can be access as LCR.b7==1 */
outportb(PORT+BRDL,12); /* set baudrate=9600, 12=115200/9600*/
outportb(PORT+BRDH,0x00);
outportb(PORT+LCR,0x06); /* set protocol, <7,N,2>=06H, <7,E,1>=1AH,
<7,O,1>=0AH, <8,N,2>=07H, <8,E,1>=1BH, <8,O,1>=0BH */
for(i=0;i<=16;i++){
while(!(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x20)); /* wait until THR empty */
outportb(PORT+THR,tdat[i]); /* send data to THR */ }
i=0;
while(!kbhit()){
if(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x01){ /* b0==1, read data ready */
rdat[i++]=inportb(PORT+RDR); /* read data form RDR */
} } }
09.05 Reserved
09.06 Reserved
09.07 Response Delay Time Unit: 2ms
Settings 0 ~ 200 (400msec) Factory Setting: 1
This parameter is the response delay time after AC drive receives communication command
as shown in the following. 1 unit = 2 msec.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-99
RS485 BUS
PC command
Handling time
of AC drive
Response Delay Time
Response Message of AC Drive
Max.: 6msec
Pr.09.07
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-100 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Group 10: PID Control
10.00 PID Set Point Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Disable
1 Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys
2 AVI 0 ~ +10VDC
3 ACI 4 ~ 20mA
4 PID set point (Pr.10.11)
10.01 Input Terminal for PID Feedback
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI (0 ~ +10VDC)
1 Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI (0 ~ +10VDC)
2 Positive PID feedback from external terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA)
3 Negative PID feedback from external terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA)
Note that the measured variable (feedback) controls the output frequency (Hz). Select input
terminal accordingly. Make sure this parameter setting does not conflict with the setting for
Pr.10.00 (Master Frequency).
When Pr.10.00 is set to 2 or 3, the set point (Master Frequency) for PID control is obtained
from the AVI or ACI external terminal (0 to +10V or 4-20mA) or from multi-step speed. When
Pr.10.00 is set to 1, the set point is obtained from the keypad.
Negative feedback means: +target value – feedback
Positive feedback means: -target value + feedback.
10.11 Source of PID Set point Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 0.00
This parameter is used in conjunction with Pr.10.00 set 4 to input a set point in Hz.
10.02 Proportional Gain (P) Unit: 0. 1
Settings 0.0 to 10.0 Factory Setting: 1.0
This parameter specifies proportional control and associated gain (P). If the other two gains (I
and D) are set to zero, proportional control is the only one effective. With 10% deviation (error)
and P=1, the output will be P x10% x Master Frequency.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-101
When P is greater than 1, it will decrease the deviation and get the faster response speed. But
if setting too large value in Pr.10.02, it may cause the increased deviation during the stable
area.
NOTE
The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning.
10.03 Integral Time ( I ) Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.00 to 100.0 sec Factory Setting: 1.00
0.00 Disable
This parameter specifies integral control (continual sum of the deviation) and associated gain
(I). When the integral gain is set to 1 and the deviation is fixed, the output is equal to the input
(deviation) once the integral time setting is attained.
It can use integral time to eliminate the deviation during the stable area. If setting too large
value in Pr.10.03, it may cause lower system response.
NOTE
The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning.
10.04 Derivative Control (D) Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.00 to 1.00 sec Factory Setting: 0.00
This parameter specifies derivative control (rate of change of the input) and associated gain
(D). With this parameter set to 1, the PID output is equal to differential time x (present
deviation − previous deviation). It increases the response speed but it may cause over-
compensation.
NOTE
The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning.
10.05 Upper Bound for Integral Control Unit: 1
Settings 0 to 100 % Factory Setting: 100
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-102 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
This parameter defines an upper bound or limit for the integral gain (I) and therefore limits the
Master Frequency.
The formula is: Integral upper bound = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) x (Pr.10.05).
This parameter can limit the Maximum Output Frequency.
10.06 Primary Delay Filter Time Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.0 to 2.5 sec Factory Setting: 0.0
To avoid amplification of measurement noise in the controller output, a derivative digital filter is
inserted. This filter helps to dampen oscillations.
The complete PID diagram is in the following:
P
10.02
I
10.03
D
10.04
10.05
10.10
10.07 10.06
10.01
+
-
+
+
+
Setpoint
Input Freq.
Gain
PID
feedback
Integral
gain
limit
Output
Freq.
Limit
Digital
filter Freq.
Command
10.07 PID Output Frequency Limit Unit: 1
Settings 0 to 110 % Factory Setting: 100
This parameter defines the percentage of output frequency limit during the PID control. The
formula is Output Frequency Limit = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) X Pr.10.07 %.
This parameter will limit the Maximum Output Frequency. An overall limit for the output
frequency can be set in Pr.01.07.
10.08 PID Feedback Signal Detection Time Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.0 to d 3600 sec Factory Setting: 60.0
This function in only for ACI signal.
This parameter defines the time during which the PID feedback must be abnormal before a
warning (see Pr.10.09) is given. It also can be modified according to the system feedback
signal time.
If this parameter is set to 0.0, the system would not detect any abnormality signal.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-103
10.09 Treatment of the Erroneous Feedback Signals (for PID feedback error)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Warning and RAMP to stop
1 Warning and COAST to stop
2 Warning and keep operating
This function in only for ACI signal.
AC motor drive action when the feedback signals (analog PID feedback) are abnormal
according to Pr.10.16.
10.10 Gain Over the PID Detection Value Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.0 to 10.0 Factory Setting: 1.0
This is the gain adjustment over the feedback detection value. Refer to PID control block
diagram in Pr.10.06 for detail.
10.12 PID Feedback Level Unit: 0.1
Settings 1.0 to 50.0% Factory Setting: 10.0
10.13 Detection Time of PID Feedback Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.1 to 300.0 sec Factory Setting: 5.0
This parameter is used to set detection of the offset between set point and feedback.
When the offset is higher than (the setting of Pr.10.12 X Pr.01.00) for a time exceeding the
setting of Pr.10.13, the AC motor drive will output a signal when Pr.03.00 is set to 16 and will
act according to Pr.10.20.
10.14 Sleep/Wake Up Detection Time Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.0 to 6550 sec Factory Setting: 0.0
10.15 Sleep Frequency Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.00 to 600.0 Hz Factory Setting: 0.00
10.16 Wakeup Frequency Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.00 to 600.0 Hz Factory Setting: 0.00
When the actual output frequency ≤ Pr.10.15 and the time exceeds the setting of Pr.10.14,
the AC motor drive will be in sleep mode.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-104 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
When the actual frequency command > Pr.10.16 and the time exceeds the setting of Pr.10.14,
the AC motor drive will restart.
When the AC motor drive is in sleep mode, frequency command is still calculated by PID.
When frequency reaches wake up frequency, AC motor drive will accelerate from Pr.01.05
minimum frequency following the V/f curve.
The wake up frequency must be higher than sleep frequency.
10.16
10.15
01.05
10.14
Frequency
The limit of
decel. time
frequency calculated by PID
output
frequency
Time
The limit of
accel. time
Fmin Fsleep
Fcmd=0
Fout = 0
lower bound
of frequency
Fmin<Fsleep<
lower bound
of frequency
When output frequency ≤ sleep frequency and time > detection time, it will go in sleep mode.
When min. output frequency ≦ PID frequency ≦ lower bound of frequency and sleep function
is enabled (output frequency ≤ sleep frequency and time > detection time), frequency will be 0
(in sleep mode). If sleep function is disabled, frequency command = lower bound frequency.
When PID frequency < min. output frequency and sleep function is enabled (output frequency
≤ sleep frequency and time > detection time), output frequency =0 (in sleep mode).
If output frequency ≤ sleep frequency but time < detection time, frequency command = lower
frequency. If sleep function is disabled, output frequency =0.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-105
10.17 Minimum PID Output Frequency Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 By PID control
1 By Minimum output frequency (Pr.01.05)
This is the source selection of minimum output frequency when control is by PID.
10.18 PID Control Detection Signal Reference Unit: 0.1
Settings 1.0 to 99.9 Factory Setting: 99.9
When Pr.00.04 is set to 8, it will display 00:00 as follows.
This parameter is used only for display and has no relation with Pr.00.13, Pr.00.14, Pr.02.18
and Pr.02.19.
(the max. value you would
like to convert)
Setpoint Feedback value
10.19 PID Calculation Mode Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Series mode
1 Parallel mode
Series mode
P
10.02
I
10.03
D
10.04
10.05
10.10
10.07 10.06
10.01
+
-
+
+
+
Setpoint
Input Freq.
Gain
PID
feedback
Integral
gain
limit
Output
Freq.
Limit
Digital
filter Freq.
Command
Parallel mode
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-106 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
P
10.02
I
10.03
D
10.04
10.05
10.10
10.07 10.06
10.01
+
-
+
+
+
Setpoint
Input Freq.
Gain
PID
feedback
Integral
gain
limit
Output
Freq.
Limit
Digital
filter Freq.
Command
10.20 Treatment of the Erroneous PID Feedback Level
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 Keep operating
1 Coast to stop
2 Ramp to stop
3 Ramp to stop and restart after time set in Pr.10.21
In PID control mode, it will act according to Pr.10.20 when erroneous PID feedback level
occurs.
10.21 Restart Delay Time after Erroneous PID Deviation Level Unit: 1
Settings 1 to 9999 sec Factory Setting: 60
10.22 Set Point Deviation Level Unit: 1
Settings 0 to 100% Factory Setting: 0
10.23 Detection Time of Set Point Deviation Level Unit: 1
Settings 1 to 9999 sec Factory Setting: 10
When the deviation is less than Pr.10.22 (in the range of PID set point to Pr.10.22 X PID set
point) for a time exceeding the setting of Pr.10.23, the AC motor drive will decelerate to stop to
be constant pressure status (This deceleration time is the setting of Pr.01.12). The system will
be ready when the deviation is within the range of PID set point to Pr.10.22 X PID set point
during deceleration.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-107
Example: suppose that the set point of constant pressure control of a pump is 4kg, Pr.10.22 is
set to 5%, Pr.10.23 is set to 15 seconds. It means that deviation is 0.2kg (4kgX5%=0.2kg), i.e.
when feedback value is higher than 3.8kg for a time exceeding 15 seconds, the AC motor
drive will decelerate to stop (this deceleration time will act according to Pr.01.12). When the
feedback value is less than 3.8kg, the AC motor drive will start to run.
10.24 Offset Level of Liquid Leakage Unit: 1
Settings 0 to 50% Factory Setting: 0
In the constant pressure status, when the liquid leakage is higher than Pr.10.24 X PID set
point, the AC motor drive will start to run.
It is used to prevent frequent run/stop operation due to liquid leakage.
10.24
set point
feedback value
Offset level of liquid leakage
10.25 Liquid Leakage Change Detection Unit: 1
Settings 0 to 100% (0:disable) Factory Setting: 0
10.26 Time Setting for Liquid Leakage Change Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.1 to 10.0 sec (0:disable) Factory Setting: 0.5
When the change of feedback value is less than the settings of Pr.10.25 and Pr.10.26, it
means that the liquid is leaking. When the system is in constant pressure status, the AC motor
drive will start to run if the feedback value is higher than these two settings.
set point
feedback value
10.25
10.26
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4-108 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Example: suppose that the set point of constant pressure control of a pump is 4kg, Pr.10.22 is
set to 5%, Pr.10.23 is set to 15 seconds, Pr.10.24 is set to 25%, Pr.10.25 is set to 3% and
Pr.10.26 is set to 0.5 seconds. It means that offset is 0.2kg (4kgX5%=0.2kg), i.e. when
feedback value is higher than 3.8kg for a time exceeding 15 seconds, the AC motor drive will
decelerate to stop (this deceleration time will act according to Pr.01.12). When the feedback
value is less than 3.8kg, the AC motor drive will start to run.
Status 1: Suppose that the AC motor drive is in the constant pressure status and the feedback
change value is less than 0.12kg within 0.5 seconds. The AC motor drive won’t run until the
feedback value is decreased by this proportion to the value less than 3kg.
Status 2: When the AC motor drive is in constant pressure, it won’t run until the feedback
change value is less than 3.88kg (4-4kgX3%=3.88kg) for a time exceeding 0.5 seconds.
10.27
|
10.33
Reserved
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 5-1
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
5.1 Over Current (OC)
ocA ocd OC
Over-current
during acceleration
Over-current
during deceleration
Over current
Check if there is any
between the U, V, W and motor
short circuits and
grounding
Yes
No No No
No No No
Yes
YesYes
Remove short circuit
or ground fault
Reduce the load or
increase the power
of AC motor drive
NoNo Reduce torque
compensation
Reduce torque
compensation
Suitable torque
compensation
No No
No
NoNo
Yes Yes
Yes
YesYes
Maybe AC motor drive
has malfunction or error
due to noise. Please
contact with DELTA.
Can acceleration
time be made longer?
Can deceleration
time be made longer?
Reduce load or increase
the power of AC motor
drive
Check braking
method. Please
contact DELTA
Reduce load or increase
the power of AC motor
drive
Has load changed
suddenly?
Check if
acceleration time
is too short by
load inertia.
Check if
deceleration time
is too short by
load inertia.
Increase accel/decel
time
Check if load is too large
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5-2 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
5.2 Ground Fault
GFF
Ground fault
No
Yes
Is output circuit(cable or
motor) of AC motor drive
grounded?
Remove ground fault
Maybe AC motor drive has
malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please
contact DELTA.
5.3 Over Voltage (OV)
Over voltage
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
Is voltage within
specification
Reduce voltage to
be within spec.
Has over-voltage occurred without load
Maybe AC motor drive
has malfunction or
misoperation due to
noise. Please contact
with DELTA.
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
When OV occurs, check if the
voltage of DC BUS is greater
than protection value
Dose OV occur when
sudden acceleration
stops
Increase
deceleration
time
Increase setting time
Increase
acceleration
time
Reduce moment
of inertia
Reduce moment of load inertia
Use braking unit or DC braking
Need to check control method. Please contact DELTA.
Need to consider using
braking unit or
DC braking
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 5-3
5.4 Low Voltage (Lv)
Low voltage
Is input power correct? Or power cut,
including momentary power loss
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Restart after reset
Check if there is any malfunction
component in
power supply circuit
or disconnection
Change defective component
and check connection
Check if voltage is
within specification
Make necessary corrections,
such as change power supply
system for requirement
Check if there is heavy load
with high start current in the
same power system
Check if Lv occurs when
breaker and magnetic
contactor is ON
Suitable
transformer
power
capacity
Check if voltage between +/B1
and - is greater than
200VDC (for 115V/230V models)
400VDC (for 460V models)
Maybe AC motor drive has m alfunction.
Please contact DELTA.
Control circuit has malfunction or
misoperation due to noise. Please
contact DELTA.
Yes
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5-4 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
5.5 Over Heat (OH1)
AC motor drive overheats
Heat sink overheats
Check if temperature of heat sink
is greater than 90 O
C
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Reduce load
No Temperature detection malfunctions.
Please contact DELTA.
If cooling fan functions normally Change cooling fan
Check if cooling fan is jammed Remove obstruction
Check if surrounding temperature
is within specification
Adjust surrounding temperature
to specification
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or
misoperation due to noise. Please contact
DELTA.
Is load too large
5.6 Overload
OL1/ OL2OL
Reduce load or increase the power of AC motor drive
Check for correct settings at
Pr. 06-06 and 06-07
Yes
Yes
No
No
Modify setting
Is load too large
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction
or misoperation due to noise.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 5-5
5.7 Keypad Display is Abnormal
Abnormal display or no display
Cycle power to AC motor drive
No
Yes
Yes Yes
No
Display normal?
AC motor drive works normally
Fix connector and eliminate noise
Check if all connectors are connect
correctly and no noise is present
AC motor drive has malfunction.
Please contact DELTA.
5.8 Phase Loss (PHL)
Phase loss
No
No
Yes
Yes
Check wiring at R, S and T terminals Correct wiring
Check if the screws of terminals are tightened
No Tighten all screws
Yes Please check the wiring
and power system for
abnormal power
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.
Check if the input voltage of R, S, T is unbalanced
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5-6 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
5.9 Motor cannot Run
Motor cannot run
Check
keypad for
normal display
No No
No
No
No
NoNo
No
No No
No
No
No
No
Check if non-fuse
breaker and magnetic
contactor are ON
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Set them to ON
Reset after clearing
fault and then RUN
Check if there is any
fault code displayed Check if input
voltage is normal
Check if any faults
occur, such as
Lv, PHL or
disconnection
Input "RUN"
command
by keypad
It can run when
no faults occur
Press RUN key to
check if it can run
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.
Press UP key to
set frequency
Yes
Modify frequency
setting
Check if input FWD
or REV command
Check if the wiring
of terminal MI1
and between
MI2-DCM is correct
Yes
Change switch or relay
Set frequency or not
Press UP to
check if motor
can run
Correct connection
Check if the parameter
setting and wiring of
analog signal and
multi-step speed
are correct
No
Motor has malfunction
No Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction.
Please contact DELTA.
Check if there is any
output voltage from
terminals U, V and W
Check if motor
connection
is correct
No
Connect correctly
Check if the setting
of torque
compensation
is correct
Increase the setting of
torque compensation
Motor is locked due to large load, please reduce load.
For example, if there is a brake, check if it is released.
If load is too large
if upper bound freq.
and setting freq. is
lower than the min.
output freq.
Yes Change defective
potentiometer and
relay
Yes
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 5-7
5.10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed
Motor can run but
cannot change speed
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Check if the setting of the
max. frequency is too low
If the setting of frequency
is out of range(upper/lower)
bound
Modify the setting
Modify the setting
Yes
If the setting of
Pr.05-00 to Pr.05-14
are the same
Press UP/DOWN key
to see if speed has
any change
If there is any change
of the signal that sets
frequency (0-10V and
4-20mA)
Check if the wiring between
M1~M6 to DCM is correct
Connect
correctly
Check if frequency for
each step is different
Check if the wiring of
external terminal is correct
Change frequency setting
If accel./decel. time
is very long
Please set suitable
accel./decel. time by
load inertia
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.
Change defective
potentiometer
No
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5-8 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
5.11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration
Motor stalls during
acceleration
Check if acceleration
time is too short
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Increase setting time
Yes
Use special motor?
Reduce load or
increase the capacity
of AC motor drive
Check if the inertia
of the motor and load
is too high
Check for low voltage
at input
Check if the load torque
is too high
Yes
Maybe AC motor drive has
malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact
DELTA
Increase torque compensation
Check if the torque
compensation is suitable
Thicken or shorten the
wiring between the
motor or AC motor drive
Reduce load or
increase the capacity
of AC motor drive
5.12 The Motor does not Run as Expected
Check Pr. 01-01 thru Pr. 01-06
and torque compensation
settings
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Adjust Pr.01-01 to Pr.01-06
and lower torque compensation
Run in low speed continuously
Is load too large
Please use specific motor
Reduce load or increase the
capacity of AC motor drive
Check if output voltage of U, V, W
is balanced
Motor has malfunction
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.
Motor does not run
as expected
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 5-9
5.13 Electromagnetic/Induction Noise
Many sources of noise surround AC motor drives and penetrate it by radiation or conduction. It may
cause malfunctioning of the control circuits and even damage the AC motor drive. Of course, there
are solutions to increase the noise tolerance of an AC motor drive. But this has its limits. Therefore,
solving it from the outside as follows will be the best.
1. Add surge suppressor on the relays and contacts to suppress switching surges.
2. Shorten the wiring length of the control circuit or serial communication and keep them
separated from the power circuit wiring.
3. Comply with the wiring regulations by using shielded wires and isolation amplifiers for
long length.
4. The grounding terminal should comply with the local regulations and be grounded
independently, i.e. not to have common ground with electric welding machines and other
power equipment.
5. Connect a noise filter at the mains input terminal of the AC motor drive to filter noise from
the power circuit. VFD-EL can have a built-in filter as option.
In short, solutions for electromagnetic noise exist of “no product”(disconnect disturbing equipment),
“no spread”(limit emission for disturbing equipment) and “no receive”(enhance immunity).
5.14 Environmental Condition
Since the AC motor drive is an electronic device, you should comply with the environmental
conditions. Here are some remedial measures if necessary.
1. To prevent vibration, the use of anti-vibration dampers is the last choice. Vibrations must
be within the specification. Vibration causes mechanical stress and it should not occur
frequently, continuously or repeatedly to prevent damage to the AC motor drive.
2. Store the AC motor drive in a clean and dry location, free from corrosive fumes/dust to
prevent corrosion and poor contacts. Poor insulation in a humid location can cause short-
circuits. If necessary, install the AC motor drive in a dust-proof and painted enclosure and
in particular situations, use a completely sealed enclosure.
3. The ambient temperature should be within the specification. Too high or too low
temperature will affect the lifetime and reliability. For semiconductor components, damage
will occur once any specification is out of range. Therefore, it is necessary to periodically
check air quality and the cooling fan and provide extra cooling of necessary. In addition,
the microcomputer may not work in extremely low temperatures, making cabinet heating
necessary.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5-10 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
4. Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing environment.
Use an air conditioner and/or exsiccator.
5.15 Affecting Other Machines
An AC motor drive may affect the operation of other machines due to many reasons. Some solutions
are:
High Harmonics at Power Side
High harmonics at power side during running can be improved by:
1. Separate the power system: use a transformer for AC motor drive.
2. Use a reactor at the power input terminal of the AC motor drive.
3. If phase lead capacitors are used (never on the AC motor drive output!!), use serial
reactors to prevent damage to the capacitors damage from high harmonics.
serial reactor
phase lead capacitor
Motor Temperature Rises
When the motor is a standard induction motor with fan, the cooling will be bad at low speeds,
causing the motor to overheat. Besides, high harmonics at the output increases copper and
core losses. The following measures should be used depending on load and operation
range.
1. Use a motor with independent ventilation (forced external cooling) or increase the motor
rated power.
2. Use a special inverter duty motor.
3. Do NOT run at low speeds for long time.
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 6-1
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance
6.1 Fault Code Information
The AC motor drive has a comprehensive fault diagnostic system that includes several different
alarms and fault messages. Once a fault is detected, the corresponding protective functions will be
activated. The following faults are displayed as shown on the AC motor drive digital keypad display.
The five most recent faults can be read from the digital keypad or communication.
NOTE
Wait 5 seconds after a fault has been cleared before performing reset via keypad of input terminal.
6.1.1 Common Problems and Solutions
Fault
Name
Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions
Over current
Abnormal increase in current.
1. Check if motor power corresponds with the
AC motor drive output power.
2. Check the wiring connections to U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3 for possible short circuits.
3. Check the wiring connections between the AC
motor drive and motor for possible short
circuits, also to ground.
4. Check for loose contacts between AC motor
drive and motor.
5. Increase the Acceleration Time.
6. Check for possible excessive loading
conditions at the motor.
7. If there are still any abnormal conditions when
operating the AC motor drive after a short-
circuit is removed and the other points above
are checked, it should be sent back to
manufacturer.
Over voltage
The DC bus voltage has
exceeded its maximum
allowable value.
1. Check if the input voltage falls within the
rated AC motor drive input voltage range.
2. Check for possible voltage transients.
3. DC-bus over-voltage may also be caused by
motor regeneration. Either increase the
Decel. Time or add an optional brake resistor
(and brake unit).
4. Check whether the required brake power is
within the specified limits.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
6-2 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Fault
Name
Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions
Overheating
Heat sink temperature too high
1. Ensure that the ambient temperature falls
within the specified temperature range.
2. Make sure that the ventilation holes are not
obstructed.
3. Remove any foreign objects from the
heatsinks and check for possible dirty heat
sink fins.
4. Check the fan and clean it.
5. Provide enough spacing for adequate
ventilation. (See chapter 1)
Low voltage
The AC motor drive detects
that the DC bus voltage has
fallen below its minimum
value.
1. Check whether the input voltage falls within
the AC motor drive rated input voltage range.
2. Check for abnormal load in motor.
3. Check for correct wiring of input power to R-S-
T (for 3-phase models) without phase loss.
Overload
The AC motor drive detects
excessive drive output current.
NOTE: The AC motor drive
can withstand up to 150% of
the rated current for a
maximum of 60 seconds.
1. Check whether the motor is overloaded.
2. Reduce torque compensation setting in
Pr.07.02.
3. Use the next higher power AC motor drive
model.
Overload 1
Internal electronic overload trip
1. Check for possible motor overload.
2. Check electronic thermal overload setting.
3. Use a higher power motor.
4. Reduce the current level so that the drive
output current does not exceed the value set
by the Motor Rated Current Pr.07.00.
Overload 2
Motor overload.
1. Reduce the motor load.
2. Adjust the over-torque detection setting to an
appropriate setting (Pr.06.03 to Pr.06.05).
CC (current clamp)
OV hardware error
GFF hardware error
OC hardware error
Return to the factory.
External Base Block.
(Refer to Pr. 08.07)
1. When the external input terminal (B.B) is
active, the AC motor drive output will be
turned off.
2. Deactivate the external input terminal (B.B) to
operate the AC motor drive again.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 6-3
Fault
Name
Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions
Over-current during
acceleration
1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for
possible poor insulation at the output lines.
2. Torque boost too high: Decrease the torque
compensation setting in Pr.07.02.
3. Acceleration Time too short: Increase the
Acceleration Time.
4. AC motor drive output power is too small:
Replace the AC motor drive with the next
higher power model.
Over-current during
deceleration
1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for
possible poor insulation at the output line.
2. Deceleration Time too short: Increase the
Deceleration Time.
3. AC motor drive output power is too small:
Replace the AC motor drive with the next
higher power model.
Over-current during
constant speed operation
1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for
possible poor insulation at the output line.
2. Sudden increase in motor loading: Check for
possible motor stall.
3. AC motor drive output power is too small:
Replace the AC motor drive with the next
higher power model.
External Fault
1. When multi-function input terminals (MI3-MI9)
are set to external fault, the AC motor drive
stops output U, V and W.
2. Give RESET command after fault has been
cleared.
Internal EEPROM can not be
programmed.
Return to the factory.
Internal EEPROM can not be
programmed.
Return to the factory.
Internal EEPROM can not be
read.
1. Press RESET key to set all parameters to
factory setting.
2. Return to the factory.
Internal EEPROM can not be
read.
1. Press RESET key to set all parameters to
factory setting.
2. Return to the factory.
U-phase error
V-phase error
W-phase error
OV or LV
Temperature sensor error
Return to the factory.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
6-4 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Fault
Name
Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions
Ground fault
When (one of) the output terminal(s) is grounded,
short circuit current is more than 50% of AC motor
drive rated current, the AC motor drive power
module may be damaged.
NOTE: The short circuit protection is provided
for AC motor drive protection, not for
protection of the user.
1. Check whether the IGBT power module is
damaged.
2. Check for possible poor insulation at the
output line.
Auto accel/decel failure
1. Check if the motor is suitable for operation by
AC motor drive.
2. Check if the regenerative energy is too large.
3. Load may have changed suddenly.
Communication Error
1. Check the RS485 connection between the AC
motor drive and RS485 master for loose wires
and wiring to correct pins.
2. Check if the communication protocol, address,
transmission speed, etc. are properly set.
3. Use the correct checksum calculation.
4. Please refer to group 9 in the chapter 5 for
detail information.
Software protection failure Return to the factory.
Analog signal error Check the wiring of ACI
PID feedback signal error
1. Check parameter settings (Pr.10.01) and
AVI/ACI wiring.
2. Check for possible fault between system
response time and the PID feedback signal
detection time (Pr.10.08)
Phase Loss Check input phase wiring for loose contacts.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 6-5
6.1.2 Reset
There are three methods to reset the AC motor drive after solving the fault:
1. Press key on keypad.
2. Set external terminal to “RESET” (set one of Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08 to 05) and then set to be
ON.
3. Send “RESET” command by communication.
NOTE
Make sure that RUN command or signal is OFF before executing RESET to prevent damage or
personal injury due to immediate operation.
6.2 Maintenance and Inspections
Modern AC motor drives are based on solid-state electronics technology. Preventive maintenance is
required to keep the AC motor drive in its optimal condition, and to ensure a long life. It is
recommended to have a qualified technician perform a check-up of the AC motor drive regularly.
Daily Inspection:
Basic check-up items to detect if there were any abnormalities during operation are:
1. Whether the motors are operating as expected.
2. Whether the installation environment is abnormal.
3. Whether the cooling system is operating as expected.
4. Whether any irregular vibration or sound occurred during operation.
5. Whether the motors are overheating during operation.
6. Always check the input voltage of the AC drive with a Voltmeter.
Periodic Inspection:
Before the check-up, always turn off the AC input power and remove the cover. Wait at least 10
minutes after all display lamps have gone out, and then confirm that the capacitors have fully
discharged by measuring the voltage between ~ . It should be less than 25VDC.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
6-6 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
DANGER!
1. Disconnect AC power before processing!
2. Only qualified personnel can install, wire and maintain AC motor drives. Please take off any
metal objects, such as watches and rings, before operation. And only insulated tools are
allowed.
3. Never reassemble internal components or wiring.
4. Prevent static electricity.
Periodical Maintenance
Ambient environment
Maintenance
Period
Check Items Methods and Criterion
Daily
Half
Year
One
Year
Check the ambient temperature,
humidity, vibration and see if
there are any dust, gas, oil or
water drops
Visual inspection and measurement
with equipment with standard
specification
Check if there are any
dangerous objects in the
environment
Visual inspection
Voltage
Maintenance
Period
Check Items Methods and Criterion
Daily
Half
Year
One
Year
Check if the voltage of main
circuit and control circuit is
correct
Measure with multimeter with standard
specification
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 6-7
Keypad
Maintenance
Period
Check Items Methods and Criterion
Daily
Half
Year
One
Year
Is the display clear for reading? Visual inspection
Any missing characters? Visual inspection
Mechanical parts
Maintenance
Period
Check Items Methods and Criterion
Daily
Half
Year
One
Year
If there is any abnormal sound
or vibration
Visual and aural inspection
If there are any loose screws Tighten the screws
If any part is deformed or
damaged
Visual inspection
If there is any color change by
overheating
Visual inspection
If there is any dust or dirt Visual inspection
Main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items Methods and Criterion
Daily
Half
Year
One
Year
If there are any loose or missing
screws
Tighten or replace the screw
If machine or insulator is
deformed, cracked, damaged or
with changed color change due
to overheating or ageing
Visual inspection
NOTE: Please ignore the color
change of copper plate
If there is any dust or dirt Visual inspection
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
6-8 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Terminals and wiring of main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items Methods and Criterion
Daily
Half
Year
One
Year
If the wiring shows change of
color change or deformation due
to overheat
Visual inspection
If the insulation of wiring is
damaged or the color has
changed
Visual inspection
If there is any damage Visual inspection
DC capacity of main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items Methods and Criterion
Daily
Half
Year
One
Year
If there is any leakage of liquid,
change of color, cracks or
deformation
Visual inspection
Measure static capacity when
required
Static capacity ≥ initial value X 0.85
Resistor of main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items Methods and Criterion
Daily
Half
Year
One
Year
If there is any peculiar smell or
insulator cracks due to
overheating
Visual inspection, smell
If there is any disconnection
Visual inspection or measure with
multimeter after removing wiring
between +/B1 ~ -
Resistor value should be within ± 10%
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 6-9
Transformer and reactor of main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items Methods and Criterion
Daily
Half
Year
One
Year
If there is any abnormal vibration
or peculiar smell
Visual, aural inspection and smell
Magnetic contactor and relay of main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items Methods and Criterion
Daily
Half
Year
One
Year
If there are any loose screws
Visual and aural inspection. Tighten
screw if necessary.
If the contact works correctly Visual inspection
Printed circuit board and connector of main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items Methods and Criterion
Daily
Half
Year
One
Year
If there are any loose screws and
connectors
Tighten the screws and press the
connectors firmly in place.
If there is any peculiar smell and
color change
Visual inspection and smell
If there is any crack, damage,
deformation or corrosion
Visual inspection
If there is any leaked liquid or
deformation in capacitors
Visual inspection
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
6-10 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Cooling fan of cooling system
Maintenance
Period
Check Items Methods and Criterion
Daily
Half
Year
One
Year
If there is any abnormal sound or
vibration
Visual, aural inspection and turn the
fan with hand (turn off the power
before operation) to see if it rotates
smoothly
If there is any loose screw Tighten the screw
If there is any change of color due
to overheating
Change fan
Ventilation channel of cooling system
Maintenance
Period
Check Items Methods and Criterion
Daily
Half
Year
One
Year
If there is any obstruction in the
heat sink, air intake or air outlet
Visual inspection
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Appendix A Specifications
There are 115V, 230V and 460V models in the VFD-EL series. For 115V models, it is 1-phase
models. For 0.25 to 3HP of the 230V models, there are 1-phase/3-phase models. Refer to following
specifications for details.
Voltage Class 115V Class
Model Number VFD-XXXEL 002 004 007
Max. Applicable Motor Output (kW) 0.2 0.4 0.75
Max. Applicable Motor Output (hp) 0.25 0.5 1.0
Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 0.6 1.0 1.6
Rated Output Current (A) 1.6 2.5 4.2
Maximum Output Voltage (V) 3-Phase Proportional to Twice the Input Voltage
Output Frequency (Hz) 0.1~600 Hz
OutputRating
Carrier Frequency (kHz) 2-12
Rated Input Current (A) 6.4 9 18
Rated Voltage/Frequency Single phase, 100-120V, 50/60Hz
Voltage Tolerance ± 10%(90~132 V)
InputRating
Frequency Tolerance ± 5%(47~63 Hz)
Cooling Method Natural Cooling
Weight (kg) 1.1 1.1 1.4
Voltage Class 230V Class
Model Number VFD-XXXEL 002 004 007 015 022 037
Max. Applicable Motor Output (kW) 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7
Max. Applicable Motor Output (hp) 0.25 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0
Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 0.6 1.0 1.6 2.9 4.2 6.5
Rated Output Current (A) 1.6 2.5 4.2 7.5 11.0 17
Maximum Output Voltage (V) 3-Phase Proportional to Input Voltage
Output Frequency (Hz) 0.1~600 Hz
OutputRating
Carrier Frequency (kHz) 2-12
Rated Input Current
(A)
4.9 6.5 9.5 15.7 24 --
XXXEL
21A Rated
Voltage/Frequency
1-phase, 200-240 V, 50/60Hz
Rated Input Current
(A)
1.9 2.7 4.9 9 15 20.6
XXXEL
23A Rated
Voltage/Frequency
3-phase, 200-240V, 50/60Hz
Voltage Tolerance ± 10%(180~264 V)
InputRating
Frequency Tolerance ± 5%(47~63 Hz)
Cooling Method Natural Cooling Fan Cooling
Weight (kg) 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.7 1.7 1.7
Appendix A Specifications|
A-2 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Voltage Class 460V Class
Model Number VFD-XXXEL 004 007 015 022 037
Max. Applicable Motor Output (kW) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7
Max. Applicable Motor Output (hp) 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0
Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 1.2 2.0 3.3 4.4 6.8
Rated Output Current (A) 1.5 2.5 4.2 5.5 8.2
Maximum Output Voltage (V) 3-Phase Proportional to Input Voltage
Output Frequency (Hz) 0.1~600 Hz
OutputRating
Carrier Frequency (kHz) 2-12
Rated Input Current (A) 1.8 3.2 4.3 7.1 9.0
Rated Voltage/Frequency 3-phase, 380-480V, 50/60Hz
Voltage Tolerance ± 10%(342~528V)
InputRating
Frequency Tolerance ± 5%(47~63Hz)
Cooling Method Natural Cooling Fan Cooling
Weight (kg) 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.7 1.7
General Specifications
Control System SPWM(Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation) control (V/f control)
Frequency Setting Resolution 0.01Hz
Output Frequency Resolution 0.01Hz
Torque Characteristics
Including the auto-torque/auto-slip compensation; starting torque can be
150% at 5.0Hz
Overload Endurance 150% of rated current for 1 minute
Skip Frequency Three zones, setting range 0.1-600Hz
Accel/Decel Time 0.1 to 600 seconds (2 Independent settings for Accel/Decel time)
Stall Prevention Level Setting 20 to 250% of rated current
DC Brake
Operation frequency 0.1-600.0Hz, output 0-100% rated current
Start time 0-60 seconds, stop time 0-60 seconds
Regenerated Brake Torque
Approx. 20% (up to 125% possible with optional brake resistor or externally
mounted brake unit, 1-15hp (0.75-11kW) models have brake chopper built-in)
ControlCharacteristics
V/f Pattern Adjustable V/f pattern
Keypad Setting by
Frequency
Setting External Signal
Potentiometer-5kΩ/0.5W, 0 to +10VDC, 4 to 20mA, RS-485 interface; Multi-
function Inputs 3 to 6 (15 steps, Jog, up/down)
Keypad Set by RUN and STOPOperation
Setting
Signal External Signal
2 wires/3 wires ((MI1, MI2, MI3)), JOG operation, RS-485 serial interface
(MODBUS), programmable logic controller
Multi-function Input Signal
Multi-step selection 0 to 15, Jog, accel/decel inhibit, 2 accel/decel switches,
counter, external Base Block, ACI/AVI selections, driver reset, UP/DOWN
key settings, NPN/PNP input selection
Multi-function Output Indication
AC drive operating, frequency attained, zero speed, Base Block, fault
indication, overheat alarm, emergency stop and status selections of input
terminals
OperatingCharacteristics
Analog Output Signal Output frequency/current
Appendix A Specifications|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 A-3
General Specifications
Operation Functions
AVR, accel/decel S-Curve, over-voltage/over-current stall prevention, 5 fault
records, reverse inhibition, momentary power loss restart, DC brake, auto
torque/slip compensation, auto tuning, adjustable carrier frequency, output
frequency limits, parameter lock/reset, PID control, external counter,
MODBUS communication, abnormal reset, abnormal re-start, power-saving,
fan control, sleep/wake frequency, 1st/2nd frequency source selections,
1st/2nd frequency source combination, NPN/PNP selection
Protection Functions
Over voltage, over current, under voltage, external fault, overload, ground
fault, overheating, electronic thermal, IGBT short circuit, PTC
Display Keypad (optional)
6-key, 7-segment LED with 4-digit, 4 status LEDs, master frequency, output
frequency, output current, custom units, parameter values for setup and lock,
faults, RUN, STOP, RESET, FWD/REV
Built-in EMI Filter For 230V 1-phase and 460V 3-phase models.
Enclosure Rating IP20
Pollution Degree 2
Installation Location Altitude 1,000 m or lower, keep from corrosive gasses, liquid and dust
Ambient Temperature
-10o
C to 50o
C (40o
C for side-by-side mounting) Non-Condensing and not
frozen
Storage/ Transportation
Temperature
-20 o
C to 60 o
C
Ambient Humidity Below 90% RH (non-condensing)
EnviromentalConditions
Vibration 9.80665m/s2
(1G) less than 20Hz, 5.88m/s2 (0.6G) at 20 to 50Hz
Approvals
Appendix A Specifications|
A-4 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
This page intentionally left blank
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-1
Appendix B Accessories
B.1 All Brake Resistors & Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives
Note: Please only use DELTA resistors and recommended values. Other resistors and values will
void Delta’s warranty. Please contact your nearest Delta representative for use of special resistors.
The brake unit should be at least 10 cm away from AC motor drive to avoid possible interference.
Refer to the “Brake unit Module User Manual” for further details.
Applicable
Motor
Voltage
hp kW
Models
Full Load
Torque
KG-M
Equivalent
Resistor
Value
(suggestion)
Brake Unit
Model and
No. of Units
Used
Brake
Resistors
Model and No.
of Units Used
Brake
Torque
10%ED
Min.
Equivalent
Resistor
Value for
each AC
Motor
Drive
0.25 0.2 VFD002EL11A 0.110 200W 250Ω
BUE-
20015
1 BR200W250 1 320 200Ω
0.5 0.4 VFD004EL11A 0.216 200W 250Ω
BUE-
20015
1 BR200W250 1 170 100Ω
115VSeries
1 0.75 VFD007EL11A 0.427 200W 150Ω
BUE-
20015
1 BR200W150 1 140 80Ω
0.25 0.2 VFD002EL21A/23A 0.110 200W 250Ω
BUE-
20015
1 BR200W250 1 320 200Ω
0.5 0.4 VFD004EL21A/23A 0.216 200W 250Ω
BUE-
20015
1 BR200W250 1 170 100Ω
1 0.75 VFD007EL21A/23A 0.427 200W 150Ω
BUE-
20015
1 BR200W150 1 140 80Ω
2 1.5 VFD015EL21A/23A 0.849 300W 100Ω
BUE-
20015
1 BR300W100 - 107 80Ω
3 2.2 VFD022EL21A/23A 1.262 600W 50Ω
BUE-
20037
1 BR300W100 2 150 25Ω
230VSeries
5 3.7 VFD037EL23A 2.080 900W 30Ω
BUE-
20037
1 - - 150 25Ω
Appendix B Accessories|
B-2 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
NOTE
1. Please select the brake unit and/or brake resistor according to the table. “-“ means no
Delta product. Please use the brake unit according to the Equivalent Resistor Value.
2. If damage to the drive or other equipment is due to the fact that the brake resistors and
the brake modules in use are not provided by Delta, the warranty will be void.
3. Take into consideration the safety of the environment when installing the brake resistors.
4. If the minimum resistance value is to be utilized, consult local dealers for the calculation of
the power in Watt.
5. Please select thermal relay trip contact to prevent resistor over load. Use the contact to
switch power off to the AC motor drive!
6. When using more than 2 brake units, equivalent resistor value of parallel brake unit can’t
be less than the value in the column “Minimum Equivalent Resistor Value for Each AC
Drive” (the right-most column in the table).
7. Please read the wiring information in the user manual of the brake unit thoroughly prior to
installation and operation.
8. Definition for Brake Usage ED%
Explanation: The definition of the barke usage ED(%) is for assurance of enough time for
the brake unit and brake resistor to dissipate away heat generated by braking. When the
brake resistor heats up, the resistance would increase with temperature, and brake torque
would decrease accordingly. Suggested cycle time is one minute
Applicable
Motor
Voltage
hp kW
Models
Full Load
Torque
KG-M
Equivalent
Resistor
Value
(suggestion)
Brake Unit
Model BUE
No. of Units
Used
Brake
Resistors
Model and No.
of Units Used
Brake
Torque
10%ED
Min.
Equivalent
Resistor
Value for
each AC
Motor
Drive
0.5 0.4 VFD004EL43A 0.216 300W 400Ω
BUE-
40015
1 BR300W400 1 400 400Ω
1 0.75 VFD007EL43A 0.427 300W 400Ω
BUE-
40015
1 BR300W400 1 200 200Ω
2 1.5 VFD015EL43A 0.849 400W 300Ω
BUE-
40015
1 BR200W150 2 140 160Ω
3 2.2 VFD022EL43A 1.262 600W 200Ω
BUE-
40037
1 BR300W400 2 150 100Ω
460VSeries
5 3.7 VFD037EL43A 2.080 900W 120Ω
BUE-
40037
1 - 150 100Ω
Appendix B Accessories|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-3
100%
T0
T1
Braking Time
Cycle Time
ED% = T1/T0x100(%)
9. For safety reasons, install a thermal overload relay between brake unit and brake resistor.
Together with the magnetic contactor (MC) in the mains supply circuit to the drive it offers
protection in case of any malfunctioning. The purpose of installing the thermal overload
relay is to protect the brake resistor against damage due to frequent brake or in case the
brake unit is continuously on due to unusual high input voltage. Under these
circumstances the thermal overload relay switches off the power to the drive. Never let
the thermal overload relay switch off only the brake resistor as this will cause serious
damage to the AC Motor Drive.
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
NFB
MC
VFD Series
MOTOR
O.L.
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
+ P
- N
( )
( )
B1
B2
SA
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
MC
IM
BR
O.L.
Thermal
Overload
Relay or
temperature
switch
Surge
Absorber
Thermal Overload
Relay
Brake
ResistorBrake
Unit
+ P
- N
( )
( )
Note1: When using the AC drive with DC reactor, please refer to wiring diagram in the AC drive
user manual for the wiring of terminal +(P) of Brake unit.
Note2: wire terminal -(N) to the neutral point of power system.Do NOT
Temperature
Switch
Appendix B Accessories|
B-4 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
B.1.1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors
(Dimensions are in millimeter)
Order P/N: BR080W200, BR080W750, BR300W100, BR300W250, BR300W400, BR400W150,
BR400W040
Model no. L1 L2 H D W Max. Weight (g)
BR080W200
BR080W750
140 125 20 5.3 60 160
BR200W150 165 150 40 5.3
BR200W250 165 150 40 5.3
BR300W100
BR300W250
BR300W400
215 200 30 5.3 60 750
BR400W150
BR400W040
265 250 30 5.3 60 930
Appendix B Accessories|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-5
Order P/N: BR500W030, BR500W100, BR1KW020, BR1KW075
Model no. L1 L2 H D W Max. Weight (g)
BR500W030
BR500W100
335 320 30 5.3 60 1100
BR1KW020
BR1KW075
400 385 50 5.3 100 2800
Appendix B Accessories|
B-6 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Order P/N: BR1K0W050
Order P/N: BR1K0W050, BR1K2W008, BR1K2W6P8, BR1K5W005, BR1K5W040
Appendix B Accessories|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-7
B.2 No Fuse Circuit Breaker Chart
For 1-phase/3-phase drives, the current rating of the breaker shall be within 2-4 times rated input
current.
1-phase 3-phase
Model
Recommended
no-fuse
breaker (A)
Model
Recommended
no-fuse breaker
(A)
VFD002EL11A 15 VFD002EL23A 5
VFD002EL21A 10 VFD004EL23A 5
VFD004EL11A 20 VFD004EL43A 5
VFD004EL21A 15 VFD007EL23A 10
VFD007EL11A 30 VFD007EL43A 5
VFD007EL21A 20 VFD015EL23A 20
VFD015EL21A 30 VFD015EL43A 10
VFD022EL21A 50 VFD022EL23A 30
VFD022EL43A 15
VFD037EL23A 40
VFD037EL43A 20
Appendix B Accessories|
B-8 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
B.3 Fuse Specification Chart
Smaller fuses than those shown in the table are permitted.
Line Fuse
Model
I (A)
Input
I (A)
Output I (A) Bussmann P/N
VFD002EL11A 6.4 1.6 15 JJN-15
VFD002EL21A 4.9 1.6 10 JJN-10
VFD002EL23A 1.9 1.6 5 JJN-6
VFD004EL11A 9 2.5 20 JJN-20
VFD004EL21A 6.5 2.5 15 JJN-15
VFD004EL23A 2.7 2.5 5 JJN-6
VFD004EL43A 1.8 1.5 5 JJS-6
VFD007EL11A 18 4.2 30 JJN-30
VFD007EL21A 9.3 4.2 20 JJN-20
VFD007EL23A 4.9 4.2 10 JJN-10
VFD007EL43A 3.2 2.5 5 JJS-6
VFD015EL21A 15.7 7.5 30 JJN-30
VFD015EL23A 9 7.5 20 JJN-20
VFD015EL43A 4.3 4.2 10 JJS-10
VFD022EL21A 24 11 50 JJN-50
VFD022EL23A 15 11 30 JJN-30
VFD022EL43A 7.1 5.5 15 JJS-15
VFD037EL23A 20.6 17 40 JJN-40
VFD037EL43A 9.0 8.2 20 JJS-20
Appendix B Accessories|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-9
B.4 AC Reactor
B.4.1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value
230V, 50/60Hz, 1-Phase
Inductance (mH)
kW HP
Fundamental
Amps
Max. continuous
Amps 3~5% impedance
0.2 1/4 4 6 6.5
0.4 1/2 5 7.5 3
0.75 1 8 12 1.5
1.5 2 12 18 1.25
2.2 3 18 27 0.8
460V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase
Inductance (mH)
kW HP
Fundamental
Amps
Max.
continuous
Amps 3% impedance 5% impedance
0.4 1/2 2 3 20 32
0.75 1 4 6 9 12
1.5 2 4 6 6.5 9
2.2 3 8 12 5 7.5
3.7 5 8 12 3 5
B.4.2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value
115V/230V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase
Inductance (mH)
kW HP
Fundamental
Amps
Max.
continuous
Amps 3% impedance 5% impedance
0.2 1/4 4 4 9 12
0.4 1/2 6 6 6.5 9
0.75 1 8 12 3 5
1.5 2 8 12 1.5 3
2.2 3 12 18 1.25 2.5
3.7 5 18 27 0.8 1.5
Appendix B Accessories|
B-10 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
460V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase
Inductance (mH)
kW HP
Fundamental
Amps
Max.
continuous
Amps 3% impedance 5% impedance
0.4 1/2 2 3 20 32
0.75 1 4 6 9 12
1.5 2 4 6 6.5 9
2.2 3 8 12 5 7.5
3.7 5 12 18 2.5 4.2
B.4.3 Applications
Connected in input circuit
Application 1 Question
When more than one AC motor drive is
connected to the same mains power, and one
of them is ON during operation.
When applying power to one of the AC motor
drive, the charge current of the capacitors
may cause voltage dip. The AC motor drive
may be damaged when over current occurs
during operation.
Correct wiring
M1
M2
Mn
reactor
AC motor drive
AC motor drive
AC motor drive
motor
motor
motor
Appendix B Accessories|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-11
Application 2 Question
Silicon rectifier and AC motor drive are
connected to the same power.
Switching spikes will be generated when the
silicon rectifier switches on/off. These spikes
may damage the mains circuit.
Correct wiring
DC
power reactor
reactor
AC motor drive
motor
Silicon Controlled Rectifier
Application 3 Question
Used to improve the input power factor, to
reduce harmonics and provide protection from
AC line disturbances. (surges, switching
spikes, short interruptions, etc.). The AC line
reactor should be installed when the power
supply capacity is 500kVA or more and
exceeds 6 times the inverter capacity, or the
mains wiring distance ≤ 10m.
When the mains power capacity is too large,
line impedance will be small and the charge
current will be too high. This may damage AC
motor drive due to higher rectifier
temperature.
Correct wiring
large-capacity
power reactor
small-capacity
AC motor drive
motor
Appendix B Accessories|
B-12 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
B.5 Zero Phase Reactor (RF220X00A)
Dimensions are in millimeter and (inch)
Recommended Wire
SizeCable
type
(Note)
AWG mm2 Nominal
(mm2
)
Qty.
Wiring
Method
≦10 ≦5.3 ≦5.5 1
Diagram
ASingle-
core
≦2 ≦33.6 ≦38 4
Diagram
B
≦12 ≦3.3 ≦3.5 1
Diagram
AThree-
core
≦1 ≦42.4 ≦50 4
Diagram
B
Note: 600V Insulated unshielded Cable.
Power
Supply
Zero Phase Reactor
MOTOR
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Power
Supply
Zero Phase Reactor
MOTOR
Note 1: The table above gives
approximate wire size for the zero phase
reactors but the selection is ultimately
governed by the type and diameter of
cable fitted i.e. the cable must fit through
the center hole of zero phase reactors.
Note 2: Only the phase conductors should
pass through, not the earth core or screen.
Note 3: When long motor output cables
are used an output zero phase reactor
may be required to reduce radiated
emissions from the cable.
Diagram B
Please put all wires through 4 cores in
series without winding.
Diagram A
Please wind each wire 4 times around the
core. The reactor must be put at inverter
output as close as possible.
Appendix B Accessories|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-13
B.6 Remote Controller RC-01
Dimensions are in millimeter
AFM ACM +10VAVI DCM MI5 MI1 MI2 MI6
8 6 5 4 16 15 14 13 11 RC-01Terminal block
(Wiring connections)
VFD-EL I/O block
VFD-EL Programming:
Pr.02.00 set to 2
Pr.02.01 set to 1 (external controls)
Pr.04.04 set to 1 (setting Run/Stop and Fwd/Rev controls)
Pr.04.07 (MI5) set to 5 (External reset)
Pr.04.08 (MI6) set to 8 (JOG operation)
Appendix B Accessories|
B-14 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
B.7 PU06
B.7.1 Description of the Digital Keypad VFD-PU06
U
F
H
VFD-PU06
JOG
RUN RESET
STOP
LED Display
Indicates frequency, voltage, current, user
defined units, read, and save, etc.
Status Display
Display the driver's current status.
Model Number
STOP/RESET
Stops AC drive operation and reset the drive
after fault occurred.
PU
EXT PU
Right key
Move the cursor to the right
RUN Key
Start AC drive operation.
Frequency Command
Status indicator
Output Frequency
Status indicator
User Defined Units
Status indicator
JOG
By pressing JOG key,
Jog frequency operation. MODE
Change between different display mode.
Left Key
Move cursor to the left.
UP and DOWN Key
Set the parameter number
and changes the numerical
data, such as Master Frequency.
FWD/REV Key
Select FWD/REV operation.
B.7.2 Explanation of Display Message
Display Message Descriptions
The AC motor drive Master Frequency Command.
The Actual Operation Frequency present at terminals U, V, and W.
The custom unit (u)
The output current present at terminals U, V, and W.
Press to change the mode to READ. Press PROG/DATA for
about 2 sec or until it’s flashing, read the parameters of AC drive to the
digital keypad PU06. It can read 4 groups of parameters to PU06. (read
0 – read 3)
Press to change the mode to SAVE. Press PROG/DATA for
about 2 sec or until it’s flashing, then write the parameters from the
digital keypad PU06 to AC drive. If it has saved, it will show the type of
AC motor drive.
Appendix B Accessories|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-15
Display Message Descriptions
The specified parameter setting.
The actual value stored in the specified parameter.
External Fault
“End” displays for approximately 1 second if the entered input data have
been accepted. After a parameter value has been set, the new value is
automatically stored in memory. To modify an entry, use the
or keys.
“Err” displays if the input is invalid.
Communication Error. Please check the AC motor drive user manual
(Chapter 5, Group 9 Communication Parameter) for more details.
B.7.3 Operation Flow Chart
XX
XX-XX
XXXXX
-END-
VFD-PU06 Operation Flow Chart
Cannot
write in
-ERR-
Or
Succeed to
Write in
Press UP key to select
SAVE or READ.
Press PROG/DATA for
about 2 seconds or until
it is flashing, then save
parameters
or read parameters
.
from PU06 to
AC drive
from AC drive to PU06
Appendix B Accessories|
B-16 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
B.8 Fieldbus Modules
B.8.1 DeviceNet Communication Module (CME-DN01)
B.8.1.1 Panel Appearance and Dimensions
1. For RS-485 connection to VFD-EL 2. Communication port for connecting DeviceNet
network 3. Address selector 4. Baud rate selector 5. Three LED status indicators for monitor.
(Refer to the figure below)
72.2 [2.84]
57.3[2.26]
14.3[0.57]
59.7[2.35]
3.5 [0.14]35.8 [1.41]
CME-DN01
ADD1 ADD2
SP
500K
250K
125K
BAUD
MODNET
UNIT: mm(inch)
1
543
2
B.8.1.2 Wiring and Settings
Refer to following diagram for details.
CME-DN01
ADD1 ADD2
SP
500K
250K
125K
BAUD
MODNET
MAC address Date Rate
CAN-LV+ Empty
Pin
CAN-H V-
1: Reserved
2: EV
5: SG+
6: Reserved
7: Reserved
8: Reserved
3: GND
4: SG-
Setting baud rate
BAUD
0
Switch
Value
Baud
Rate
0 125K
1 250K
2 500K
Other AUTO
Setting MAC addresses:
use decimal system.
ADD1 ADD2
Appendix B Accessories|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-17
B.8.1.3 Power Supply
No external power is needed. Power is supplied via RS-485 port that is connected to VFD-EL.
An 8 pins RJ-45 cable, which is packed together with this communication module, is used to
connect the RS-485 port between VFD-EL and this communication module for power. This
communication module will perform the function once it is connected. Refer to the following
paragraph for LED indications.
B.8.1.4 LEDs Display
1. SP: Green LED means in normal condition, Red LED means abnormal condition.
2. Module: Green blinking LED means no I/O data transmission, Green steady LED means
I/O data transmission OK.
Red LED blinking or steady LED means module communication is abnormal.
3. Network: Green LED means DeviceNet communication is normal, Red LED means
abnormal
B.8.2 LonWorks Communication Module (CME-LW01)
B.8.2.1 Introduction
Device CME-LW01 is used for communication interface between Modbus and LonTalk. CME-
LW01 needs be configured via LonWorks network tool first, so that it can perform the function
on LonWorks network. No need to set CME-LW01 address.
This manual provides instructions for the installation and setup for CME-LW01 that is used to
communicate with Delta VFD-EL (firmware version of VFD-EL should conform with CME-
LW01 according to the table below) via LonWorks Network.
B.8.2.2 Dimensions
57.3[2.26]
72.2 [2.84]
59.7[2.35]
9.5[0.37]
3.5 [0.14]34.8 [1.37]
SP
CME-LW01
Appendix B Accessories|
B-18 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
B.8.2.3 Specifications
Power supply: 16-30VDC, 750mW
Communication: Modbus in ASCII format, protocol: 9600, 7, N, 2
LonTalk: free topology with FTT-10A 78 Kbps.
LonTalk terminal: 4-pin terminals, wire gauge: 28-12 AWG, wire strip length: 7-8mm
RS-485 port: 8 pins with RJ-45
B.8.2.4 Wiring
SP
CME-LW01
Power LED SP LED
Service LED
Service Pin
1: Reserved
2: EV
3: GND
4: SG-
5: SG+
6: Reserved
7: Reserved
8: Reserved
LonTalk
1 2 3 4
LonTalk
Terminal definition for LonTalk system
Terminal Symbol Function
1
2
3
4
These are twisted pair cables to connect
to LonTalk system. Terminals 1 and 2
should be used as one group, and the
same for terminals 3 and 4.
B.8.2.5 LED Indications
There are three LEDs in front panel of CME-LW01. If the communication is normal, power
LED, SP LED should be green (red LED means abnormal communication) and service LED
should be OFF. If LEDs display do not match, refer to user manual for details.
Appendix B Accessories|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-19
B.8.3 Profibus Communication Module (CME-PD01)
B.8.3.1 Panel Appearance
1: Reserved
2: EV
5: SG+
6: Reserved
7: Reserved
8: Reserved
3: GND
4: SG-
Profibus-DP
Interface (DB9)
RS-485 (RJ45)
ADDH ADDL
SPNET
CME-PB01
SP LEDNET LEDAddress Switches
1. SP LED: Indicating the connection status between VFD-EL and CME-PD01.
2. NET LED: Indicating the connection status between CME-PD01 and PROFIBUS-DP.
3. Address Switches: Setting the address of CME-PD01 on PROFIBUS- DP network.
4. RS-485 Interface (RJ45): Connecting to VFD-EL, and supply power to CME-PD01.
5. PROFIBUS-DP Interface (DB9): 9-PIN connector that connects to PROFIBUS-DP
network.
6. Extended Socket: 4-PIN socket that connects to PROFIBUS-DP network.
Appendix B Accessories|
B-20 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
B.8.3.2 Dimensions
57.3[2.26]
59.7[2.35]
3.6[0.14]
72.2 [2.84]
34.8 [1.37]
ADDH ADDL
SPNET
CME-PB01
UNIT: mm(inch)
B.8.3.3 Parameters Settings in VFD-EL
VFD-EL
Baud Rate 9600 Pr.09.01=1
RTU 8, N, 2 Pr.09.03=3
Freq. Source Pr.02.00=4
Command Source Pr.02.01=3
B.8.3.4 Power Supply
The power of CME-PD01 is supplied from VFD-EL. Please connect VFD-EL to CME-PD01 by
using 8 pins RJ-45 cable, which is packed together with CME-PD01. After connection is
completed, CME-PD01 is powered whenever power is applied to VFD-EL.
B.8.3.5 PROFIBUS Address
CME-PD01 has two rotary switches for the user to select the PROFIBUS address. The set
value via 2 address switches, ADDH and ADDL, is in HEX format. ADDH sets the upper 4 bits,
and ADDL sets the lower 4 bits of the PROFIBUS address.
Appendix B Accessories|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-21
Address Meaning
1..0x7D Valid PROFIBUS address
0 or 0x7E..0xFE Invalid PROFIBUS address
B.8.4 CME-COP01 (CANopen)
CME-COP01 CANopen communication module is specifically for connecting to CANopen
communication module of Delta VFD-EL AC motor drive.
B.8.4.1 Product Profile
COM port
CANopen connection port
RUN indicator
ERROR indicator
SP (Scan Port) indicator
Baud rate switch
1
2
7 6 3 4 5
Unit: mm Address switch
B.8.4.2 Specifications
CANopen Connection
Interface Pluggable connector (5.08mm)
Transmission method CAN
Transmission cable 2-wire twisted shielded cable
Electrical isolation 500V DC
Appendix B Accessories|
B-22 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
Communication
Process Data Objects
(PDO)
Service Data Object
(SDO)
Synchronization
(SYNC)
Emergency (EMCY)
Message type
Network Management
(NMT)
Baud
rate
10 Kbps
20 Kbps
50 Kbps
125 Kbps
250 Kbps
500 Kbps
800 Kbps
1 Mbps
Product code Delta VFD-EL AC motor drive 22
Device type 402
Vendor ID 477
Environmental Specifications
Noise Immunity
ESD(IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-2): 8KV Air Discharge
EFT(IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-4): Power Line: 2KV, Digital I/O: 1KV,
Analog & Communication I/O: 1KV
Damped-Oscillatory Wave: Power Line: 1KV, Digital I/O: 1KV
RS(IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-3): 26MHz ~ 1GHz, 10V/m
Environment
Operation: 0°C ~ 55°C (Temperature), 50 ~ 95% (Humidity), Pollution
degree 2;
Storage: -40°C ~ 70°C (Temperature), 5 ~ 95% (Humidity)
Vibration /
Shock
Resistance
Standard: IEC1131-2, IEC 68-2-6(TEST Fc/IEC1131-2 & IEC 68-2-27
(TEST Ea)
Certifications Standard: IEC 61131-2,UL508
B.8.4.3 Components
Pin Definition on CANopen Connection Port
To connect with CANopen, use the connector enclosed with CME-COP01 or any connectors
you can buy in the store for wiring.
Pin Signal Content
1 CAN_GND Ground / 0 V / V-
2 CAN_L Signal-
3 SHIELD Shield
4 CAN_H Signal+
5 - Reserved
1 2 3 4 5
Baud Rate Setting
Rotary switch (BR) sets up the communication speed on
CANopen network in hex. Setup range: 0 ~ 7 (8 ~F are
forbidden) 012
345
6
7 8 9
A
BCD
EF
BR
Appendix B Accessories|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-23
Example: If you need to set up the communication speed of CME-COP01 as 500K, simply
switch BR to “5”.
BR Value Baud rate BR Value Baud rate
0 10K 4 250K
1 20K 5 500K
2 50K 6 800K
3 125K 7 1M
MAC ID Setting
Rotary switches (ID_L and ID_H) set up the
Node-ID on CANopen network in hex. Setup
range: 00 ~ 7F (80 ~FF are forbidden) 012
345
6
7 8 9
A
BCD
EF 012
345
6
7 8 9
A
BCD
EF
ID_H ID_L
Example: If you need to set up the communication address of CME-COP01 as 26(1AH),
simply switch ID_H to “1” and ID_L to “A”.
Switch Setting Content
0 … 7F Valid CANopen MAC ID setting
Other Invalid CANopen MAC ID setting
B.8.4.4 LED Indicator Explanation & Troubleshooting
There are 3 LED indicators, RUN, ERROR and SP, on CME-COP01 to indicate the
communication status of CME-COP01.
RUN LED
LED Status State Indication
OFF No power No power on CME-COP01 card
Single Flash
(Green)
STOPPED CME-COP01 is in STOPPED state
Blinking
(Green)
PRE-OPERATIONAL
CME-COP01 is in the PRE-
OPERATIONAL state
Green ON OPERATIONAL
CME-COP01 is in the
OPERATIONAL state
Red ON Configuration error Node-ID or Baud rate setting error
Appendix B Accessories|
B-24 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
ERROR LED
LED Status State Indication
OFF No error CME-COP01 is working condition
Single Flash
(Red)
Warning limit reached
At least one of error counter of the
CANopen controller has reached or
exceeded the warning level (too many
error frames)
Double Flash
(Red)
Error control event
A guard event or heartbeat event has
occurred
Red ON Bus-off The CANopen controller is bus-off
SP LED
LED Status State Indication
OFF No Power No power on CME-COP01 card
LED Blinking
(Red)
CRC check error
Check your communication setting in
VFD-EL drives (19200,<8,N,2>,RTU)
Red ON
Connection failure/No
connection
1. Check the connection between
VFD-EL drive and CME-COP01
card is correct
2. Re-wire the VFD-EL connection
and ensure that the wire
specification is correct
Green ON Normal Communication is normal
LED Descriptions
State Description
LED ON Constantly on
LED OFF Constantly off
LED blinking Flash, on for 0.2s and off for 0.2s
LED single
flash
On for 0.2s and off for 1s
LED double
flash
On for 0.2s off for 0.2s, on for 0.2s and off for 1s
Appendix B Accessories|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-25
B.9 MKE-EP & DIN Rail
B.9.1 MKE-EP
EMC earthing plate for Shielding Cable
C CLAMP
TWO HOLE STRAP
1
TWO HOLE STRAP
2
Appendix B Accessories|
B-26 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
B.9.2 DIN Rail: MKEL-DRA (Only for frame A)
Dimensions
This DIN rail (MKEL-DRA) is only for frame A. For frame B, it is shipped with DIN rail (MKEL-DRB).
Refer to chapter 1.3 for VFD-EL dimension.
NOTE
Frame A: VFD002EL11A/21A/23A, VFD004EL11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007EL21A/23A/43A,
VFD015EL23A/43A
Frame B: VFD007EL11A, VFD015EL21A, VFD022EL21A/23A/43A, VFD037EL23A/43A
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 C-1
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive
The choice of the right AC motor drive for the application is very important and has great influence
on its lifetime. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too large, it cannot offer complete protection to the
motor and motor maybe damaged. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too small, it cannot offer the
required performance and the AC motor drive maybe damaged due to overloading.
But by simply selecting the AC motor drive of the same capacity as the motor, user application
requirements cannot be met completely. Therefore, a designer should consider all the conditions,
including load type, load speed, load characteristic, operation method, rated output, rated speed,
power and the change of load capacity. The following table lists the factors you need to consider,
depending on your requirements.
Related Specification
Item Speed and
torque
characteristics
Time
ratings
Overload
capacity
Starting
torque
Load type
Friction load and weight
load
Liquid (viscous) load
Inertia load
Load with power
transmission
● ●
Load speed and
torque
characteristics
Constant torque
Constant output
Decreasing torque
Decreasing output
● ●
Load
characteristics
Constant load
Shock load
Repetitive load
High starting torque
Low starting torque
● ● ● ●
Continuous operation, Short-time operation
Long-time operation at medium/low speeds
● ●
Maximum output current (instantaneous)
Constant output current (continuous)
● ●
Maximum frequency, Base frequency ●
Power supply transformer capacity or
percentage impedance
Voltage fluctuations and unbalance
Number of phases, single phase protection
Frequency
● ●
Mechanical friction, losses in wiring ● ●
Duty cycle modification ●
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
C-2 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
C.1 Capacity Formulas
1. When one AC motor drive operates one motor
The starting capacity should be less than 1.5x rated capacity of AC motor drive
The starting capacity=
)(_____5.1
375cos973
2
kVAdrivemotorACofcapacitythe
t
NGD
T
Nk
A
L ×≤⎟⎟
⎠
⎞
⎜⎜
⎝
⎛
×+
××
×
ϕη
2. When one AC motor drive operates more than one motor
2.1 The starting capacity should be less than the rated capacity of AC motor drive
Acceleration time ≦60 seconds
The starting capacity=
( )[ ] ( ) )(_____5.11
cos
111 kVAdrivemotorACofcapacitythek
n
n
Pknn
Nk
sCss
T
s
T ×≤+=+
×
×
⎥
⎥
⎥
⎦
⎤
⎢
⎢
⎢
⎣
⎡
−−
ϕη
Acceleration time ≧60 seconds
The starting capacity=
( )[ ] ( ) )(_____1
cos
111 kVAdrivemotorACofcapacitythek
n
n
Pknn
Nk
sCss
T
s
T ≤+=+
×
×
⎥
⎥
⎥
⎦
⎤
⎢
⎢
⎢
⎣
⎡
−−
ϕη
2.2 The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A)
Acceleration time ≦60 seconds
)(______5.111 AdrivemotorACofcurrentratedthekn
nIn SM
T
S
T ×≤++ ⎥
⎦
⎤
⎢
⎣
⎡
⎟
⎠
⎞⎜
⎝
⎛ −
Acceleration time ≧60 seconds
)(______11 AdrivemotorACofcurrentratedthekn
nIn SM
T
S
T ≤++ ⎥
⎦
⎤
⎢
⎣
⎡
⎟
⎠
⎞⎜
⎝
⎛ −
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 C-3
2.3 When it is running continuously
The requirement of load capacity should be less than the capacity of AC
motor drive(kVA)
The requirement of load capacity=
)(_____
cos
kVAdrivemotorACofcapacitythe
Pk M
≤
×
×
ϕη
The motor capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive
)(_____103 3
kVAdrivemotorACofcapacitytheIVk MM ≤×××× −
The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A)
)(______ AdrivemotorACofcurrentratedtheIk M ≤×
Symbol explanation
MP : Motor shaft output for load (kW)
η : Motor efficiency (normally, approx. 0.85)
ϕcos : Motor power factor (normally, approx. 0.75)
MV : Motor rated voltage(V)
MI : Motor rated current(A), for commercial power
k : Correction factor calculated from current distortion factor (1.05-1.1, depending on
PWM method)
1CP : Continuous motor capacity (kVA)
Sk : Starting current/rated current of motor
Tn : Number of motors in parallel
Sn : Number of simultaneously started motors
2
GD : Total inertia (GD2
) calculated back to motor shaft (kg m2
)
LT : Load torque
At : Motor acceleration time
N : Motor speed
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
C-4 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
C.2 General Precaution
Selection Note
1. When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power transformer
(600kVA or above) or when a phase lead capacitor is switched, excess peak currents
may occur in the power input circuit and the converter section may be damaged. To avoid
this, use an AC input reactor (optional) before AC Motor Drive mains input to reduce the
current and improve the input power efficiency.
2. When a special motor is used or more than one motor is driven in parallel with a single
AC Motor Drive, select the AC Motor Drive current ≥1.25x(Sum of the motor rated
currents).
3. The starting and accel./decel. characteristics of a motor are limited by the rated current
and the overload protection of the AC Motor Drive. Compared to running the motor D.O.L.
(Direct On-Line), a lower starting torque output with AC Motor Drive can be expected. If
higher starting torque is required (such as for elevators, mixers, tooling machines, etc.)
use an AC Motor Drive of higher capacity or increase the capacities for both the motor
and the AC Motor Drive.
4. When an error occurs on the drive, a protective circuit will be activated and the AC Motor
Drive output is turned off. Then the motor will coast to stop. For an emergency stop, an
external mechanical brake is needed to quickly stop the motor.
Parameter Settings Note
1. The AC Motor Drive can be driven at an output frequency up to 400Hz (less for some
models) with the digital keypad. Setting errors may create a dangerous situation. For
safety, the use of the upper limit frequency function is strongly recommended.
2. High DC brake operating voltages and long operation time (at low frequencies) may
cause overheating of the motor. In that case, forced external motor cooling is
recommended.
3. Motor accel./decel. time is determined by motor rated torque, load torque, and load inertia.
4. If the stall prevention function is activated, the accel./decel. time is automatically extended
to a length that the AC Motor Drive can handle. If the motor needs to decelerate within a
certain time with high load inertia that can’t be handled by the AC Motor Drive in the
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 C-5
required time, either use an external brake resistor and/or brake unit, depending on the
model, (to shorten deceleration time only) or increase the capacity for both the motor and
the AC Motor Drive.
C.3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor
Standard motor
When using the AC Motor Drive to operate a standard 3-phase induction motor, take the
following precautions:
1. The energy loss is greater than for an inverter duty motor.
2. Avoid running motor at low speed for a long time. Under this condition, the motor
temperature may rise above the motor rating due to limited airflow produced by the
motor’s fan. Consider external forced motor cooling.
3. When the standard motor operates at low speed for long time, the output load must be
decreased.
4. The load tolerance of a standard motor is as follows:
3 6 20 60
100
82
70
60
50
0
60%40%
25%
torque(%)
continuous
Frequency (Hz)
Load duty-cycle
5. If 100% continuous torque is required at low speed, it may be necessary to use a special
inverter duty motor.
6. Motor dynamic balance and rotor endurance should be considered once the operating
speed exceeds the rated speed (60Hz) of a standard motor.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
C-6 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
7. Motor torque characteristics vary when an AC Motor Drive instead of commercial power
supply drives the motor. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be
connected.
8. Because of the high carrier frequency PWM control of the VFD series, pay attention to the
following motor vibration problems:
Resonant mechanical vibration: anti-vibration (damping) rubbers should be
used to mount equipment that runs at varying speed.
Motor imbalance: special care is required for operation at 50 or 60 Hz and
higher frequency.
To avoid resonances, use the Skip frequencies.
9. The motor fan will be very noisy when the motor speed exceeds 50 or 60Hz.
Special motors:
1. Pole-changing (Dahlander) motor:
The rated current is differs from that of a standard motor. Please check before operation
and select the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When changing the pole number
the motor needs to be stopped first. If over current occurs during operation or
regenerative voltage is too high, please let the motor free run to stop (coast).
2. Submersible motor:
The rated current is higher than that of a standard motor. Please check before operation
and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. With long motor cable between
AC motor drive and motor, available motor torque is reduced.
3. Explosion-proof (Ex) motor:
Needs to be installed in a safe place and the wiring should comply with the (Ex)
requirements. Delta AC Motor Drives are not suitable for (Ex) areas with special
precautions.
4. Gear reduction motor:
The lubricating method of reduction gearbox and speed range for continuous operation
will be different and depending on brand. The lubricating function for operating long time
at low speed and for high-speed operation needs to be considered carefully.
5. Synchronous motor:
The rated current and starting current are higher than for standard motors. Please check
before operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When the AC
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 C-7
motor drive operates more than one motor, please pay attention to starting and changing
the motor.
Power Transmission Mechanism
Pay attention to reduced lubrication when operating gear reduction motors, gearboxes, belts
and chains, etc. over longer periods at low speeds. At high speeds of 50/60Hz and above,
lifetime reducing noises and vibrations may occur.
Motor torque
The torque characteristics of a motor operated by an AC motor drive and commercial mains
power are different.
Below you’ll find the torque-speed characteristics of a standard motor (4-pole, 15kW):
AC motor drive Motor
180
155
140
100
80
55
38
0320 60 120
60 seconds
Base freq.: 60Hz
V/F for 220V/60Hz
180
155
100
55
38
0320 60 120
torque(%)
Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz)
60 seconds60 seconds
torque(%)
Base freq.: 60Hz
V/F for 220V/60Hz
130
140
100
85
45
35
0320 50 120
180
150
100
45
35
0 50 120
68 80
torque(%)
torque(%)
60 seconds 60 seconds
Frequency (Hz)Frequency (Hz)
3 20
Base freq.: 50Hz
V/F for 220V/50Hz
Base freq.: 50Hz
V/F for 220V/50Hz
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
C-8 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02
This page intentionally left blank.

More Related Content

PDF
Transformer & OLTC
PDF
Neumatica e Hidraulica Industrial.pdf
PDF
PLC y Electroneumática: manual didáctico control de motores eléctricos
PDF
Calculo espiras de bobinado motor trifasico 2 capas
PDF
PLC y Electroneumática: Controles y automatismos eléctricos
PDF
Switchgears Command circuits and Devices
PDF
ETAP - Analisis de cortocircuito etap 11
PDF
electrical symbol v2
Transformer & OLTC
Neumatica e Hidraulica Industrial.pdf
PLC y Electroneumática: manual didáctico control de motores eléctricos
Calculo espiras de bobinado motor trifasico 2 capas
PLC y Electroneumática: Controles y automatismos eléctricos
Switchgears Command circuits and Devices
ETAP - Analisis de cortocircuito etap 11
electrical symbol v2

What's hot (20)

DOC
Conexion de terminales en motores mono y trifasico
PDF
Ejemplo dahlander 20080402
PDF
Practical handbook-for-relay-protection-engineers
PPTX
Electrical HT/LT Motor protection
PDF
Arranque estrella triangulo con inversion de giro
PDF
180080755 68256279-arranque-estrella-triangulo-con-inversion-de-giro
ODP
Motor protection
PPTX
Industrial Star Delta Starter for a 3-Phase Induction Motor
PDF
Corrente nominal de motores trifásicos 220v
PDF
Protective Device Coordination
PDF
Transformer factory acceptance tests
PPTX
Tipos de conexiones de los transformadores
PPTX
Sistemas de Arranque de motores trifásicos asincrónicos.pptx
PDF
PLC y Electroneumática: Automatismo industrial por juan Carlos Martin y María...
PPTX
Bancos de Capacitores
DOC
Tablas ingeniera elctrica
PDF
362082069 circuitos-basicos-de-contactores-y-temporizadores-vicent-lladonosa
PPT
Power System Protection basics
PDF
Motores electricos guia 5 conexion
PPT
An Overview Of Agbami Fpso Electrical Power System
Conexion de terminales en motores mono y trifasico
Ejemplo dahlander 20080402
Practical handbook-for-relay-protection-engineers
Electrical HT/LT Motor protection
Arranque estrella triangulo con inversion de giro
180080755 68256279-arranque-estrella-triangulo-con-inversion-de-giro
Motor protection
Industrial Star Delta Starter for a 3-Phase Induction Motor
Corrente nominal de motores trifásicos 220v
Protective Device Coordination
Transformer factory acceptance tests
Tipos de conexiones de los transformadores
Sistemas de Arranque de motores trifásicos asincrónicos.pptx
PLC y Electroneumática: Automatismo industrial por juan Carlos Martin y María...
Bancos de Capacitores
Tablas ingeniera elctrica
362082069 circuitos-basicos-de-contactores-y-temporizadores-vicent-lladonosa
Power System Protection basics
Motores electricos guia 5 conexion
An Overview Of Agbami Fpso Electrical Power System
Ad

Viewers also liked (7)

PDF
Delta vfd-e-user-manual
PDF
Delta vfd lfrekv
PPTX
Presentation subsoil investigation foundation recommendation geotechnical ass...
PPT
Soil investigation
PPTX
Cyclone separator maintenance
DOC
Design Theory Cyclones
PPTX
Building Construction
Delta vfd-e-user-manual
Delta vfd lfrekv
Presentation subsoil investigation foundation recommendation geotechnical ass...
Soil investigation
Cyclone separator maintenance
Design Theory Cyclones
Building Construction
Ad

Similar to Manual VFD Delta (20)

PDF
Vfd ve m-en_20081231
PDF
Vfd b manual-en
PDF
Vfd g manual-en
PDF
Vfd m en_20100514
PDF
Vfd s manual-en
PDF
Vfd s manual-en
PDF
Vfd e m-en_20120118
PDF
Vfd vl m-en_20111018
PDF
Delta vfd dd-m_en_20120614
PDF
Delta vfd dd-m_en_20120614
PDF
Vfd a manual-en
PDF
Vfd f m-en_20110418
PDF
C2000 m en_20120201
PDF
Vfd l m-en_20030522
PDF
PDF
Delta vfd c200-m_en_20120601
PDF
V1000 quick start manual
PDF
Delta cp2000 m_en_20120331
PDF
Quick start l1000 a
PDF
Tech pv series
Vfd ve m-en_20081231
Vfd b manual-en
Vfd g manual-en
Vfd m en_20100514
Vfd s manual-en
Vfd s manual-en
Vfd e m-en_20120118
Vfd vl m-en_20111018
Delta vfd dd-m_en_20120614
Delta vfd dd-m_en_20120614
Vfd a manual-en
Vfd f m-en_20110418
C2000 m en_20120201
Vfd l m-en_20030522
Delta vfd c200-m_en_20120601
V1000 quick start manual
Delta cp2000 m_en_20120331
Quick start l1000 a
Tech pv series

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
Influence of Green Infrastructure on Residents’ Endorsement of the New Ecolog...
PPTX
ASME PCC-02 TRAINING -DESKTOP-NLE5HNP.pptx
PPTX
CURRICULAM DESIGN engineering FOR CSE 2025.pptx
PDF
Categorization of Factors Affecting Classification Algorithms Selection
PDF
Soil Improvement Techniques Note - Rabbi
PPTX
Fundamentals of safety and accident prevention -final (1).pptx
PPTX
Fundamentals of Mechanical Engineering.pptx
PDF
PREDICTION OF DIABETES FROM ELECTRONIC HEALTH RECORDS
PDF
Abrasive, erosive and cavitation wear.pdf
PDF
BIO-INSPIRED ARCHITECTURE FOR PARSIMONIOUS CONVERSATIONAL INTELLIGENCE : THE ...
PPTX
introduction to high performance computing
PDF
distributed database system" (DDBS) is often used to refer to both the distri...
PDF
Design Guidelines and solutions for Plastics parts
PDF
UNIT no 1 INTRODUCTION TO DBMS NOTES.pdf
PDF
SMART SIGNAL TIMING FOR URBAN INTERSECTIONS USING REAL-TIME VEHICLE DETECTI...
PDF
Exploratory_Data_Analysis_Fundamentals.pdf
PDF
null (2) bgfbg bfgb bfgb fbfg bfbgf b.pdf
PDF
EXPLORING LEARNING ENGAGEMENT FACTORS INFLUENCING BEHAVIORAL, COGNITIVE, AND ...
PPT
INTRODUCTION -Data Warehousing and Mining-M.Tech- VTU.ppt
PPT
Total quality management ppt for engineering students
Influence of Green Infrastructure on Residents’ Endorsement of the New Ecolog...
ASME PCC-02 TRAINING -DESKTOP-NLE5HNP.pptx
CURRICULAM DESIGN engineering FOR CSE 2025.pptx
Categorization of Factors Affecting Classification Algorithms Selection
Soil Improvement Techniques Note - Rabbi
Fundamentals of safety and accident prevention -final (1).pptx
Fundamentals of Mechanical Engineering.pptx
PREDICTION OF DIABETES FROM ELECTRONIC HEALTH RECORDS
Abrasive, erosive and cavitation wear.pdf
BIO-INSPIRED ARCHITECTURE FOR PARSIMONIOUS CONVERSATIONAL INTELLIGENCE : THE ...
introduction to high performance computing
distributed database system" (DDBS) is often used to refer to both the distri...
Design Guidelines and solutions for Plastics parts
UNIT no 1 INTRODUCTION TO DBMS NOTES.pdf
SMART SIGNAL TIMING FOR URBAN INTERSECTIONS USING REAL-TIME VEHICLE DETECTI...
Exploratory_Data_Analysis_Fundamentals.pdf
null (2) bgfbg bfgb bfgb fbfg bfbgf b.pdf
EXPLORING LEARNING ENGAGEMENT FACTORS INFLUENCING BEHAVIORAL, COGNITIVE, AND ...
INTRODUCTION -Data Warehousing and Mining-M.Tech- VTU.ppt
Total quality management ppt for engineering students

Manual VFD Delta

  • 4. Preface Thank you for choosing DELTA’s multifunction VFD-EL Series. The VFD-EL Series is manufactured with high-quality components and materials and incorporate the latest microprocessor technology available. This manual is to be used for the installation, parameter setting, troubleshooting, and daily maintenance of the AC motor drive. To guarantee safe operation of the equipment, read the following safety guidelines before connecting power to the AC motor drive. Keep this operating manual at hand and distribute to all users for reference. To ensure the safety of operators and equipment, only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drive are to do installation, start-up and maintenance. Always read this manual thoroughly before using VFD-EL series AC Motor Drive, especially the WARNING, DANGER and CAUTION notes. Failure to comply may result in personal injury and equipment damage. If you have any questions, please contact your dealer. PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY. DANGER! 1. AC input power must be disconnected before any wiring to the AC motor drive is made. 2. A charge may still remain in the DC-link capacitors with hazardous voltages, even if the power has been turned off. To prevent personal injury, please ensure that power has turned off before opening the AC motor drive and wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels. 3. Never reassemble internal components or wiring. 4. The AC motor drive may be destroyed beyond repair if incorrect cables are connected to the input/output terminals. Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 directly to the AC mains circuit power supply. 5. Ground the VFD-EL using the ground terminal. The grounding method must comply with the laws of the country where the AC motor drive is to be installed. Refer to the Basic Wiring Diagram. 6. VFD-EL series is used only to control variable speed of 3-phase induction motors, NOT for 1- phase motors or other purpose. 7. VFD-EL series shall NOT be used for life support equipment or any life safety situation.
  • 5. WARNING! 1. DO NOT use Hi-pot test for internal components. The semi-conductor used in AC motor drive easily damage by high-voltage. 2. There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards. These components are especially sensitive to static electricity. To prevent damage to these components, do not touch these components or the circuit boards with metal objects or your bare hands. 3. Only qualified persons are allowed to install, wire and maintain AC motor drives. CAUTION! 1. DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a place subjected to high temperature, direct sunlight, high humidity, excessive vibration, corrosive gases or liquids, or airborne dust or metallic particles. 2. Some parameters settings can cause the motor to run immediately after applying power 3. Only use AC motor drives within specification. Failure to comply may result in fire, explosion or electric shock. 4. To prevent personal injury, please keep children and unqualified people away from the equipment. 5. When the motor cable between AC motor drive and motor is too long, the layer insulation of the motor may be damaged. Please use a frequency inverter duty motor or add an AC output reactor to prevent damage to the motor. Refer to appendix B Reactor for details. 6. The rated voltage for AC motor drive must be ≤ 240V (≤ 480V for 460V models) and the mains supply current capacity must be ≤ 5000A RMS.
  • 6. Table of Contents Preface ............................................................................................................. i Table of Contents .......................................................................................... iii Chapter 1 Introduction................................................................................1-1 1.1 Receiving and Inspection....................................................................1-2 1.1.1 Nameplate Information................................................................ 1-2 1.1.2 Model Explanation ...................................................................... 1-2 1.1.3 Series Number Explanation ........................................................ 1-3 1.1.4 Drive Frames and Appearances ................................................. 1-3 1.1.5 Remove Instructions ................................................................... 1-5 1.2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring................................................1-5 1.2.1 Ambient Conditions..................................................................... 1-6 1.2.2 DC-bus Sharing: Connecting the DC-bus of the AC Motor Drives in Parallel................................................................................................. 1-8 1.3 Dimensions.........................................................................................1-9 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring ..............................................................2-1 2.1 Wiring .................................................................................................2-2 2.2 External Wiring ...................................................................................2-8 2.3 Main Circuit.........................................................................................2-9 2.3.1 Main Circuit Connection.............................................................. 2-9 2.3.2 Main Circuit Terminals .............................................................. 2-11 2.4 Control Terminals .............................................................................2-12
  • 7. Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up..................................................................3-1 3.1 Description of the Digital Keypad ....................................................... 3-1 3.2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad.................................................... 3-3 3.3 Reference Table for the 7-segment LED Display of the Digital Keypad3- 4 3.4 Operation Method .............................................................................. 3-4 3.5 Trial Run ............................................................................................ 3-5 Chapter 4 Parameters..................................................................................4-1 4.1 Summary of Parameter Settings ........................................................ 4-2 4.2 Parameter Settings for Applications................................................. 4-21 4.3 Description of Parameter Settings.................................................... 4-26 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting.........................................................................5-1 5.1 Over Current (OC).............................................................................. 5-1 5.2 Ground Fault ...................................................................................... 5-2 5.3 Over Voltage (OV).............................................................................. 5-2 5.4 Low Voltage (Lv) ................................................................................ 5-3 5.5 Over Heat (OH1)................................................................................ 5-4 5.6 Overload ............................................................................................ 5-4 5.7 Keypad Display is Abnormal .............................................................. 5-5 5.8 Phase Loss (PHL).............................................................................. 5-5 5.9 Motor cannot Run............................................................................... 5-6 5.10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed .................................................... 5-7 5.11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration....................................................... 5-8 5.12 The Motor does not Run as Expected.............................................. 5-8 5.13 Electromagnetic/Induction Noise...................................................... 5-9
  • 8. 5.14 Environmental Condition...................................................................5-9 5.15 Affecting Other Machines ...............................................................5-10 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance................................6-1 6.1 Fault Code Information .......................................................................6-1 6.1.1 Common Problems and Solutions............................................... 6-1 6.1.2 Reset .......................................................................................... 6-5 6.2 Maintenance and Inspections .............................................................6-5 Appendix A Specifications ........................................................................ A-1 Appendix B Accessories ........................................................................... B-1 B.1 All Brake Resistors & Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives............. B-1 B.1.1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors ............................B-4 B.2 No Fuse Circuit Breaker Chart .......................................................... B-7 B.3 Fuse Specification Chart ................................................................... B-8 B.4 AC Reactor........................................................................................ B-9 B.4.1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value.....................................B-9 B.4.2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value..................................B-9 B.4.3 Applications ..............................................................................B-10 B.5 Zero Phase Reactor (RF220X00A) ................................................. B-12 B.6 Remote Controller RC-01................................................................ B-13 B.7 PU06 ............................................................................................... B-14 B.7.1 Description of the Digital Keypad VFD-PU06 ...........................B-14 B.7.2 Explanation of Display Message...............................................B-14 B.7.3 Operation Flow Chart ...............................................................B-15 B.8 Fieldbus Modules ............................................................................ B-16
  • 9. B.8.1 DeviceNet Communication Module (CME-DN01) .....................B-16 B.8.1.1 Panel Appearance and Dimensions ..................................B-16 B.8.1.2 Wiring and Settings ...........................................................B-16 B.8.1.3 Power Supply....................................................................B-17 B.8.1.4 LEDs Display.....................................................................B-17 B.8.2 LonWorks Communication Module (CME-LW01) .....................B-17 B.8.2.1 Introduction .......................................................................B-17 B.8.2.2 Dimensions .......................................................................B-17 B.8.2.3 Specifications....................................................................B-18 B.8.2.4 Wiring................................................................................B-18 B.8.2.5 LED Indications.................................................................B-18 B.8.3 Profibus Communication Module (CME-PD01).........................B-19 B.8.3.1 Panel Appearance.............................................................B-19 B.8.3.2 Dimensions .......................................................................B-20 B.8.3.3 Parameters Settings in VFD-EL ........................................B-20 B.8.3.4 Power Supply....................................................................B-20 B.8.3.5 PROFIBUS Address..........................................................B-20 B.8.4 CME-COP01 (CANopen)..........................................................B-21 B.8.4.1 Product Profile...................................................................B-21 B.8.4.2 Specifications....................................................................B-21 B.8.4.3 Components......................................................................B-22 B.8.4.4 LED Indicator Explanation & Troubleshooting...................B-23 B.9 MKE-EP & DIN Rail .........................................................................B-25 B.9.1 MKE-EP....................................................................................B-25 B.9.2 DIN Rail: MKEL-DRA (Only for frame A)...................................B-26
  • 10. Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive.............................. C-1 C.1 Capacity Formulas ............................................................................ C-2 C.2 General Precaution ........................................................................... C-4 C.3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor....................................................... C-5
  • 12. Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 1-1 Chapter 1 Introduction The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate before installation. In order to retain the warranty coverage, the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used for an extended period of time. Storage conditions are: CAUTION! 1. Store in a clean and dry location free from direct sunlight or corrosive fumes. 2. Store within an ambient temperature range of -20 ° C to +60 ° C. 3. Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing environment. 4. Store within an air pressure range of 86 kPA to 106kPA. 5. DO NOT place on the ground directly. It should be stored properly. Moreover, if the surrounding environment is humid, you should put exsiccator in the package. 6. DO NOT store in an area with rapid changes in temperature. It may cause condensation and frost. 7. If the AC motor drive is stored for more than 3 months, the temperature should not be higher than 30 °C. Storage longer than one year is not recommended, it could result in the degradation of the electrolytic capacitors. 8. When the AC motor drive is not used for longer time after installation on building sites or places with humidity and dust, it’s best to move the AC motor drive to an environment as stated above.
  • 13. Chapter 1 Introduction| 1-2 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 1.1 Receiving and Inspection This VFD-EL AC motor drive has gone through rigorous quality control tests at the factory before shipment. After receiving the AC motor drive, please check for the following: Check to make sure that the package includes an AC motor drive, the User Manual/Quick Start and CD. Inspect the unit to assure it was not damaged during shipment. Make sure that the part number indicated on the nameplate corresponds with the part number of your order. 1.1.1 Nameplate Information Example for 1HP/0.75kW 3-phase 230V AC motor drive MODEL VFD007EL23A: INPUT :3PH 200-240V 50/60Hz 5.1A OUTPUT :3PH 0-240V 4.2A 1.6kVA 0.75kW/1HP FREQUENCY RANGE : 0.1~600Hz Serial Number & Bar Code AC Drive Model Input Spec. Output Spec. Output Frequency Range 007EL23A0T7140001 00.92Software Version 1.1.2 Model Explanation VFD A Version Type 23 Mains Input Voltage 11:115 phaseV 1- 21: phase230V 1- 23:230 phaseV 3- EL VFD-EL Series 007 Applicable motor capacity 004: 0.5 HP(0.4kW) 015: 2 HP(1.5kW) 022: 3 HP(2.2kW) Series Name ( ariable requency rive)V F D 43:460 phaseV 3- 002: 0.25 HP(0.2kW) 037: 5 HP(3.7kW) A: Standard drive
  • 14. Chapter 1 Introduction| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 1-3 1.1.3 Series Number Explanation 0170T007EL23A Production number Production year 2007 Production factory Production week T: Taoyuan, W: Wujiang Model 230V 3-phase 1HP(0.75kW) If the nameplate information does not correspond to your purchase order or if there are any problems, please contact your distributor. 1.1.4 Drive Frames and Appearances 0.25-2HP/0.2-1.5kW (Frame A) 1-5HP/0.75-3.7kW (Frame B) Input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) Digital keypad Output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3) Control board cover Input terminals cover (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) Case body Digital keypad Output terminals cover (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3) Control board cover
  • 15. Chapter 1 Introduction| 1-4 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Internal Structure Digital keypad ACI/AVI RS485 port (RJ-45) NPN/PNP RFI Jumper Location at the right side NOTE RFI jumper is near the input terminals as shown in the above figure and can be removed by taking off screws. Frame Power range Models A 0.25-2hp (0.2-1.5kW) VFD002EL11A/21A/23A, VFD004EL11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007EL21A/23A/43A, VFD015EL23A/43A B 1-5hp (0.75-3.7kW) VFD007EL11A, VFD015EL21A, VFD022EL21A/23A/43A, VFD037EL23A/43A
  • 16. Chapter 1 Introduction| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 1-5 RFI Jumper RFI Jumper: The AC motor drive may emit the electrical noise. The RFI jumper is used to suppress the interference (Radio Frequency Interference) on the power line. Main power isolated from earth: If the AC motor drive is supplied from an isolated power (IT power), the RFI jumper must be cut off. Then the RFI capacities (filter capacitors) will be disconnected from ground to prevent circuit damage (according to IEC 61800-3) and reduce earth leakage current. CAUTION! 1. After applying power to the AC motor drive, do not cut off the RFI jumper. Therefore, please make sure that main power has been switched off before cutting the RFI jumper. 2. The gap discharge may occur when the transient voltage is higher than 1,000V. Besides, electro-magnetic compatibility of the AC motor drives will be lower after cutting the RFI jumper. 3. Do NOT cut the RFI jumper when main power is connected to earth. 4. The RFI jumper cannot be cut when Hi-pot tests are performed. The mains power and motor must be separated if high voltage test is performed and the leakage currents are too high. 5. To prevent drive damage, the RFI jumper connected to ground shall be cut off if the AC motor drive is installed on an ungrounded power system or a high resistance-grounded (over 30 ohms) power system or a corner grounded TN system. 1.1.5 Remove Instructions 1.2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring Remove Front Cover Step 1 Step 2 Remove Fan
  • 17. Chapter 1 Introduction| 1-6 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 1.2.1 Ambient Conditions Install the AC motor drive in an environment with the following conditions: Air Temperature: -10 ~ +50°C (14 ~ 122°F) for UL & cUL -10 ~ +40°C (14 ~ 104°F) for side-by-side mounting Relative Humidity: <90%, no condensation allowed Atmosphere pressure: 86 ~ 106 kPa Installation Site Altitude: <1000m Operation Vibration: <20Hz: 9.80 m/s2 (1G) max 20 ~ 50Hz: 5.88 m/s2 (0.6G) max Temperature: -20°C ~ +60°C (-4°F ~ 140°F) Relative Humidity: <90%, no condensation allowed Atmosphere pressure: 86 ~ 106 kPa Storage Transportation Vibration: <20Hz: 9.80 m/s2 (1G) max 20 ~ 50Hz: 5.88 m/s2 (0.6G) max Pollution Degree 2: good for a factory type environment. Minimum Mounting Clearances Frame A Mounting Clearances Option 1 (-10 to +50°C) Option 2 (-10 to +40°C) Air flow 120mm 120mm 50mm 50mm 120mm 120mm 50mm 50mm Air Flow
  • 18. Chapter 1 Introduction| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 1-7 Frame B Mounting Clearances Option 1 (-10 to +50°C) Option 2 (-10 to +40°C) Air flow 150mm 150mm 50mm 50mm 150mm 150mm50mm 50mm Air Flow CAUTION! 1. Operating, storing or transporting the AC motor drive outside these conditions may cause damage to the AC motor drive. 2. Failure to observe these precautions may void the warranty! 3. Mount the AC motor drive vertically on a flat vertical surface object by screws. Other directions are not allowed. 4. The AC motor drive will generate heat during operation. Allow sufficient space around the unit for heat dissipation. 5. The heat sink temperature may rise to 90°C when running. The material on which the AC motor drive is mounted must be noncombustible and be able to withstand this high temperature. 6. When AC motor drive is installed in a confined space (e.g. cabinet), the surrounding temperature must be within 10 ~ 40°C with good ventilation. DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a space with bad ventilation. 7. Prevent fiber particles, scraps of paper, saw dust, metal particles, etc. from adhering to the heatsink. 8. When installing multiple AC more drives in the same cabinet, they should be adjacent in a row with enough space in-between. When installing one AC motor drive below another one, use a metal separation between the AC motor drives to prevent mutual heating.
  • 19. Chapter 1 Introduction| 1-8 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Installation with Metal Separation Installation without Metal Separation Air flow Frame A Frame B 120mm 120mm 120mm 120mm 150mm 150mm 150mm 150mm 120mm 120mm 150mm 150mm A B A B Frame A Frame B 1.2.2 DC-bus Sharing: Connecting the DC-bus of the AC Motor Drives in Parallel 1. This function is not for 115V models. 2. The AC motor drives can absorb mutual voltage that generated to DC bus when deceleration. 3. Enhance brake function and stabilize the voltage of the DC bus. 4. The brake module can be added to enhance brake function after connecting in parallel. 5. Only the same power system can be connected in parallel. 6. It is recommended to connect 5 AC motor drives in parallel (no limit in horsepower).
  • 20. Chapter 1 Introduction| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 1-9 Power 208/220/230/380/440/480 (depend on models) power should be applied at the same time (only the same power system can be connected in parallel) For frame A and B, terminal + (-) is connected to the terminal + (-) of the braking module. U V W U V W U V W U V W IM IM IM IM Braking modules 1.3 Dimensions (Dimensions are in millimeter and [inch]) D D W H H1 W1 Frame W W1 H H1 D Ø ØD A 72.0[2.83] 59.0[2.32] 174.0[6.86] 151.6[5.97] 136.0[5.36] 5.4[0.21] 2.7[0.11] B 100.0[3.94] 89.0[3.50] 174.0[6.86] 162.9[6.42] 136.0[5.36] 5.4[0.21] 2.7[0.11]
  • 21. Chapter 1 Introduction| 1-10 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 NOTE Frame A: VFD002EL11A/21A/23A, VFD004EL11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007EL21A/23A/43A, VFD015EL23A/43A Frame B: VFD007EL11A, VFD015EL21A, VFD022EL21A/23A/43A, VFD037EL23A/43A
  • 22. Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 2-1 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring After removing the front cover, check if the power and control terminals are clear. Be sure to observe the following precautions when wiring. General Wiring Information Applicable Codes All VFD-EL series are Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and Canadian Underwriters Laboratories (cUL) listed, and therefore comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC). Installation intended to meet the UL and cUL requirements must follow the instructions provided in “Wiring Notes” as a minimum standard. Follow all local codes that exceed UL and cUL requirements. Refer to the technical data label affixed to the AC motor drive and the motor nameplate for electrical data. The "Line Fuse Specification" in Appendix B, lists the recommended fuse part number for each VFD-EL Series part number. These fuses (or equivalent) must be used on all installations where compliance with U.L. standards is a required. CAUTION! 1. Make sure that power is only applied to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 terminals. Failure to comply may result in damage to the equipment. The voltage and current should lie within the range as indicated on the nameplate. 2. All the units must be grounded directly to a common ground terminal to prevent lightning strike or electric shock. 3. Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks which is made by the loose screws due to vibration. 4. Check following items after finishing the wiring: A. Are all connections correct? B. No loose wires? C. No short-circuits between terminals or to ground?
  • 23. Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| 2-2 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 DANGER! 1. A charge may still remain in the DC bus capacitors with hazardous voltages even if the power has been turned off. To prevent personal injury, please ensure that the power is turned off and wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels before opening the AC motor drive. 2. Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives is allowed to perform installation, wiring and commissioning. 3. Make sure that the power is off before doing any wiring to prevent electric shock. 2.1 Wiring Users must connect wires according to the circuit diagrams on the following pages. Do not plug a modem or telephone line to the RS-485 communication port or permanent damage may result. The pins 1 & 2 are the power supply for the optional copy keypad only and should not be used for RS-485 communication.
  • 24. Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 2-3 AVI/ACI ACM + +10V 5K 3 2 1 Figure 1 for models of VFD-EL Series VFD002EL11A/21A, VFD004EL11A/21A, VFD007EL11A/21A, VFD015EL21A, VFD022EL21A Power supply +10V/3mA Master Frequency 0- 10V 47K /4-20mA Analog S ignal Common E Main circuit (power) terminals Control circuit terminals Shielded l eads & Cable E R(L1) S(L2) Fuse/NFB(No Fuse B reaker) SA OFF ON MC MC RB RC Recommended Circuit when power suppl y is turned OFF by a fault output If the fault occurs, the contact will be ON to turn off the power and protect the power system. R(L1) S(L2) E Analog Multi-function Output Terminal Refer to chapter 2.4 for details. U(T1) V(T2) W(T3) IM 3~ AFM ACM RA RB RC Motor Analog S ignal common E E MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI6 MI5 DCM +24V FWD/Stop REV/Stop Multi-step 1 Multi-step 2 Multi-step 3 Multi-step 4 Digital Signal Common Factory setting AVI ACI Factory setting: AVI Mode - RS-485 Serial interface 1: Reserved 2: EV 5: SG+ 6: Reserved 7: Reserved 8: Reserved 3: GND 4: SG- 8 1 Sw1 NPN PNP Factory setting: NPN Mode Please refer to Figur e 3 for wiring of NPN mode and PNP mode. BUE brake unit (optional) BR brake resistor (optional) Multi-function contact output Refer to chapter 2.4 for details. Factory setting is malfunction indication Factory setting: output frequency Sw2
  • 25. Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| 2-4 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 AVI/ACI ACM + +10V 5K 3 2 1 Figure 2 for models of VFD-EL Series VFD002EL23A, VFD004EL23A/43A, VFD007EL23A/43A, VFD015EL23A/43A, VFD022EL23A/43A, VFD037EL23A/43A Power supply +10V/3mA Master Frequency 0-10V 47K /4-20mA Analog S ignal Common E Main circuit (power) terminals Control circuit terminals Shielded leads & Cable E R(L1) S(L2) Fuse/NFB(No Fuse B reaker) SA OFF ON MC MC RB RC Recommended Circuit when power supply is turned OFF by a fault output. If the fault occurs, the contact will be ON to turn off the power and protect the power system. R(L1) S(L2) E Analog Multi-function Output Terminal Refer to chapter 2.4 for details. U(T1) V(T2) W(T3) IM 3~ AFM ACM RA RB RC Motor Analog S ignal common E E MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI6 MI5 DCM +24V FWD/Stop REV/Stop Multi-step 1 Multi-step 2 Multi-step 3 Multi-step 4 Digital Signal Common Factory setting AVI ACI Factory setting: AVI Mode - RS-485 Serial interface 1: Reserved 2: EV 5: SG+ 6: Reserved 7: Reserved 8: 3: GND 4: SG- Reserved 8 1 NPN PNP Factory setting: NPN Mode Please refer to Figure 3 for wiring of NPN mode and P NP mode. BUE brake unit (optional) BR brake resi stor (optional) Multi-function contact output Refer to chapter 2.4 for details. Factory setting is malfunction indication Factory setting: output frequency T(L3)T(L3) Sw1 Sw2
  • 26. Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 2-5 Figure 3 Wiring for NPN mode and PNP mode A. NPN mode without external power Factory setting NPN PNP B. NPN mode with external power Factory setting NPN PNP 24 Vdc - + C. PNP mode without external power Sw1 Factory setting NPN PNP
  • 27. Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| 2-6 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 D. PNP mode with external power Sw1 Factory setting NPN PNP 24 Vdc - + CAUTION! 1. The wiring of main circuit and control circuit should be separated to prevent erroneous actions. 2. Please use shield wire for the control wiring and not to expose the peeled-off net in front of the terminal. 3. Please use the shield wire or tube for the power wiring and ground the two ends of the shield wire or tube. 4. Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits/equipment if it comes in contact with high voltage. 5. The AC motor drive, motor and wiring may cause interference. To prevent the equipment damage, please take care of the erroneous actions of the surrounding sensors and the equipment. 6. When the AC drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 are connected to the motor terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, respectively. To permanently reverse the direction of motor rotation, switch over any of the two motor leads. 7. With long motor cables, high capacitive switching current peaks can cause over-current, high leakage current or lower current readout accuracy. To prevent this, the motor cable should be less than 20m for 3.7kW models and below. And the cable should be less than 50m for 5.5kW models and above. For longer motor cables use an AC output reactor. 8. The AC motor drive, electric welding machine and the greater horsepower motor should be grounded separately. 9. Use ground leads that comply with local regulations and keep them as short as possible. 10. No brake resistor is built in the VFD-EL series, it can install brake resistor for those occasions that use higher load inertia or frequent start/stop. Refer to Appendix B for details. 11. Multiple VFD-EL units can be installed in one location. All the units should be grounded directly to a common ground terminal, as shown in the figure below. Ensure there are no ground loops.
  • 28. Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 2-7 Excellent Good Not allowed
  • 29. Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| 2-8 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 2.2 External Wiring Motor Output AC Line Reactor Power Supply Magnetic contactor Input AC Line Reactor EMI Filter R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 + Zero-phase Reactor Zero-phase Reactor FUSE/NFB - BR BUE Brakeresistor Brakunit Items Explanations Power supply Please follow the specific power supply requirements shown in Appendix A. Fuse/NFB (Optional) There may be an inrush current during power up. Please check the chart of Appendix B and select the correct fuse with rated current. Use of an NFB is optional. Magnetic contactor (Optional) Please do not use a Magnetic contactor as the I/O switch of the AC motor drive, as it will reduce the operating life cycle of the AC drive. Input AC Line Reactor (Optional) Used to improve the input power factor, to reduce harmonics and provide protection from AC line disturbances. (surges, switching spikes, short interruptions, etc.). AC line reactor should be installed when the power supply capacity is 500kVA or more or advanced capacity is activated. The wiring distance should be ≤ 10m. Refer to appendix B for details. Zero-phase Reactor (Ferrite Core Common Choke) (Optional) Zero phase reactors are used to reduce radio noise especially when audio equipment is installed near the inverter. Effective for noise reduction on both the input and output sides. Attenuation quality is good for a wide range from AM band to 10MHz. Appendix B specifies the zero phase reactor. (RF220X00A) EMI filter It is used to reduce electromagnetic interference. All 230V and 460V models are built-in EMI filter. Brake Resistor and Brake Unit (Optional) Used to reduce the deceleration time of the motor. Please refer to the chart in Appendix B for specific Brake Resistors. Output AC Line Reactor (Optional) Motor surge voltage amplitude depends on motor cable length. For applications with long motor cable (>20m), it is necessary to install a reactor at the inverter output side
  • 30. Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 2-9 2.3 Main Circuit 2.3.1 Main Circuit Connection R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) R S T U(T1) V(T2) W(T3) IM 3~ MC E E + - No fuse breaker (NFB) Brake Resistor(Optional) Motor BUE BR Brake Unit (Optional) Terminal Symbol Explanation of Terminal Function R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 AC line input terminals (1-phase/3-phase) U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 AC drive output terminals for connecting 3-phase induction motor +, - Connections for External Brake unit (BUE series) Earth connection, please comply with local regulations. CAUTION! Mains power terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) Connect these terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) via a non-fuse breaker or earth leakage breaker to 3-phase AC power (some models to 1-phase AC power) for circuit protection. It is unnecessary to consider phase-sequence. It is recommended to add a magnetic contactor (MC) in the power input wiring to cut off power quickly and reduce malfunction when activating the protection function of AC motor drives. Both ends of the MC should have an R-C surge absorber. Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks which is made by the loose screws due to vibration.
  • 31. Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| 2-10 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Please use voltage and current within the regulation shown in Appendix A. When using a GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter), select a current sensor with sensitivity of 200mA, and not less than 0.1-second detection time to avoid nuisance tripping. For specific GFCI of the AC motor drive, please select a current sensor with sensitivity of 30mA or above. Do NOT run/stop AC motor drives by turning the power ON/OFF. Run/stop AC motor drives by RUN/STOP command via control terminals or keypad. If you still need to run/stop AC drives by turning power ON/OFF, it is recommended to do so only ONCE per hour. Do NOT connect 3-phase models to a 1-phase power source. Output terminals for main circuit (U, V, W) The factory setting of the operation direction is forward running. The method to control the operation direction is to set by the communication parameters. Please refer to the group 9 for details. When it needs to install the filter at the output side of terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 on the AC motor drive. Please use inductance filter. Do not use phase-compensation capacitors or L-C (Inductance-Capacitance) or R-C (Resistance-Capacitance), unless approved by Delta. DO NOT connect phase-compensation capacitors or surge absorbers at the output terminals of AC motor drives. Use well-insulated motor, suitable for inverter operation. Terminals [+, -] for connecting brake resistor All VFD-EL series don’t have a built-in brake chopper. Please connect an external optional brake unit (BUE-series) and brake resistor. Refer to BUE series user manual for details. When not used, please leave the terminals [+, -] open.
  • 32. Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 2-11 2.3.2 Main Circuit Terminals Frame A Frame B Frame Power Terminals Torque Wire Wire type R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 A U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, 14.2-16.3kgf-cm (12-14in-lbf) 12-18 AWG. (3.3-0.8mm2 ) Copper only, 75o C R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3B +, -, 16.3-19.3kgf-cm (14-17in-lbf) 8-18 AWG. (8.4- 0.8mm2 ) Copper only, 75o C NOTE Frame A: VFD002EL11A/21A/23A, VFD004EL11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007EL21A/23A/43A, VFD015EL23A/43A Frame B: VFD007EL11A, VFD015EL21A, VFD022EL21A/23A/43A, VFD037EL23A/43A
  • 33. Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| 2-12 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 2.4 Control Terminals Circuit diagram for digital inputs (NPN current 16mA.) +24V DCM NPN Mode 1 3 4 2 2 1 +24V DCM PNP Mode 1 3 4 2 2 1 The position of the control terminals RS-485 10VMI1 MI3 MI524V AVI RA RB RC MI2 MI4 MI6 DCM ACMAFM Terminal symbols and functions Terminal Symbol Terminal Function Factory Settings (NPN mode) ON: Connect to DCM MI1 Forward-Stop command ON: Run in MI1 direction OFF: Stop acc. to Stop Method MI2 Reverse-Stop command ON: Run in MI2 direction OFF: Stop acc. to Stop Method MI3 Multi-function Input 3 MI4 Multi-function Input 4 Refer to Pr.04.05 to Pr.04.08 for programming the Multi-function Inputs.
  • 34. Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 2-13 Terminal Symbol Terminal Function Factory Settings (NPN mode) ON: Connect to DCM MI5 Multi-function Input 5 MI6 Multi-function Input 6 ON: the activation current is 5.5mA. OFF: leakage current tolerance is 10μA. +24V DC Voltage Source +24VDC, 50mA used for PNP mode. DCM Digital Signal Common Common for digital inputs and used for NPN mode. RA Multi-function Relay output (N.O.) a RB Multi-function Relay output (N.C.) b RC Multi-function Relay common Resistive Load: 5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 240VAC 5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 24VDC Inductive Load: 1.5A(N.O.)/0.5A(N.C.) 240VAC 1.5A(N.O.)/0.5A(N.C.) 24VDC Refer to Pr.03.00 for programming +10V Potentiometer power supply +10VDC 3mA AVI Analog voltage Input ACM AVI +10V internal circuit AVI circuit Impedance: 47kΩ Resolution: 10 bits Range: 0 ~ 10VDC/4~20mA = 0 ~ Max. Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) Selection: Pr.02.00, Pr.02.09, Pr.10.00 Set-up: Pr.04.14 ~ Pr.04.17 ACM Analog control signal (common) Common for AVI= and AFM AFM Analog output meter AFM ACM 0~10V Max. 2mA potentiometer ACM circuit internal circuit 0 to 10V, 2mA Impedance: 47Ω Output current 2mA max Resolution: 8 bits Range: 0 ~ 10VDC Function: Pr.03.03 to Pr.03.04 NOTE The voltage output type for this analog signal is PWM. It needs to read value by the movable coil meter and is not suitable for A/D signal conversion. NOTE: Control signal wiring size: 18 AWG (0.75 mm2 ) with shielded wire.
  • 35. Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| 2-14 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Analog inputs (AVI, ACM) Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise. Use shielded wiring and keep it as short as possible (<20m) with proper grounding. If the noise is inductive, connecting the shield to terminal ACM can bring improvement. If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive, please connect a capacitor (0.1 μ F and above) and ferrite core as indicated in the following diagrams: C AVI ACM ferrite core wind each wires 3 times or more around the core Digital inputs (MI1~MI6, DCM) When using contacts or switches to control the digital inputs, please use high quality components to avoid contact bounce. General Keep control wiring as far away as possible from the power wiring and in separate conduits to avoid interference. If necessary let them cross only at 90º angle. The AC motor drive control wiring should be properly installed and not touch any live power wiring or terminals. NOTE If a filter is required for reducing EMI (Electro Magnetic Interference), install it as close as possible to AC drive. EMI can also be reduced by lowering the Carrier Frequency. DANGER! Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits/equipment if it comes in contact with high voltage.
  • 36. Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 2-15 The specification for the control terminals The position of the control terminals RS-485 10VMI1 MI3 MI524V AVI RA RB RC MI2 MI4 MI6 DCM ACMAFM Frame Torque Wire A, B 5.1-8.1kgf-cm (4.4-7in-lbf) 16-24 AWG. (1.3-0.2mm2 ) NOTE Frame A: VFD002EL11A/21A/23A, VFD004EL11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007EL21A/23A/43A, VFD015EL23A/43A Frame B: VFD007EL11A, VFD015EL21A, VFD022EL21A/23A/43A, VFD037EL23A/43A
  • 37. Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| 2-16 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 This page intentionally left blank
  • 38. Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 3-1 Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up 3.1 Description of the Digital Keypad LED Display Indicates frequency, voltage, current, user defined units and etc. Status Display Display the driver's current status. STOP/RESET Stops AC drive operation and reset the drive after fault occurred. RUN Key Start AC drive operation. MODE Change between different display mode. UP and DOWN Key Set the parameter number and changes the numerical data, such as Master Frequency. Potentiometer For master Frequency setting. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 5 6 7 There are four LEDs on the keypad: LED STOP: It will light up when the motor is stop. LED RUN: It will light up when the motor is running. LED FWD: It will light up when the motor is forward running. LED REV: It will light up when the motor is reverse running.
  • 39. Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up| 3-2 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Display Message Descriptions Displays the AC drive Master Frequency. Displays the actual output frequency at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. User defined unit (where U = F x Pr.00.05) Displays the output current at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. Displays the AC motor drive forward run status. Displays the AC motor drive reverse run status. The counter value (C). Displays the selected parameter. Displays the actual stored value of the selected parameter. External Fault. Display “End” for approximately 1 second if input has been accepted. After a parameter value has been set, the new value is automatically stored in memory. To modify an entry, use the and keys. Display “Err”, if the input is invalid.
  • 40. Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 3-3 3.2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad To shift data Setting direction Setting Mode Setting parameters Success to set parameter. Input data error NOTE:In the parameter setting mode, you can press to return the selecting mode. (When operation source is digital keypad) START GO START MODE MODE MODE MODE MODE NOTE: In the selection mode, press to set the parameters.MODE or ENTER ENTER ENTER MODE or MODE MODE MODE MODE
  • 41. Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up| 3-4 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 3.3 Reference Table for the 7-segment LED Display of the Digital Keypad Digit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 LED Display English alphabet A b Cc d E F G Hh Ii Jj LED Display English alphabet K L n Oo P q r S Tt U LED Display English alphabet v Y Z LED Display 3.4 Operation Method The operation method can be set via communication, control terminals and digital keypad.
  • 42. Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 3-5 3.5 Trial Run You can perform a trial run by using digital keypad with the following steps. by following steps 1. Setting frequency to F5.0 by pressing . 2. If you want to change direction from forward running to reverse running: 1. press MODE key to find FWD. 2. press UP/DOWN key to REV to finish changing direction. Operation Method Frequency Source Operation Command Source Operate from the communication When setting communication by the PC, it needs to use VFD-USB01 or IFD8500 converter to connect to the PC. Refer to the communication address 2000H and 2101H setting for details. * Don't apply the mains voltage directly to above terminals. E MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI6 MI5 DCM +24V FWD/Stop REV/Stop Multi-step 1 Multi-step 2 Multi-step 3 Multi-step 4 Digital Signal Common Factory settingSw1 NPN PNP Factory setting: NPN Mode AVI ACI/AVI ACM +10V 5K 3 2 1 Power supply +10V 3mA Master Frequency 0 to 10V 47K Analog Signal Common E Sw2 AVI ACI Factory setting: ACI Mode 4-20mA/0-10V Operate from external signal MI3-DCM (Set Pr.04.05=10) MI4-DCM (Set Pr.04.06=11) External terminals input: MI1-DCM (set to FWD/STOP) MI2-DCM (set to REV/STOP) Operate from the digital keypad
  • 43. Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up| 3-6 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 1. After applying the power, verify that LED display shows F 60.0Hz. 2. Press key to set frequency to around 5Hz. 3. Press key for forward running. And if you want to change to reverse running, you should press . And if you want to decelerate to stop, please press key. 4. Check following items: Check if the motor direction of rotation is correct. Check if the motor runs steadily without abnormal noise and vibration. Check if acceleration and deceleration are smooth. RUN If the results of trial run are normal, please start the formal run. NOTE 1. Stop running immediately if any fault occurs and refer to the troubleshooting guide for solving the problem. 2. Do NOT touch output terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 when power is still applied to R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 even when the AC motor drive has stopped. The DC-link capacitors may still be charged to hazardous voltage levels, even if the power has been turned off. 3. To avoid damage to components, do not touch them or the circuit boards with metal objects or your bare hands.
  • 44. Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-1 Chapter 4 Parameters The VFD-EL parameters are divided into 11 groups by property for easy setting. In most applications, the user can finish all parameter settings before start-up without the need for re-adjustment during operation. The 11 groups are as follows: Group 0: User Parameters Group 1: Basic Parameters Group 2: Operation Method Parameters Group 3: Output Function Parameters Group 4: Input Function Parameters Group 5: Multi-Step Speed Parameters Group 6: Protection Parameters Group 7: Motor Parameters Group 8: Special Parameters Group 9: Communication Parameters Group 10: PID Control Parameters
  • 45. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-2 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4.1 Summary of Parameter Settings : The parameter can be set during operation. Group 0 User Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 00.00 Identity Code of the AC motor drive Read-only ## 00.01 Rated Current Display of the AC motor drive Read-only #.# 0: Parameter can be read/written 1: All parameters are read only 8: Keypad lock 9: All parameters are reset to factory settings (50Hz, 230V/400V or 220V/380V depends on Pr.00.12) 00.02 Parameter Reset 10: All parameters are reset to factory settings (60Hz, 220V/440V) 0 0: Display the frequency command value (Fxxx) 1: Display the actual output frequency (Hxxx) 2: Display the content of user-defined unit (Uxxx) 3: Multifunction display, see Pr.00.04 00.03 Start-up Display Selection 4: FWD/REV command 0 0: Display the content of user-defined unit (Uxxx) 1: Display the counter value (c) 2: Display the status of multi-function input terminals (d) 3: Display DC-BUS voltage (u) 4: Display output voltage (E) 5: Display PID analog feedback signal value (b) (%) 00.04 Content of Multi- function Display 6: Output power factor angle (n) 0
  • 46. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-3 Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 7: Display output power (P) 8: Display PID setting and feedback signal 9: Display AVI (I) (V) 10: Display ACI (i) (mA) 11: Display the temperature of IGBT (h) (°C) 00.05 User-Defined Coefficient K 0. 1 to 160.0 1.0 00.06 Software Version Read-only #.## 00.07 Reserved 00.08 Password Input 0 to 9999 0 00.09 Password Set 0 to 9999 0 00.10 Reserved 00.11 Reserved 00.12 50Hz Base Voltage Selection 0: 230V/400V 1: 220V/380V 0 00.13 User-defined Value 1 (correspond to max. frequency) 0 to 9999 0 00.14 Position of Decimal Point of User- defined Value 1 0 to 3 0 Group 1 Basic Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 01.00 Maximum Output Frequency (Fmax) 50.00 to 600.0 Hz 60.00 01.01 Maximum Voltage Frequency (Fbase) 0.10 to 600.0 Hz 60.00 115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V 220.0 01.02 Maximum Output Voltage (Vmax) 460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V 440.0 01.03 Mid-Point Frequency (Fmid) 0.10 to 600.0 Hz 1.50
  • 47. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-4 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V 10.0 01.04 Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid) 460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V 20.0 01.05 Minimum Output Frequency (Fmin) 0.10 to 600.0 Hz 1.50 115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V 10.0 01.06 Minimum Output Voltage (Vmin) 460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V 20.0 01.07 Output Frequency Upper Limit 0.1 to 120.0% 110.0 01.08 Output Frequency Lower Limit 0.0 to100.0 % 0.0 01.09 Accel Time 1 0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec 10.0 01.10 Decel Time 1 0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec 10.0 01.11 Accel Time 2 0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec 10.0 01.12 Decel Time 2 0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec 10.0 01.13 Jog Acceleration Time 0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec 1.0 01.14 Jog Deceleration Time 0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec 1.0 01.15 Jog Frequency 0.10 Hz to Fmax (Pr.01.00) Hz 6.00 0: Linear Accel/Decel 1: Auto Accel, Linear Decel 2: Linear Accel, Auto Decel 3: Auto Accel/Decel (Set by load) 01.16 Auto acceleration / deceleration (refer to Accel/Decel time setting) 4: Auto Accel/Decel (set by Accel/Decel Time setting) 0 01.17 Acceleration S- Curve 0.0 to 10.0 / 0.00 to 10.00 sec 0.0 01.18 Deceleration S- Curve 0.0 to 10.0 / 0.00 to 10.00 sec 0.0 0: Unit: 0.1 sec 01.19 Accel/Decel Time Unit 1: Unit: 0.01 sec 0
  • 48. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-5 Group 2 Operation Method Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 02.00 Source of First Master Frequency Command 0: Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys or Multi- function Inputs UP/DOWN. Last used frequency saved. 1: 0 to +10V from AVI 2: 4 to 20mA from ACI 3: RS-485 (RJ-45) communication 4: Digital keypad potentiometer 1 0: Digital keypad 1: External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled. 2: External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled. 3: RS-485 (RJ-45) communication. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled. 02.01 Source of First Operation Command 4: RS-485 (RJ-45) communication. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled. 1 0: STOP: ramp to stop; E.F.: coast to stop 1: STOP: coast to stop; E.F.: coast to stop 2: STOP: ramp to stop; E.F.: ramp to stop 02.02 Stop Method 3: STOP: coast to stop; E.F.: ramp to stop 0 02.03 PWM Carrier Frequency Selections 2 to 12kHz 8 0: Enable forward/reverse operation 1: Disable reverse operation02.04 Motor Direction Control 2: Disabled forward operation 0 0: Disable. Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed. 1: Enable. Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed. 02.05 Line Start Lockout 2: Disable. Operation status will change if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed. 1
  • 49. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-6 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 3: Enable. Operation status will change if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed. 0: Decelerate to 0 Hz 1: Coast to stop and display “AErr” 02.06 Loss of ACI Signal (4-20mA) 2: Continue operation by last frequency command 1 0: by UP/DOWN Key 1: Based on accel/decel time 2: Constant speed (Pr.02.08) 02.07 Up/Down Mode 3: Pulse input unit (Pr.02.08) 0 02.08 Accel/Decel Rate of Change of UP/DOWN Operation with Constant Speed 0.01~10.00 Hz 0.01 02.09 Source of Second Frequency Command 0: Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys or Multi- function Inputs UP/DOWN. Last used frequency saved. 1: 0 to +10V from AVI 2: 4 to 20mA from ACI 3: RS-485 (RJ-45) communication 4: Digital keypad potentiometer 0 02.10 Combination of the First and Second Master Frequency Command 0: First Master Frequency Command 1: First Master Frequency Command+ Second Master Frequency Command 2: First Master Frequency Command - Second Master Frequency Command 0 02.11 Keypad Frequency Command 0.00 to 600.0Hz 60.00 02.12 Communication Frequency Command 0.00 to 600.0Hz 60.00 0: Save Keypad & Communication Frequency 1: Save Keypad Frequency only02.13 The Selections for Saving Keypad or Communication Frequency Command 2: Save Communication Frequency only 0
  • 50. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-7 Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 0: by Current Freq Command 1: by Zero Freq Command02.14 Initial Frequency Selection (for keypad & RS485) 2: by Frequency Display at Stop 0 02.15 Initial Frequency Setpoint (for keypad & RS485) 0.00 ~ 600.0Hz 60.00 02.16 Display the Master Freq Command Source Read Only Bit0=1: by First Freq Source (Pr.02.00) Bit1=1: by Second Freq Source (Pr.02.09) Bit2=1: by Multi-input function ## 02.17 Display the Operation Command Source Read Only Bit0=1: by Digital Keypad Bit1=1: by RS485 communication Bit2=1: by External Terminal 2/3 wire mode Bit3=1: by Multi-input function ## 02.18 User-defined Value 2 Setting 0 to Pr.00.13 0 02.19 User-defined Value 2 0 to 9999 ## Group 3 Output Function Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 0: No function 1: AC drive operational 2: Master frequency attained 3: Zero speed 4: Over torque detection 5: Base-Block (B.B.) indication 6: Low-voltage indication 7: Operation mode indication 8: Fault indication 9: Desired frequency attained 03.00 Multi-function Output Relay (RA1, RB1, RC1) 10: Terminal count value attained 8
  • 51. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-8 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 11: Preliminary count value attained 12: Over Voltage Stall supervision 13: Over Current Stall supervision 14: Heat sink overheat warning 15: Over Voltage supervision 16: PID supervision 17: Forward command 18: Reverse command 19: Zero speed output signal 20: Warning(FbE,Cexx, AoL2, AUE, SAvE) 21: Brake control (Desired frequency attained) 22: AC motor drive ready 03.01 Reserved 03.02 Desired Frequency Attained 0.00 to 600.0Hz 0.00 0: Analog frequency meter 03.03 Analog Output Signal Selection (AFM) 1: Analog current meter 0 03.04 Analog Output Gain 1 to 200% 100 03.05 Terminal Count Value 0 to 9999 0 03.06 Preliminary Count Value 0 to 9999 0 0: Terminal count value attained, no EF display03.07 EF Active When Terminal Count Value Attained 1: Terminal count value attained, EF active 0 0: Fan always ON 1: 1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF 2: Fan ON when AC motor drive runs, fan OFF when AC motor drive stops 03.08 Fan Control 3: Fan ON when preliminary heatsink temperature attained 0 03.09 Reserved
  • 52. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-9 Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 03.10 Reserved 03.11 Brake Release Frequency 0.00 to 20.00Hz 0.00 03.12 Brake Engage Frequency 0.00 to 20.00Hz 0.00 03.13 Display the Status of Relay Read only ## Group 4 Input Function Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 04.00 Keypad Potentiometer Bias 0.0 to 100.0 % 0.0 04.01 Keypad Potentiometer Bias Polarity 0: Positive bias 1: Negative bias 00 04.02 Keypad Potentiometer Gain 0.1 to 200.0 % 100.0 0: No negative bias command 04.03 Keypad Potentiometer Negative Bias, Reverse Motion Enable/Disable 1: Negative bias: REV motion enabled 0 0: 2-wire: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP 1: 2-wire: FWD/REV, RUN/STOP 04.04 2-wire/3-wire Operation Control Modes 2: 3-wire operation 0 0: No function 1 1: Multi-Step speed command 1 04.05 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI3) 2: Multi-Step speed command 2 3: Multi-Step speed command 3 2 4: Multi-Step speed command 4 04.06 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI4) 5: External reset 6: Accel/Decel inhibit 3 7: Accel/Decel time selection command 04.07 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI5) 8: Jog Operation
  • 53. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-10 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 9: External base block 4 10: Up: Increment master frequency 04.08 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI6) 11: Down: Decrement master frequency 12: Counter Trigger Signal 13: Counter reset 14: E.F. External Fault Input 15: PID function disabled 16: Output shutoff stop 17: Parameter lock enable 18: Operation command selection (external terminals) 19: Operation command selection(keypad) 20: Operation command selection(communication) 21: FWD/REV command 22: Source of second frequency command 04.09 Multi-function Input Contact Selection Bit0:MI1 Bit1:MI2 Bit2:MI3 Bit3:MI4 Bit4:MI5 Bit5:MI6 0:N.O., 1:N.C. P.S.:MI1 to MI3 will be invalid when it is 3- wire control. 0 04.10 Digital Terminal Input Debouncing Time 1 to 20 (*2ms) 1 04.11 Min AVI Voltage 0.0 to 10.0V 0.0 04.12 Min AVI Frequency 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0 04.13 Max AVI Voltage 0.0 to 10.0V 10.0 04.14 Max AVI Frequency 0.0 to 100.0% 100.0
  • 54. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-11 Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 04.15 Min ACI Current 0.0 to 20.0mA 4.0 04.16 Min ACI Frequency 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0 04.17 Max ACI Current 0.0 to 20.0mA 20.0 04.18 Max ACI Frequency 0.0 to 100.0% 100.0 04.19 | 04.25 Reserved Read only. Bit0: MI1 Status Bit1: MI2 Status Bit2: MI3 Status Bit3: MI4 Status Bit4: MI5 Status 04.26 Display the Status of Multi-function Input Terminal Bit5: MI6 Status ## 04.27 Internal/External Multi-function Input Terminals Selection 0~4095 0 04.28 Internal Terminal Status 0~4095 0 Group 5 Multi-Step Speed Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 05.00 1st Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.01 2nd Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.02 3rd Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.03 4th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.04 5th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00
  • 55. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-12 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 05.05 6th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.06 7th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.07 8th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.08 9th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.09 10th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.10 11th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.11 12th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.12 13th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.13 14th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.14 15th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 Group 6 Protection Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 115/230V series: 330.0V to 410.0V 390.0V 460V series: 660.0V to 820.0V 780.0V06.00 Over-Voltage Stall Prevention 0.0: Disable over-voltage stall prevention 06.01 Over-Current Stall Prevention during Accel 0:Disable 20 to 250% 170 06.02 Over-Current Stall Prevention during Operation 0:Disable 20 to 250% 170 0: Disabled06.03 Over-Torque Detection Mode (OL2) 1: Enabled during constant speed operation. After the over-torque is detected, keep running until OL1 or OL occurs. 0
  • 56. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-13 Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 2: Enabled during constant speed operation. After the over-torque is detected, stop running. 3: Enabled during accel. After the over-torque is detected, keep running until OL1 or OL occurs. 4: Enabled during accel. After the over-torque is detected, stop running. 06.04 Over-Torque Detection Level 10 to 200% 150 06.05 Over-Torque Detection Time 0.1 to 60.0 sec 0.1 0: Standard motor (self cooled by fan) 1: Special motor (forced external cooling)06.06 Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Selection 2: Disabled 2 06.07 Electronic Thermal Characteristic 30 to 600 sec 60 0: No fault 1: Over current (oc) 2: Over voltage (ov) 3: IGBT Overheat (oH1) 06.08 Present Fault Record 4: Reserved 5: Overload (oL) 6: Overload1 (oL1) 7: Motor over load (oL2) 8: External fault (EF) 9: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel.(ocA) 06.09 Second Most Recent Fault Record 10: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel.(ocd) 11: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation (ocn) 12: Ground fault (GFF) 13: Reserved 0
  • 57. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-14 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 14: Phase-Loss (PHL) 15: Reserved 16: Auto Acel/Decel failure (CFA) 17: SW/Password protection (codE) 18: Power Board CPU WRITE failure (cF1.0) 19: Power Board CPU READ failure (cF2.0) 06.10 Third Most Recent Fault Record 20: CC, OC Hardware protection failure (HPF1) 21: OV Hardware protection failure (HPF2) 22: GFF Hardware protection failure (HPF3) 06.11 Fourth Most Recent Fault Record 23: OC Hardware protection failure (HPF4) 24: U-phase error (cF3.0) 25: V-phase error (cF3.1) 06.12 Fifth Most Recent Fault Record 26: W-phase error (cF3.2) 27: DCBUS error (cF3.3) 28: IGBT Overheat (cF3.4) 29: Reserved 30: Reserved 31: Reserved 32: ACI signal error (AErr) 33: Reserved 34: Motor PTC overheat protection (PtC1) 35-40: Reserved Group 7 Motor Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 07.00 Motor Rated Current 30 %FLA to 120% FLA FLA 07.01 Motor No-Load Current 0%FLA to 99% FLA 0.4*FLA
  • 58. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-15 Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 07.02 Torque Compensation 0.0 to 10.0 0.0 07.03 Slip Compensation 0.00 to 10.00 0.00 07.04 | 07.09 Reserved 07.10 Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Min.) 0 to 1439 Min. 0 07.11 Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Day) 0 to 65535 Day 0 07.12 Motor PTC Overheat Protection 0: Disable 1: Enable 0 07.13 Input Debouncing Time of the PTC Protection 0~9999(*2ms) 100 07.14 Motor PTC Overheat Protection Level 0.1~10.0V 2.4 07.15 Motor PTC Overheat Warning Level 0.1~10.0V 1.2 07.16 Motor PTC Overheat Reset Delta Level 0.1~5.0V 0.6 07.17 Treatment of the Motor PTC Overheat 0: Warn and RAMP to stop 1: Warn and COAST to stop 2: Warn and keep running 0 Group 8 Special Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 08.00 DC Brake Current Level 0 to 100% 0 08.01 DC Brake Time during Start-Up 0.0 to 60.0 sec 0.0
  • 59. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-16 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 08.02 DC Brake Time during Stopping 0.0 to 60.0 sec 0.0 08.03 Start-Point for DC Brake 0.00 to 600.0Hz 0.00 0: Operation stops after momentary power loss 1: Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the Master Frequency reference value 08.04 Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection 2: Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the minimum frequency 0 08.05 Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time 0.1 to 5.0 sec 2.0 08.06 Base-block Speed Search 0: Disable speed search 1: Speed search starts with last frequency command 2: Starts with minimum output frequency 1 08.07 B.B. Time for Speed Search 0.1 to 5.0 sec 0.5 08.08 Current Limit for Speed Search 30 to 200% 150 08.09 Skip Frequency 1 Upper Limit 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 08.10 Skip Frequency 1 Lower Limit 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 08.11 Skip Frequency 2 Upper Limit 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 08.12 Skip Frequency 2 Lower Limit 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 08.13 Skip Frequency 3 Upper Limit 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 08.14 Skip Frequency 3 Lower Limit 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 08.15 Auto Restart After Fault 0 to 10 (0=disable) 0 08.16 Auto Reset Time at Restart after Fault 0.1 to 6000 sec 60.0
  • 60. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-17 Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 0: Disable 08.17 Auto Energy Saving 1: Enable 0 0: AVR function enable 1: AVR function disable 2: AVR function disable for decel. 08.18 AVR Function 3: AVR function disable for stop 0 08.19 Reserved 08.20 Compensation Coefficient for Motor Instability 0.0~5.0 0.0 Group 9 Communication Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 09.00 Communication Address 1 to 254 1 0: Baud rate 4800bps 1: Baud rate 9600bps 2: Baud rate 19200bps 09.01 Transmission Speed 3: Baud rate 38400bps 1 0: Warn and keep operating 1: Warn and ramp to stop 2: Warn and coast to stop 09.02 Transmission Fault Treatment 3: No warning and keep operating 3 09.03 Time-out Detection 0.1 ~ 120.0 seconds 0.0: Disable 0.0 0: 7,N,2 (Modbus, ASCII) 1: 7,E,1 (Modbus, ASCII) 2: 7,O,1 (Modbus, ASCII) 09.04 Communication Protocol 3: 8,N,2 (Modbus, RTU) 0
  • 61. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-18 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 4: 8,E,1 (Modbus, RTU) 5: 8,O,1 (Modbus, RTU) 6: 8,N,1 (Modbus, RTU) 7: 8,E,2 (Modbus, RTU) 8: 8,O,2 (Modbus, RTU) 9: 7,N,1 (Modbus, ASCII) 10: 7,E,2 (Modbus, ASCII) 11: 7,O,2 (Modbus, ASCII) 09.05 Reserved 09.06 Reserved 09.07 Response Delay Time 0 ~ 200 (unit: 2ms) 1 Group 10 PID Control Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 0: Disable PID operation 1: Keypad (based on Pr.02.00) 2: 0 to +10V from AVI 3: 4 to 20mA from ACI 10.00 PID Set Point Selection 4: PID set point (Pr.10.11) 0 10.01 Input Terminal for PID Feedback 0: Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI (0 ~ +10VDC) 1: Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI (0 ~ +10VDC) 2: Positive PID feedback from external terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA) 3: Negative PID feedback from external terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA) 0 10.02 Proportional Gain (P) 0.0 to 10.0 1.0 10.03 Integral Time (I) 0.00 to 100.0 sec (0.00=disable) 1.00
  • 62. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-19 Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 10.04 Derivative Control (D) 0.00 to 1.00 sec 0.00 10.05 Upper Bound for Integral Control 0 to 100% 100 10.06 Primary Delay Filter Time 0.0 to 2.5 sec 0.0 10.07 PID Output Freq Limit 0 to 110% 100 10.08 PID Feedback Signal Detection Time 0.0 to 3600 sec (0.0 disable) 60.0 0: Warn and RAMP to stop 1: Warn and COAST to stop10.09 Treatment of the Erroneous PID Feedback Signals 2: Warn and keep operation 0 10.10 Gain Over the PID Detection Value 0.0 to 10.0 1.0 10.11 Source of PID Set point 0.00 to 600.0Hz 0.00 10.12 PID Feedback Level 1.0 to 50.0% 10.0 10.13 Detection Time of PID Feedback 0.1 to 300.0 sec 5.0 10.14 Sleep/Wake Up Detection Time 0.0 to 6550 sec 0.0 10.15 Sleep Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 10.16 Wakeup Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 0: By PID control 10.17 Minimum PID Output Frequency Selection 1: By minimum output frequency (Pr.01.05) 0 10.18 PID Control Detection Signal Reference 1.0 to 99.9 99.9 10.19 PID Calculation Mode Selection 0: Series mode 1: Parallel mode 0
  • 63. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-20 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 10.20 Treatment of the Erroneous PID Feedback Level 0: Keep operating 1: Coast to stop 2: Ramp to stop 3: Ramp to stop and restart after time set in Pr.10.21 0 10.21 Restart Delay Time after Erroneous PID Deviation Level 1 to 9999 sec 60 10.22 Set Point Deviation Level 0 to 100% 0 10.23 Detection Time of Set Point Deviation Level 0 to 9999 sec 10 10.24 Offset Level of Liquid Leakage 0 to 50% 0 10.25 Liquid Leakage Change Detection 0 to 100% (0: disable) 0 10.26 Time Setting for Liquid Leakage Change 0.1 to 10.0 sec (0: disable) 0.5 10.27 | 10.33 Reserved
  • 64. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-21 4.2 Parameter Settings for Applications Speed Search Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters Windmill, winding machine, fan and all inertia loads Restart free- running motor Before the free-running motor is completely stopped, it can be restarted without detection of motor speed. The AC motor drive will auto search motor speed and will accelerate when its speed is the same as the motor speed. 08.04~08.08 DC Brake before Running Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters When e.g. windmills, fans and pumps rotate freely by wind or flow without applying power Keep the free- running motor at standstill. If the running direction of the free- running motor is not steady, please execute DC brake before start-up. 08.00 08.01 Energy Saving Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters Punching machines fans, pumps and precision machinery Energy saving and less vibrations Energy saving when the AC motor drive runs at constant speed, yet full power acceleration and deceleration For precision machinery it also helps to lower vibrations. 08.17 Multi-step Operation Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters Conveying machinery Cyclic operation by multi-step speeds. To control 15-step speeds and duration by simple contact signals. 04.05~04.08 05.00~05.14 Switching acceleration and deceleration times Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters Auto turntable for conveying machinery Switching acceleration and deceleration times by external signal When an AC motor drive drives two or more motors, it can reach high-speed but still start and stop smoothly. 01.09~01.12 04.05~04.08
  • 65. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-22 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Overheat Warning Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters Air conditioner Safety measure When AC motor drive overheats, it uses a thermal sensor to have overheat warning. 03.00 04.05~04.08 Two-wire/three-wire Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters General application To run, stop, forward and reverse by external terminals VFD-EL MI1:("OPEN":STOP) ("CLOSE":FWD) MI2:("OPEN": STOP) ("CLOSE": REV) DCM FWD/STOP REV/STOP MI1:("OPEN":STOP) ("CLOSE":RUN) MI2:("OPEN": FWD) ("CLOSE": REV) DCM RUN/STOP FWD/REV VFD-EL 3-wire MI3:("OPEN":STOP) MI1 ("CLOSE":RUN): MI2:("OPEN": FWD) ("CLOSE": REV) DCM STOP REV/FWD RUN VFD-EL 02.00 02.01 02.09 04.04 Operation Command Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters General application Selecting the source of control signal Selection of AC motor drive control by external terminals, digital keypad or RS485. 02.01 04.05~04.08 Frequency Hold Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters General application Acceleration/ deceleration pause Hold output frequency during Acceleration/deceleration 04.05~04.08
  • 66. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-23 Auto Restart after Fault Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters Air conditioners, remote pumps For continuous and reliable operation without operator intervention The AC motor drive can be restarted/reset automatically up to 10 times after a fault occurs. 08.15~08.16 Emergency Stop by DC Brake Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters High-speed rotors Emergency stop without brake resistor AC motor drive can use DC brake for emergency stop when quick stop is needed without brake resistor. When used often, take motor cooling into consideration. 08.00 08.02 08.03 Over-torque Setting Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters Pumps, fans and extruders To protect machines and to have continuous/ reliable operation The over-torque detection level can be set. Once OC stall, OV stall and over- torque occurs, the output frequency will be adjusted automatically. It is suitable for machines like fans and pumps that require continuous operation. 06.00~06.05 Upper/Lower Limit Frequency Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters Pump and fan Control the motor speed within upper/lower limit When user cannot provide upper/lower limit, gain or bias from external signal, it can be set individually in AC motor drive. 01.07 01.08 Skip Frequency Setting Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters Pumps and fans To prevent machine vibrations The AC motor drive cannot run at constant speed in the skip frequency range. Three skip frequency ranges can be set. 08.09~08.14
  • 67. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-24 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Carrier Frequency Setting Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters General application Low noise The carrier frequency can be increased when required to reduce motor noise. 02.03 Keep Running when Frequency Command is Lost Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters Air conditioners For continuous operation When the frequency command is lost by system malfunction, the AC motor drive can still run. Suitable for intelligent air conditioners. 02.06 Output Signal during Running Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters General application Provide a signal for running status Signal available to stop braking (brake release) when the AC motor drive is running. (This signal will disappear when the AC motor drive is free- running.) 03.00 Output Signal in Zero Speed Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters General application Provide a signal for running status When the output frequency is lower than the min. output frequency, a signal is given for external system or control wiring. 03.00 Output Signal at Desired Frequency Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters General application Provide a signal for running status When the output frequency is at the desired frequency (by frequency command), a signal is given for external system or control wiring (frequency attained). 03.00
  • 68. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-25 Output Signal for Base Block Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters General application Provide a signal for running status When executing Base Block, a signal is given for external system or control wiring. 03.00 Overheat Warning for Heat Sink Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters General application For safety When heat sink is overheated, it will send a signal for external system or control wiring. 03.00 Multi-function Analog Output Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters General application Display running status The value of frequency, output current/voltage can be read by connecting a frequency meter or voltage/current meter. 03.06
  • 69. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-26 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4.3 Description of Parameter Settings Group 0: User Parameters This parameter can be set during operation. 00.00 Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive Settings Read Only Factory setting: ## 00.01 Rated Current Display of the AC Motor Drive Settings Read Only Factory setting: #.# Pr. 00.00 displays the identity code of the AC motor drive. The capacity, rated current, rated voltage and the max. carrier frequency relate to the identity code. Users can use the following table to check how the rated current, rated voltage and max. carrier frequency of the AC motor drive correspond to the identity code. Pr.00.01 displays the rated current of the AC motor drive. By reading this parameter the user can check if the AC motor drive is correct. 115V/230V Series kW 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 HP 0.25 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 Pr.00-00 0 2 4 6 8 10 Rated Output Current (A) 1.6 2.5 4.2 7.5 11.0 17.0 Max. Carrier Frequency 12kHz 460V Series kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 HP 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 Pr.00-00 3 5 7 9 11 Rated Output Current (A) 1.5 2.5 4.2 5.5 8.2 Max. Carrier Frequency 12kHz 00.02 Parameter Reset Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Parameter can be read/written 1 All parameters are read-only 8 Keypad lock 9 All parameters are reset to factory settings (50Hz, 230V/400V or 220V/380V depends on Pr.00.12) 10 All parameters are reset to factory settings (60Hz, 115V/220V/440V)
  • 70. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-27 This parameter allows the user to reset all parameters to the factory settings except the fault records (Pr.06.08 ~ Pr.06.12). 50Hz: Pr.01.00 and Pr.01.01 are set to 50Hz and Pr.01.02 will be set by Pr.00.12. 60Hz: Pr.01.00 and Pr.01.01 are set to 60Hz and Pr.01.02 is set to 115V, 230V or 460V. When Pr.00.02=1, all parameters are read-only. To write all parameters, set Pr.00.02=0. 00.03 Start-up Display Selection Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Display the frequency command value (Fxxx) 1 Display the actual output frequency (Hxxx) 2 Display the output current in A supplied to the motor (Axxx) 3 Display the content of user-defined unit (Uxxx) 4 FWD/REV command This parameter determines the start-up display page after power is applied to the drive. 00.04 Content of Multi-function Display Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Display the content of user-defined unit (Uxxx) 1 Display the counter value which counts the number of pulses on TRG terminal 2 Display status of multi-input terminals (d) 3 Display the actual DC BUS voltage in VDC of the AC motor drive 4 Display the output voltage in VAC of terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 to the motor. 5 Display PID analog feedback signal value in % 6 Display the power factor angle in º of terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 to the motor 7 Display the output power in kW of terminals U, V and W to the motor. 8 Display PID setting and feedback signal.
  • 71. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-28 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 00.04 Content of Multi-function Display 9 Display the signal of AVI analog input terminal (V). 10 Display the signal of ACI analog input terminal (mA). 11 Display the temperature of IGBT (h) in °C When Pr00.03 is set to 03, the display is according to the setting of Pr00.04. 00.05 User Defined Coefficient K Unit: 0. 1 Settings 0. 1 to d 160.0 Factory Setting: 1.0 The coefficient K determines the multiplying factor for the user-defined unit. The display value is calculated as follows: U (User-defined unit) = Actual output frequency * K (Pr.00.05) Example: A conveyor belt runs at 13.6m/s at motor speed 60Hz. K = 13.6/60 = 0.22 (0.226667 rounded to 1 decimal), therefore Pr.00.05=0.2 With Frequency command 35Hz, display shows U and 35*0.2=7.0m/s. (To increase accuracy, use K=2.2 or K=22.7 and disregard decimal point.) 00.06 Software Version Settings Read Only Display #.## 00.07 Reserved 00.08 Password Input Unit: 1 Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting: 0 Display 0~2 (times of wrong password) The function of this parameter is to input the password that is set in Pr.00.09. Input the correct password here to enable changing parameters. You are limited to a maximum of 3 attempts. After 3 consecutive failed attempts, a blinking “codE” will show up to force the user to restart the AC motor drive in order to try again to input the correct password.
  • 72. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-29 00.09 Password Set Unit: 1 Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting: 0 Display 0 No password set or successful input in Pr. 00.08 1 Password has been set To set a password to protect your parameter settings. If the display shows 0, no password is set or password has been correctly entered in Pr.00.08. All parameters can then be changed, including Pr.00.09. The first time you can set a password directly. After successful setting of password the display will show 1. Be sure to record the password for later use. To cancel the parameter lock, set the parameter to 0 after inputting correct password into Pr. 00.08. The password consists of min. 1 digits and max. 4 digits. How to make the password valid again after decoding by Pr.00.08: Method 1: Re-input original password into Pr.00.09 (Or you can enter a new password if you want to use a changed or new one). Method 2: After rebooting, password function will be recovered. Password Decode Flow Chart 3 chances to enter the correct password. 1st time displays "1" if password is incorrect. 2nd time displays "2", if password is incorrect. 3rd time displays " code" (blinking) If the password was entered incorrectly after three tries, the keypad will be locked. Turn the power OFF/ON to re-enter the password. Incorrect Password END Displays 0 when entering correct password into Pr.00.08. 00.09 00.08 00.08 Displays 0 when entering correct password into Pr.00.08. Correct Password END 00.09
  • 73. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-30 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 00.10 Reserved 00.11 Reserved 00.12 50Hz Base Voltage Selection Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 230V/400V 1 220V/380V This parameter determines the base voltage for 50Hz. 00.13 User-defined Value 1 (correspond to max. frequency) Unit: 1 Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting: 0 This parameter corresponds to max. frequency. When Pr.00-13 is not set to 0, “F” will disappear in frequency mode and the right-most digit will blink. Many ranges will be changed to Pr.00.13, including potentiometer, UP/DOWN key, AVI, ACI, multi-step, JOG function and PID function. When Pr.00.13 is not set to 0 and the frequency source is from communication, please use Pr.02-18 to change frequency setting because it can’t be set at address 2001H. 00.14 Position of Decimal Point of User-defined Value 1 Unit: 1 Settings 0 to 3 Factory Setting: 0 It is used to set the position of decimal point of Pr.00.13. Example: when you want to set 10.0, you need to set Pr.00.13 to 100 and Pr.00.14 to 1.
  • 74. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-31 Group 1: Basic Parameters 01.00 Maximum Output Frequency (Fmax) Unit: 0.01 Settings 50.00 to 600.0 Hz Factory Setting: 60.00 This parameter determines the AC motor drive’s Maximum Output Frequency. All the AC motor drive frequency command sources (analog inputs 0 to +10V and 4 to 20mA) are scaled to correspond to the output frequency range. 01.01 Maximum Voltage Frequency (Fbase) Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 60.00 This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. Maximum Voltage Frequency determines the v/f curve ratio. For example, if the drive is rated for 460 VAC output and the Maximum Voltage Frequency is set to 60Hz, the drive will maintain a constant ratio of 7.66 V/Hz (460V/60Hz=7.66V/Hz). This parameter value must be equal to or greater than the Mid-Point Frequency (Pr.01.03). 01.02 Maximum Output Voltage (Vmax) Unit: 0.1 Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V Factory Setting: 220.0 460V series 0.1 to 510.0V Factory Setting: 440.0 This parameter determines the Maximum Output Voltage of the AC motor drive. The Maximum Output Voltage setting must be smaller than or equal to the rated voltage of the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. This parameter value must be equal to or greater than the Mid-Point Voltage (Pr.01.04). 01.03 Mid-Point Frequency (Fmid) Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 1.50 This parameter sets the Mid-Point Frequency of the V/f curve. With this setting, the V/f ratio between Minimum Frequency and Mid-Point frequency can be determined. This parameter must be equal to or greater than Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) and equal to or less than Maximum Voltage Frequency (Pr.01.01). 01.04 Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid) Unit: 0.1 Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V Factory Setting: 10.0 460V series 0.1 to 510.0V Factory Setting: 20.0
  • 75. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-32 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 This parameter sets the Mid-Point Voltage of any V/f curve. With this setting, the V/f ratio between Minimum Frequency and Mid-Point Frequency can be determined. This parameter must be equal to or greater than Minimum Output Voltage (Pr.01.06) and equal to or less than Maximum Output Voltage (Pr.01.02). 01.05 Minimum Output Frequency (Fmin) Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 1.50 This parameter sets the Minimum Output Frequency of the AC motor drive. This parameter must be equal to or less than Mid-Point Frequency (Pr.01.03). 01.06 Minimum Output Voltage (Vmin) Unit: 0.1 Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V Factory Setting: 10.0 460V series 0.1 to 510.0V Factory Setting: 20.0 This parameter sets the Minimum Output Voltage of the AC motor drive. This parameter must be equal to or less than Mid-Point Voltage (Pr.01.04). The settings of Pr.01.01 to Pr.01.06 have to meet the condition of Pr.01.02 ≥ Pr.01.04 ≥ Pr.01.06 and Pr.01.01 ≥ Pr.01.03 ≥ Pr.01.05. 01.07 Output Frequency Upper Limit Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.1 to 120.0% Factory Setting: 110.0 This parameter must be equal to or greater than the Output Frequency Lower Limit (Pr.01.08). The Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) is regarded as 100%. Output Frequency Upper Limit value = (Pr.01.00 * Pr.01.07)/100. 01.05 01.03 01.01 01.06 01.04 01.02 01.00 01.0701.08 V/f Curve Voltage Frequency Output Frequency Lower Limit Output Frequency Upper Limit The limit of Output Frequency Mid-point Freq. Maximum Output Frequency Maximum Output Voltage Mid-point Voltage Minimum Output Voltage Minimum Output Freq. Maximum Voltage Frequency (Base Frequency)
  • 76. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-33 01.08 Output Frequency Lower Limit Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.0 to 100.0% Factory Setting: 0.0 The Upper/Lower Limits are to prevent operation errors and machine damage. If the Output Frequency Upper Limit is 50Hz and the Maximum Output Frequency is 60Hz, the Output Frequency will be limited to 50Hz. If the Output Frequency Lower Limit is 10Hz, and the Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) is set to 1.0Hz, then any Command Frequency between 1.0-10Hz will generate a 10Hz output from the drive. If the command frequency is less than 1.0Hz, drive will be in ready status without output. This parameter must be equal to or less than the Output Frequency Upper Limit (Pr.01.07). The Output Frequency Lower Limit value = (Pr.01.00 * Pr.01.08) /100. 01.09 Acceleration Time 1 (Taccel 1) Unit: 0.1/0.01 01.10 Deceleration Time 1 (Tdecel 1) Unit: 0.1/0.01 01.11 Acceleration Time 2 (Taccel 2) Unit: 0.1/0.01 01.12 Deceleration Time 2 (Tdecel 2) Unit: 0.1/0.01 Settings 0.1 to 600.0 sec / 0.01 to 600.0 sec Factory Setting: 10.0 Acceleration/deceleration time 1 or 2 can be switched by setting the external terminals MI3~ MI12 to 7 (set Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08 to 7 or Pr.11.06~Pr.11.11 to 7). 01.19 Accel/Decel Time Unit Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Unit: 0.1 sec 1 Unit: 0.01 sec The Acceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to ramp from 0 Hz to Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00). The rate is linear unless S-Curve is “Enabled”; see Pr.01.17. The Deceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to decelerate from the Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) down to 0 Hz. The rate is linear unless S-Curve is “Enabled.”, see Pr.01.18. The Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1, 2, 3, 4 are selected according to the Multi-function Input Terminals Settings. See Pr.04.05 to Pr.04.08 for more details.
  • 77. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-34 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 In the diagram shown below, the Acceleration/Deceleration Time of the AC motor drive is the time between 0 Hz to Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00). Suppose the Maximum Output Frequency is 60 Hz, Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) is 1.0 Hz, and Acceleration/Deceleration Time is 10 seconds. The actual time for the AC motor drive to accelerate from start-up to 60 Hz and to decelerate from 60Hz to 1.0Hz is in this case 9.83 seconds. ((60-1) * 10/60=9.83secs). 01.00 01.09 01.11 01.10 01.12 Frequency TimeAccel. Time Decel. Time The definition of Accel./Decel. Time Max. output Frequency setting operation frequency Min. output frequency 01.05 Resulting Resulting Accel. Time Decel. Time Resulting Accel./Decel. Time 0 Hz 01.13 Jog Acceleration Time Unit: 0.1/0.01 Settings 0.1 to 600.0/0.01 to 600.0 sec Factory Setting: 1.0 01.14 Jog Deceleration Time Unit: 0.1/0.01 Settings 0.1 to 600.0/0.01 to 600.0 sec Factory Setting: 1.0 01.15 Jog Frequency Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.10 to Fmax (Pr.01.00)Hz Factory Setting: 6.00 Only external terminal JOG (MI3 to MI12) can be used. When the Jog command is “ON”, the AC motor drive will accelerate from Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) to Jog Frequency (Pr.01.15). When the Jog command is “OFF”, the AC motor drive will decelerate from Jog Frequency to zero. The used Accel/Decel time is set by the Jog Accel/Decel time (Pr.01.13, Pr.01.14).
  • 78. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-35 Before using the JOG command, the drive must be stopped first. And during Jog operation, other operation commands are not accepted, except FORWARD/REVERSE commands. 01.13 01.12 01.21 Frequency TimeJOG Accel. Time JOG Decel. Time The definition of JOG Accel./Decel. Time 01.15 JOG Frequency Min. output frequency 01.05 0 Hz 01.14 01.16 Auto-Acceleration / Deceleration Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Linear acceleration / deceleration 1 Auto acceleration, linear Deceleration. 2 Linear acceleration, auto Deceleration. 3 Auto acceleration / deceleration (set by load) 4 Auto acceleration / deceleration (set by Accel/Decel Time setting) With Auto acceleration / deceleration it is possible to reduce vibration and shocks during starting/stopping the load. During Auto acceleration the torque is automatically measured and the drive will accelerate to the set frequency with the fastest acceleration time and the smoothest starting current. During Auto deceleration, regenerative energy is measured and the motor is smoothly stopped with the fastest deceleration time. But when this parameter is set to 4, the actual accel/decel time will be equal to or more than parameter Pr.01.09 ~Pr.01.12. Auto acceleration/deceleration makes the complicated processes of tuning unnecessary. It makes operation efficient and saves energy by acceleration without stall and deceleration without brake resistor. In applications with brake resistor or brake unit, Auto deceleration shall not be used.
  • 79. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-36 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 01.17 Acceleration S-Curve Unit: 0.1/0.01 01.18 Deceleration S-Curve Unit: 0.1/0.01 Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0.0 S-curve disabled 0.1 to 10.0/0.01 to 10.00 S-curve enabled (10.0/10.00 is the smoothest) This parameter is used to ensure smooth acceleration and deceleration via S-curve. The S-curve is disabled when set to 0.0 and enabled when set to 0.1 to 10.0/0.01 to 10.00. Setting 0.1/0.01 gives the quickest and setting 10.0/10.00 the longest and smoothest S-curve. The AC motor drive will not follow the Accel/Decel Times in Pr.01.09 to Pr.01.12. The diagram below shows that the original setting of the Accel/Decel Time is only for reference when the S-curve is enabled. The actual Accel/Decel Time depends on the selected S-curve (0.1 to 10.0). The total Accel. Time=Pr.01.09 + Pr.01.17 or Pr.01.11 + Pr.01.17 The total Decel. Time=Pr.01.10 + Pr.01.18 or Pr.01.12 + Pr.01.18 3 1 2 4 1 3 4 2 1 2 3 4 Disable S curve Enable S curve Acceleration/deceleration Characteristics
  • 80. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-37 Group 2: Operation Method Parameters 02.00 Source of First Master Frequency Command Factory Setting: 1 02.09 Source of Second Master Frequency Command Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys or Multi-function Inputs UP/DOWN. Last used frequency saved. (Digital keypad is optional) 1 0 to +10V from AVI 2 4 to 20mA from ACI 3 RS-485 (RJ-45) communication 4 Digital keypad potentiometer These parameters set the Master Frequency Command Source of the AC motor drive. The factory setting for master frequency command is 1. (digital keypad is optional.) Setting 2: use the ACI/AVI switch on the AC motor drive to select ACI or AVI. When the AC motor drive is controlled by external terminal, please refer to Pr.02.05 for details. The first /second frequency/operation command is enabled/disabled by Multi Function Input Terminals. Please refer to Pr.04.05 ~ 04.08. 02.01 Source of First Operation Command Factory Setting: 1 Settings 0 Digital keypad (Digital keypad is optional) 1 External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled. 2 External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled. 3 RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled. 4 RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled. The factory setting for source of first operation command is 1. (digital keypad is optional.) When the AC motor drive is controlled by external terminal, please refer to Pr.02.05/Pr.04.04 for details.
  • 81. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-38 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 02.10 Combination of the First and Second Master Frequency Command Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 First Master Frequency Command Only 1 First Master Frequency + Second Master Frequency 2 First Master Frequency - Second Master Frequency 02.02 Stop Method Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 STOP: ramp to stop E.F.: coast to stop 1 STOP: coast to stop E.F.: coast to stop 2 STOP: ramp to stop E.F.: ramp to stop 3 STOP: coast to stop E.F.: ramp to stop The parameter determines how the motor is stopped when the AC motor drive receives a valid stop command or detects External Fault. Ramp: the AC motor drive decelerates to Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) according to the deceleration time and then stops. Coast: the AC motor drive stops the output instantly upon command, and the motor free runs until it comes to a complete standstill. The motor stop method is usually determined by the characteristics of the motor load and how frequently it is stopped. (1) It is recommended to use “ramp to stop” for safety of personnel or to prevent material from being wasted in applications where the motor has to stop after the drive is stopped. The deceleration time has to be set accordingly. (2) If motor free running is allowed or the load inertia is large, it is recommended to select “coast to stop”. For example: blowers, punching machines, centrifuges and pumps.
  • 82. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-39 RUN STOP RUN STOP Frequency Frequency TimeTime output frequency output frequency motor speed motor speed operation command operation command stops according to decel eration time free run to stop ramp to stop and free run to stop EF Frequency Frequency frequency output motor speed EF operation command stops according to decel eration time When Pr.02.02 is set to 2 or 3 frequency output free run to stop operation command When Pr.02.02 is set to 0 or 1 motor speed 02.03 PWM Carrier Frequency Selections Unit: 1 115V/230V/460V Series Power 0.25 to 5hp (0.2kW to 3.7kW) Setting Range 2 to 12 kHz Factory Setting 8 kHz This parameter determines the PWM carrier frequency of the AC motor drive.
  • 83. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-40 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 2kHz 8kHz 12kHz Carrier Frequency Acoustic Noise Electromagnetic Noise or leakage current Heat Dissipation Current Wave Significant MinimalSignificant Minimal Minimal Significant Minimal Significant From the table, we see that the PWM carrier frequency has a significant influence on the electromagnetic noise, AC motor drive heat dissipation, and motor acoustic noise. The PWM carrier frequency will be decreased automatically by the ambient temperature and output current of the AC motor drives. It is used to prevent AC motor drive overheat and extend IGBT’s life. Therefore, it is necessary to have this kind of protection method. Take an example of 460V models, assume that the carrier frequency is 12kHz, ambient temperature is 50 degrees C with single AC motor drive. If the output current exceeds 80% * rated current, the AC motor drive will decrease the carrier frequency automatically by the following chart. If output current is around 100% * rated current, the carrier frequency will decrease from 12k Hz to 8k Hz. Mounting method Method A Frame BFrame A 150mm 150mm 50mm 50mm Frame BFrame A Method B
  • 84. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-41 40% 50% 60% For 460V Series 80% 90% 100% 70% Carrier Frequency RatedCurrent(%) 2kHz 4kHz 8kHz 10kHz 12kHz 6kHz 50 with mounting method A℃ 40 with mounting method B℃ 25 with mounting method B℃ 40% 50% 60% For 115V/230V Series 80% 90% 100% 2kHz 4kHz 8kHz 10kHz 12kHz 6kHz 70% RatedCurrent(%) Carrier Frequency 50 with mounting method A℃ 40 with mounting method B℃ 35 with mounting method A℃ 25 with mounting method B℃ 02.04 Motor Direction Control Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Forward/Reverse operation enabled 1 Reverse operation disabled 2 Forward operation disabled This parameter is used to disable one direction of rotation of the AC motor drive direction of rotation. 02.05 Line Start Lockout Factory Setting: 1 Settings 0 Disable. Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed. 1 Enable. Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed. 2 Disable. Operation status will change if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed. 3 Enable. Operation status will change if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed. This parameter determines the response of the drive upon power on and operation command source is changed. Pr.02.05 Start lockout (Run when power is ON) Operation status when operation command source is changed 0 Disable (AC motor drive will run) Keep previous status 1 Enable (AC motor drive doesn’t run) Keep previous status 2 Disable (AC motor drive will run) Change according to the new operation command source 3 Enable (AC motor drive doesn’t run) Change according to the new operation command source
  • 85. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-42 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 When the operation command source is from external terminal and operation command is ON (MI1/MI2-DCM=closed), the AC motor drive will operate according to Pr.02.05 after power is applied. <For terminals MI1 and MI2 only> 1. When Pr.02.05 is set to 0 or 2, AC motor drive will run immediately. 2. When Pr.02.05 is set to 1 or 3, AC motor drive will remain stopped until operation command is received after previous operation command is cancelled. RUN RUN STOP STOP Pr.02.01=1 or 2 This action will follow MI1/DCM or MI2/DCM status (ON is close/OFF is open) ON OFFMI1-DCM (close) Pr.02.01=0 output frequency Pr.02.05=0 or 2 Change operation command source output frequency Pr.02.05=1 or 3 When the operation command source isn’t from the external terminals, independently from whether the AC motor drive runs or stops, the AC motor drive will operate according to Pr.02.05 if the two conditions below are both met. 1. When operation command source is changed to external terminal (Pr.02.01=1 or 2) 2. The status of terminal and AC motor drive is different. And the operation of the AC motor drive will be: 1. When setting 0 or 1, the status of AC motor drive is not changed by the terminal status. 2. When setting 2 or 3, the status of AC motor drive is changed by the terminal status.
  • 86. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-43 It needs to received a run command after previous command is cancelled ON OFFMI1-DCM (close) power is applied output frequency Pr.02.05=0 or 1 output frequency Pr.02.05=2 or 3 ON OFF ON it will run it won't run when power is applied The Line Start Lockout feature does not guarantee that the motor will never start under this condition. It is possible the motor may be set in motion by a malfunctioning switch. 02.06 Loss of ACI Signal (4-20mA) Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Decelerate to 0Hz 1 Coast to stop and display “AErr” 2 Continue operation by the last frequency command This parameter determines the behavior when ACI is lost. When set to 1, it will display warning message “AErr” on the keypad in case of loss of ACI signal and execute the setting. When ACI signal is recovered, the warning message will stop blinking. Please press “RESET” key to clear it. 02.07 Up/Down Mode Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 By digital keypad up/down keys mode 1 Based on Accel/Decel Time acc. to Pr.01.09 to 01.12 2 Constant speed (acc. to Pr. 02.08) 3 Pulse input unit (acc. to Pr. 02.08) 02.08 Accel/Decel Rate of Change of UP/DOWN Operation with Constant Speed Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.01~10.00 Hz/2ms Factory Setting: 0.01
  • 87. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-44 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 These parameters determine the increase/decrease of the master frequency when operated via the Multi-function Inputs when Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08 are set to 10 (Up command) or 11 (Down command). When Pr.02.07 is set to 0: increase/decrease the frequency by using UP/DOWN key. It is valid only when the AC motor drive is running. When Pr.02.07 is set to 1: increase/decrease the frequency by acceleration/deceleration settings. It is valid only when the AC motor drive is running. When Pr.02.07 is set to 2: increase/decrease the frequency by Pr.02.08. When Pr.02.07 is set to 3: increase/decrease the frequency by Pr.02.08 (unit: pulse input). 02.11 Keypad Frequency Command Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 60.00 This parameter can be used to set frequency command or read keypad frequency command. 02.12 Communication Frequency Command Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 60.00 This parameter can be used to set frequency command or read communication frequency command. 02.13 The Selections for Saving Keypad or Communication Frequency Command Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Save Keypad & Communication Frequency 1 Save Keypad Frequency only 2 Save Communication Frequency only This parameter is used to save keypad or RS-485 frequency command. 02.14 Initial Frequency Selection (for keypad & RS485) Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 By Current Freq Command 1 By Zero Freq Command 2 By Frequency Display at Stop 02.15 Initial Frequency Setpoint (for keypad & RS485) Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.00 ~ 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 60.00
  • 88. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-45 These parameters are used to determinate the frequency at stop: When setting Pr.02.14 to 0: the initial frequency will be current frequency. When setting Pr.02.14 to 1: the initial frequency will be 0. When setting Pr.02.14 to 2: the initial frequency will be Pr.02.15. 02.16 Display the Master Freq Command Source Settings Read Only Factory setting: ## You can read the master frequency command source by this parameter. Display Value Bit Function 1 Bit0=1 Master Freq Command Source by First Freq Source (Pr.02.00). 2 Bit1=1 Master Freq Command Source by Second Freq Source (Pr.02.09). 4 Bit2=1 Master Freq Command Source by Multi-input function 02.17 Display the Operation Command Source Settings Read Only Factory setting: ## You can read the operation source by this parameter. Display Value Bit Function 1 Bit0=1 Operation Command Source by Digital Keypad 2 Bit1=1 Operation Command Source by RS485 communication 4 Bit2=1 Operation Command Source by External Terminal 8 Bit3=1 Operation Command Source by Multi-input function 02.18 User-defined Value 2 Setting Unit: 1 Settings 0 to Pr.00.13 Factory Setting: 0
  • 89. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-46 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Use this parameter to change frequency when (1) Pr.00.13 is not set to 0 and frequency source is from communication or (2) Pr.02.10 is not set to 0. 02.19 User-defined Value 2 Unit: 1 Settings Read-only Factory Setting: 0 For example: suppose that the frequency source is the first master frequency + second master frequency command (first master frequency is from keypad and second master frequency is from AVI), user-defined value 1 is set to 180.0(Pr.00.13 is set to 1800, Pr.00.14 is set to 1). AVI=2V=180.0/(2V/10V)=36.0, frequency is 36.0/(180.0/60.0)=12.0Hz Pr.02.18=30.0, frequency is 30.0/(60.0/180.0)=10.0Hz At this moment, the keypad will display 66.0(36.0+30.0) and the output frequency is 22.0Hz(12.0+10.0). When reading the value from communication address, the value will be shown as follows: 2102H and 2103H are 22.0Hz, 0212H(Pr.02.18) is 30.0, 0213H(Pr.02.19) is 66.0.
  • 90. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-47 Group 3: Output Function Parameters 03.00 Multi-function Output Relay (RA1, RB1, RC1) Factory Setting: 8 Settings Function Description 0 No Function 1 AC Drive Operational Active when the drive is ready or RUN command is “ON”. 2 Master Frequency Attained Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output frequency setting. 3 Zero Speed Active when Command Frequency is lower than the Minimum Output Frequency. 4 Over-Torque Detection Active as long as over-torque is detected. (Refer to Pr.06.03 ~ Pr.06.05) 5 Baseblock (B.B.) Indication Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off during baseblock. Base block can be forced by Multi-function input (setting 09). 6 Low-Voltage Indication Active when low voltage(Lv) is detected. 7 Operation Mode Indication Active when operation command is controlled by external terminal. 8 Fault Indication Active when a fault occurs (oc, ov, oH1, oL, oL1, EF, cF3, HPF, ocA, ocd, ocn, GFF). 9 Desired Frequency Attained Active when the desired frequency (Pr.03.02) is attained. 10 Terminal Count Value Attained Active when the counter reaches Terminal Count Value. 11 Preliminary Count Value Attained Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Count Value. 12 Over Voltage Stall supervision Active when the Over Voltage Stall function operating 13 Over Current Stall supervision Active when the Over Current Stall function operating
  • 91. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-48 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Settings Function Description 14 Heat Sink Overheat Warning When heatsink overheats, it will signal to prevent OH turn off the drive. When it is higher than 85o C (185o F), it will be ON. 15 Over Voltage supervision Active when the DC-BUS voltage exceeds level 16 PID supervision Active when the PID feedback signal is abnormal (Refer to Pr.10.12 and Pr.13.) 17 Forward command Active when the direction command is FWD 18 Reverse command Active when the direction command is REV 19 Zero Speed Output Signal Active when the drive is standby or stop 20 Communication Warning (FbE,Cexx, AoL2, AUE, SAvE) Active when there is a Communication Warning 21 Brake Control (Desired Frequency Attained) Active when output frequency ≥Pr.03.11. Deactivated when output frequency ≤Pr.03.12 after STOP command. 22 AC Motor Drive Ready Active when AC motor drive is ready. 03.01 Reserved 03.02 Desired Frequency Attained Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.00 to 600.0 Hz Factory Setting: 0.00 If a multi-function output terminal is set to function as Desired Frequency Attained (Pr.03.00 =09), then the output will be activated when the programmed frequency is attained.
  • 92. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-49 -2Hz 4Hz2Hz OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON detection range Frequency master frequency desired frequency 03.02 detection range detection range DC braking time during stop Time waiting time for frequency run/stop master freq. attained (output signal) desired freq. attained setting 03 zero speed indication setting 19 zero speed indication output timing chart of multiple function terminals when setting to frequency attained or zero speed indication 03.03 Analog Output Signal (AFM) Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Analog Frequency Meter (0 to Maximum Output Frequency) 1 Analog Current Meter (0 to 250% of rated AC motor drive current) This parameter sets the function of the AFM output 0~+10VDC (ACM is common). 03.04 Analog Output Gain Unit: 1 Settings 1 to 200% Factory Setting: 100 This parameter sets the voltage range of the analog output signal AFM. When Pr.03.03 is set to 0, the analog output voltage is directly proportional to the output frequency of the AC motor drive. With Pr.03.04 set to 100%, the Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) of the AC motor drive corresponds to +10VDC on the AFM output. Similarly, if Pr.03.03 is set to 1, the analog output voltage is directly proportional to the output current of the AC drive. With Pr.03.04 set to 100%, then 2.5 times the rated current corresponds to +10VDC on the AFM output. NOTE Any type of voltmeter can be used. If the meter reads full scale at a voltage less than 10V, Pr. 03.04 should be set using the following formula: Pr. 03.04 = ((meter full scale voltage)/10) x 100%
  • 93. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-50 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 For Example: When using the meter with full scale of 5 volts, adjust Pr.03.04 to 50%. If Pr.03.03 is set to 0, then 5VDC will correspond to Maximum Output Frequency. 03.05 Terminal Count Value Unit: 1 Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting: 0 This parameter sets the count value of the internal counter. To increase the internal counter, one of Pr.04.05 to 04.08 should be set to 12. Upon completion of counting, the specified output terminal will be activated. (Pr.03.00 set to 10). When the display shows c555, the drive has counted 555 times. If display shows c555•, it means that real counter value is between 5,550 and 5,559. 03.06 Preliminary Count Value Unit: 1 Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting: 0 When the counter value reaches this value, the corresponding multi-function output terminal will be activated, provided one of Pr.03.00set to 11 (Preliminary Count Value Setting). This multi-function output terminal will be deactivated upon completion of Terminal Count Value Attained. The timing diagram: Terminal Count Value (Pr. 03.00=10) Preliminary Count Value (Pr. 03.00=11) Display (Pr.00.04=1) TRG Counter Trigger The width of trigger signal should not be less than 2ms(<250 Hz) 2msec 2msec Ex:03.05=5,03.06=3 03.07 EF Active when Terminal Count Value Attained Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Terminal count value attained, no EF display 1 Terminal count value attained, EF active If this parameter is set to 1 and the desired value of counter is attained, the AC drive will treat it as a fault. The drive will stop and show the “EF” message on the display.
  • 94. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-51 03.08 Fan Control Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Fan always ON 1 1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF 2 Fan ON when AC motor drive runs, fan OFF when AC motor drive stops 3 Fan ON when preliminary heatsink temperature attained This parameter determines the operation mode of the cooling fan. 03.09 Reserved 03.10 Reserved 03.11 Brake Release Frequency Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 0.00 03.12 Brake Engage Frequency Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 0.00 These two parameters are used to set control of mechanical brake via the output terminals (Relay) when Pr.03.00is set to 21. Refer to the following example for details. Example: 1. Case 1: Pr.03.12 ≥ Pr.03.11 2. Case 2: Pr.03.12 ≤ Pr.03.11 Case 1: Pr.03.12 Case 2: Pr.03.12 Pr. 03.11 Frequency Output Time Run/Stop Case 1: Pr.03.00=21 Case 2: Pr.03.00=21
  • 95. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-52 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 03.13 Display the Status of Relay Settings Read Only Factory setting: ## For standard AC motor drive, the multi-function output terminals are falling-edge triggered. 0: Relay is ON; 1: Relay is OFF.
  • 96. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-53 Group 4: Input Function Parameters 04.00 Keypad Potentiometer Bias Unit: 0. 1 Settings 0.0 to 100.0% Factory Setting: 0.0 04.01 Keypad Potentiometer Bias Polarity Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Positive Bias 1 Negative Bias 04.02 Keypad Potentiometer Gain Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.1 to 200.0% Factory Setting: 100.0 04.03 Keypad Potentiometer Negative Bias, Reverse Motion Enable/Disable Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 No Negative Bias Command 1 Negative Bias: REV Motion Enabled Example 1: Standard application This is the most used setting. The user only needs to set Pr.02.00 to 04. The frequency command comes from keypad potentiometer. 60Hz 0Hz 0V 5V 10V Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq. Potentiometer Pr.04.00 =0%--Bias adjustment Pr.04.01 =0--Positive bias Pr.04.02 =100%--Input gain Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command 30Hz Example 2: Use of bias This example shows the influence of changing the bias. When the input is 0V the output frequency is 10 Hz. At mid-point a potentiometer will give 40 Hz. Once the Maximum Output Frequency is reached, any further increase of the potentiometer or signal will not increase the output frequency. (To use the full potentiometer range, please refer to Example 3.) The value of external input voltage/current 0- 8.33V corresponds to the setting frequency 10-60Hz.
  • 97. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-54 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 60Hz 0Hz 0V 5V 10V Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq. Potentiometer Pr.04.00 =16.7%--Bias adjustment Pr.04.01 =0--Positive bias Pr.04.02 =100%--Input gain Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command Gain:100% Bias adjustment:((10Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=16.7% 10Hz Bias Adjustment 40Hz Example 3: Use of bias and gain for use of full range This example also shows a popular method. The whole scale of the potentiometer can be used as desired. In addition to signals of 0 to 10V, the popular voltage signals also include signals of 0 to 5V, or any value under 10V. Regarding the setting, please refer to the following examples. 60Hz 0Hz0V 5V 10V Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq. Potentiometer Pr.04.00 =20.0%--Bias adjustment Pr.04.01 =0--Positive bias Pr.04.02 =83.3%--Input gain Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command Gain:(10V/(10V+2V))*100%=83.3% Bias adjustment:((10Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=20.0% 10HzBias Adjustment -2V XV Example 4: Use of 0-5V potentiometer range via gain adjustment This example shows a potentiometer range of 0 to 5 Volts. Instead of adjusting gain as example below, you can set Pr. 01.00 to 120Hz to achieve the same results. Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq. Potentiometer Pr.04.00 =0.0%--Bias adjustment Pr.04.01 =0--Positive bias Pr.04.02 =200%--Input gain Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command Gain:(10V/5V)*100%=200% 60Hz 0Hz 0V 5V 30Hz Gain adjustment 10V
  • 98. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-55 Example 5: Use of negative bias in noisy environment In this example, a 1V negative bias is used. In noisy environments it is advantageous to use negative bias to provide a noise margin (1V in this example). 60Hz 0Hz 0V 10V Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq. Potentiometer Pr.04.00 =10.0%--Bias adjustment Pr.04.01 =1--Negative bias Pr.04.02 =100%--Input gain Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command Gain:100% Bias adjustment:((6Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=10.0% Negative bias 6Hz 1V 54Hz Example 6: Use of negative bias in noisy environment and gain adjustment to use full potentiometer range In this example, a negative bias is used to provide a noise margin. Also a potentiometer frequency gain is used to allow the Maximum Output Frequency to be reached. 60Hz 0Hz 0V 10V Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq. Negative bias 6.6Hz 1V Bias adjustment Potentiometer Pr.04.00 =10.0%--Bias adjustment Pr.04.01 =1--Negative bias Pr.04.02 =111%--Input gain Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command Gain:(10V/9V)*100%=111% Bias adjustment:((6.6Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=10.0% Example 7: Use of 0-10V potentiometer signal to run motor in FWD and REV direction In this example, the input is programmed to run a motor in both forward and reverse direction. The motor will be idle when the potentiometer position is at mid-point of its scale. Using the settings in this example disables the external FWD and REV controls. Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq. Potentiometer Pr.04.00 =50.0%--Bias adjustment Pr.04.01 =1--Negative bias Pr.04.02 =200%--Input gain Pr.04.03 =1--Negative bias: REV motion enabled Gain:(10V/5V)*100%=200% Bias adjustment:((60Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=200% 60Hz 30Hz 0Hz0V 5V 10V 30Hz 60Hz REV FWD
  • 99. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-56 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Example 8: Use negative slope In this example, the use of negative slope is shown. Negative slopes are used in applications for control of pressure, temperature or flow. The sensor that is connected to the input generates a large signal (10V) at high pressure or flow. With negative slope settings, the AC motor drive will slow stop the motor. With these settings the AC motor drive will always run in only one direction (reverse). This can only be changed by exchanging 2 wires to the motor. 60Hz 0Hz 0V 10V Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq. Potentiometer Pr.04.00 =100%--Bias adjustment Pr.04.01 =0--Positive bias Pr.04.02 =100%--Input gain Pr.04.03 =1--Negative bias: REV motion enabled Gain:(10V/10V)*100%=100% Bias adjustment:((60Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=100% negative slope 04.11 Minimum AVI Voltage Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.0 to 10.0V Factory Setting: 0.0 04.12 Minimum AVI Frequency (percentage of Pr.01.00) Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.0 to 100.0% Factory Setting: 0.0 04.13 Maximum AVI Voltage Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.0 to 10.0V Factory Setting: 10.0 04.14 Maximum AVI Frequency (percentage of Pr. 01.00) Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.0 to 100.0% Factory Setting: 100.0 04.15 Minimum ACI Current Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.0 to 20.0mA Factory Setting: 4.0 04.16 Minimum ACI Frequency (percentage of Pr. 01.00) Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.0 to 100.0% Factory Setting: 0.0 04.17 Maximum ACI Current Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.0 to 20.0mA Factory Setting: 20.0 04.18 Maximum ACI Frequency (percentage of Pr. 01.00) Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.0 to 100.0% Factory Setting: 100.0 The above parameters are used to set the analog input reference values. The min and max frequencies are based on Pr.01.00 (during open-loop control) as shown in the following.
  • 100. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-57 01.00 analog input 04.14 04.18 04.12 04.16 04.11 04.15 04.17 01.00=60.00 Hz AVI ACI analog input 04.14=70 04.18=50 04.12=30 04.16=0 04.11=0V 04.15=4mA 04.13=10V 04.17=20mA 04.19 Reserved 04.20 Reserved 04.21 Reserved 04.22 Reserved 04.23 Reserved 04.24 Reserved 04.25 Reserved 04.04 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI1, MI2) 2-wire/ 3-wire Operation Control Modes Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 2-wire: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP 1 2-wire: FWD/REV, RUN/STOP 2 3-wire Operation
  • 101. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-58 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 There are three different types of control modes: 04.04 External Terminal 0 2-wire FWD /STOP REV / STOP VFD-EL MI1:("OPEN":STOP) ("CLOSE":FWD) MI2:("OPEN": STOP) ("CLOSE": REV) DCM FWD/STOP REV/STOP 1 2-wire FWD/ REV RUN / STOP MI1:("OPEN":STOP) ("CLOSE":RUN) MI2:("OPEN": FWD) ("CLOSE": REV) DCM RUN/STOP FWD/REV VFD-EL 2 3-wire MI3:("OPEN":STOP) MI1 ("CLOSE":RUN): MI2:("OPEN": FWD) ("CLOSE": REV) DCM STOP REV/FWD RUN VFD-EL 04.05 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI3) Factory Setting: 1 04.06 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI4) Factory Setting: 2 04.07 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI5) Factory Setting: 3 04.08 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI6) Factory Setting: 4 Settings Function Description 0 No Function Any unused terminals should be programmed to 0 to insure they have no effect on operation.
  • 102. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-59 Settings Function Description 1 Multi-Step Speed Command 1 2 Multi-Step Speed Command 2 3 Multi-Step Speed Command 3 4 Multi-Step Speed Command 4 These four inputs select the multi-speed defined by Pr.05.00 to Pr.05.14 as shown in the diagram at the end of this table. NOTE: Pr.05.00 to Pr.05.14 can also be used to control output speed. There are 17 step speed frequencies (including Master Frequency and Jog Frequency) to select for application. 5 External Reset The External Reset has the same function as the Reset key on the Digital keypad. After faults such as O.H., O.C. and O.V. are cleared this input can be used to reset the drive. 6 Accel/Decel Inhibit When the command is active, acceleration and deceleration is stopped and the AC motor drive maintains a constant speed. 7 Accel/Decel Time Selection Command Used to select the one of 2 Accel/Decel Times (Pr.01.09 to Pr.01.12). See explanation at the end of this table. 8 Jog Operation Control Parameter value 08 programs one of the Multi-function Input Terminals MI3 ∼ MI6 (Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08) for Jog control. NOTE: Programming for Jog operation by 08 can only be done while the motor is stopped. (Refer to parameter Pr.01.13~Pr.01.15) 9 External Base Block (Refer to Pr. 08.06) Parameter value 09 programs a Multi-function Input Terminals for external Base Block control. NOTE: When a Base-Block signal is received, the AC motor drive will block all output and the motor will free run. When base block control is deactivated, the AC drive will start its speed search function and synchronize with the motor speed, and then accelerate to Master Frequency.
  • 103. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-60 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Settings Function Description 10 UP: Increase Master Frequency 11 DOWN: Decrease Master Frequency Increase/decrease the Master Frequency each time an input is received or continuously when the input stays active. When both inputs are active at the same time, the Master Frequency increase/decrease is halted. Please refer to Pr.02.07, 02.08. This function is also called “motor potentiometer”. 12 Counter Trigger Parameter value 12 programs one of the Multi-function Input Terminals MI3~MI6 (Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08) to increment the AC drive’s internal counter. When an input is received, the counter is incremented by 1. 13 Counter Reset When active, the counter is reset and inhibited. To enable counting the input should be OFF. Refer to Pr.03.05 and 03.06. 14 External Fault Parameter value 14 programs one of the Multi-function Input Terminals MI3~MI6 (Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08) to be External Fault (E.F.) inputs. 15 PID function disabled When an input ON with this setting is ON, the PID function will be disabled. 16 Output Shutoff Stop AC motor drive will stop output and the motor free run if one of these settings is enabled. If the status of terminal is changed, AC motor drive will restart from 0Hz. 17 Parameter lock enable When this setting is enabled, all parameters will be locked and write parameters is disabled. 18 Operation Command Selection (Pr.02.01 setting/external terminals) ON: Operation command via Ext. Terminals OFF: Operation command via Pr.02.01 setting Pr.02.01 is disabled if this parameter value 18 is set. See the explanation below this table. 19 Operation Command Selection (Pr 02.01 setting/Digital Keypad) ON: Operation command via Digital Keypad OFF: Operation command via Pr.02.01 setting Pr.02.01 is disabled if this parameter value 19 is set. See the explanation below this table.
  • 104. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-61 Settings Function Description 20 Operation Command Selection (Pr 02.01 setting/ Communication) ON: Operation command via Communication OFF: Operation command via Pr.02.01 setting Pr.02.01 is disabled if this parameter value 20 is set. See the explanation below this table. 21 Forward/Reverse This function has top priority to set the direction for running (If “Pr.02.04=0”) 22 Source of second frequency command enabled Used to select the first/second frequency command source. Refer to Pr.02.00 and 02.09. ON: 2nd Frequency command source OFF: 1st Frequency command source 04.09 Multi-function Input Contact Selection Unit: 1 Settings 0 to 4095 Factory Setting: 0 This parameter can be used to set the status of multi-function terminals (MI1~MI6 (N.O./N.C.) for standard AC motor drive). The MI1~MI3 setting will be invalid when the operation command source is external terminal (2/3wire). 12345 0 0=N.O 1=N.C MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 Weights Bit The Setting method: It needs to convert binary number (6-bit) to decimal number for input. For example: if setting MI3, MI5, MI6 to be N.C. and MI1, MI2, MI4 to be N.O. The setting value Pr.04.09 should be bit5X25 +bit4X24 +bit2X22 = 1X25 +1X24 +1X22 = 32+16+4=52 as shown in the following.
  • 105. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-62 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 01011 0 Weights Bit 0=N.O 1=N.C MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 The setting value = bit5x2 +bit4x2 +bit2x2 5 4 2 = 1x2 +1x2 +1x2 5 4 2 =32+16+4 Setting 04.09 =52 NOTE: 2 =16384 2 =8192 2 =4096 2 =2048 2 =1024 2 =512 2 =256 2 =128 2 =64 2 =32 2 =16 2 =8 2 =4 2 =2 2 =1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 This parameter is to delay the signals on digital input terminals. 1 unit is 2 msec, 2 units are 4 msec, etc. The delay time is to debounce noisy signals that could cause the digital terminals to malfunction. 04.26 Display the Status of Multi-function Input Terminal Settings Read Only Factory setting: ## Display Bit0: MI1 Status Bit1: MI2 Status Bit2: MI3 Status Bit3: MI4 Status Bit4: MI5 Status Bit5: MI6 Status The multi-function input terminals are falling-edge triggered. For standard AC motor drive, there are MI1 to MI6 and Pr.04.26 will display 63 (111111) for no action. 12345 0 0=Active 1=off MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 Weights Bit 04.10 Digital Terminal Input Debouncing Time Unit: 2 msec Settings 1 to 20 Factory Setting: 1
  • 106. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-63 For Example: If Pr.04.26 displays 52, it means MI1, MI2 and MI4 are active. The display value 52= 32+16+4 =1 X 25 + 1X 24 + 1X 22 = bit 6 X 25 + bit 5 X 24 + bit 3 X 22 01011 0 0=Active 1=Off MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 Weights Bit This parameter is used to select the terminals to be internal terminal or external terminal. You can activate internal terminals by Pr.04.28. A terminal cannot be both internal terminal and external terminal at the same time. For standard AC motor drive, the multi-function input terminals are MI1 to MI6 as shown in the following. 12345 0 0=external terminal 1=internal terminal MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 Weights Bit The Setting method is convert binary number to decimal number for input. For example: if setting MI3, MI5, MI6 to be internal terminals and MI1, MI2, MI4 to be external terminals. The setting value should be bit5X25 +bit4X24 +bit2X22 = 1X25 +1X24 +1X22 = 32+16+4=52 as shown in the following. 04.27 Internal/External Multi-function Input Terminals Selection Unit: 1 Settings 0 to 4095 Factory Setting: 0
  • 107. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-64 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 01011 0 Weights Bit 0=external terminal 1=internal terminal MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 This parameter is used to set the internal terminal action via keypad or communication. For standard AC motor drive, the multi-function input terminals are MI1 to MI6 as shown in the following. 12345 0 0=set internal terminal to be OFF 1= ONset internal terminal to be MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 Weights Bit For example, if setting MI3, MI5 and MI6 to be ON, Pr.04.28 should be set to bit5X25 +bit4X24 +bit2X22 = 1X25 +1X24 +1X22 = 32+16+4=52 as shown in the following. 01011 0 Weights Bit 0=OFF 1=ON MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 04.28 Internal Terminal Status Unit: 1 Settings 0 to 4095 Factory Setting: 0
  • 108. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-65 Group 5: Multi-step speeds parameters 05.00 1st Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.01 2nd Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.02 3rd Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.03 4th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.04 5th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.05 6th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.06 7th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.07 8th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.08 9th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.09 10th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.10 11th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.11 12th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.12 13th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.13 14th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.14 15th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 0.00 The Multi-function Input Terminals (refer to Pr.04.05 to 04.08) are used to select one of the AC motor drive Multi-step speeds. The speeds (frequencies) are determined by Pr.05.00 to 05.14 as shown in the following.
  • 109. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-66 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ONONONON ON ON ON ON 05.00 05.01 05.02 05.03 05.04 05.05 05.06 05.07 05.08 05.09 05.10 05.11 05.12 05.13 05.14 01.15 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Multi-function terminals 04.05~04.08 Frequency Master Speed JOG Freq. 2nd speed ( 2)MI3 to MI6 1st speed ( to MI6 1)MI3 Jog Freq. Multi-speed via External Terminals Run/Stop PU/external terminals /communication 3rd speed ( 3)MI3 to MI6 4th speed ( 4)MI3 to MI6 MI6=4 MI5=3 MI4=2 MI3=1 Master frequency OFF OFF OFF OFF 1st speed OFF OFF OFF ON 2nd speed OFF OFF ON OFF 3rd speed OFF OFF ON ON 4th speed OFF ON OFF OFF 5th speed OFF ON OFF ON 6th speed OFF ON ON OFF 7th speed OFF ON ON ON 8th speed ON OFF OFF OFF 9th speed ON OFF OFF ON 10th speed ON OFF ON OFF 11th speed ON OFF ON ON 12th speed ON ON OFF OFF 13th speed ON ON OFF ON 14th speed ON ON ON OFF 15th speed ON ON ON ON
  • 110. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-67 Group 6: Protection Parameters 06.00 Over-Voltage Stall Prevention Unit: 0.1 Settings 115V/230V series 330.0 to 410.0V Factory Setting: 390.0 460V series 660.0 to 820.0V Factory Setting: 780.0 0 Disable Over-voltage Stall Prevention (with brake unit or brake resistor) During deceleration, the DC bus voltage may exceed its Maximum Allowable Value due to motor regeneration. When this function is enabled, the AC motor drive will not decelerate further and keep the output frequency constant until the voltage drops below the preset value again. Over-Voltage Stall Prevention must be disabled (Pr.06.00=0) when a brake unit or brake resistor is used. NOTE With moderate inertia load, over-voltage stall prevention will not occur and the real deceleration time will be equal to the setting of deceleration time. The AC drive will automatically extend the deceleration time with high inertia loads. If the deceleration time is critical for the application, a brake resistor or brake unit should be used. high voltage at DC side over-voltage detection level output frequency time Deceleration characteristic when Over-Voltage Stall Prevention enabled Frequency Held time previous deceleration time actual time to decelerate to stop when over-voltage stall prevention is enabled
  • 111. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-68 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 06.01 Over-Current Stall Prevention during Acceleration Unit: 1 Settings 20 to 250% Factory Setting: 170 0: disable A setting of 100% is equal to the Rated Output Current of the drive. During acceleration, the AC drive output current may increase abruptly and exceed the value specified by Pr.06.01 due to rapid acceleration or excessive load on the motor. When this function is enabled, the AC drive will stop accelerating and keep the output frequency constant until the current drops below the maximum value. 06.01 Over-Current Detection Level Output Frequency Over-Current Stall prevention during Acceleration, frequency held output current time setting frequency previous acceleration time actual acceleration time when over-current stall prevention is enabled 06.02 Over-current Stall Prevention during Operation Unit: 1 Settings 20 to 250% Factory Setting: 170 0: disable If the output current exceeds the setting specified in Pr.06.02 when the drive is operating, the drive will decrease its output frequency to prevent the motor stall. If the output current is lower than the setting specified in Pr.06.02, the drive will accelerate again to catch up with the set frequency command value.
  • 112. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-69 Over-Current Detection Level 06.02 Output Current Output Frequency Over-Current Stall Prevention during Operation, output frequency decrease over-current stall prevention during operation 06.03 Over-Torque Detection Mode (OL2) Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Over-Torque detection disabled. 1 Over-Torque detection enabled during constant speed operation. After over-torque is detected, keep running until OL1 or OL occurs. 2 Over-Torque detection enabled during constant speed operation. After over-torque is detected, stop running. 3 Over-Torque detection enabled during acceleration. After over- torque is detected, keep running until OL1 or OL occurs. 4 Over-Torque detection enabled during acceleration. After over- torque is detected, stop running. This parameter determines the operation mode of the drive after the over-torque (OL2) is detected via the following method: if the output current exceeds the over-torque detection level (Pr.06.04) longer than the setting of Pr.06.05 Over-Torque Detection Time, the warning message “OL2” is displayed. If a Multi-functional Output Terminal is set to over-torque detection (Pr.03.00=04), the output is on. Please refer to Pr.03.00 for details. 06.04 Over-Torque Detection Level (OL2) Unit: 1 Settings 10 to 200% Factory Setting: 150 This setting is proportional to the Rated Output Current of the drive. 06.05 Over-Torque Detection Time (OL2) Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.1 to 60.0 sec Factory Setting: 0.1
  • 113. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-70 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 This parameter sets the time for how long over-torque must be detected before “OL2” is displayed. 06.06 Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Selection (OL1) Factory Setting: 2 Settings 0 Operate with a Standard Motor (self-cooled by fan) 1 Operate with a Special Motor (forced external cooling) 2 Operation disabled This function is used to protect the motor from overloading or overheating. 40 20 60 80 100 25 50 100 150 rated frequency of the motor % ratedcurrentofthemotor% Standard motor (self-cooled by fan) rated frequency of the motor % ratedcurrentofthemotor% Special Motor (forced external cooling) 25 50 100 150 40 20 60 80 100 06.07 Electronic Thermal Characteristic Unit: 1 Settings 30 to 600 sec Factory Setting: 60 The parameter determines the time required for activating the I2 t electronic thermal protection function. The graph below shows I2 t curves for 150% output power for 1 minute. 350 50Hz or more 10Hz 5Hz 0 50 100 150 250200 300 250 200 150 100 50 Operation time (seconds) Load factor (%)
  • 114. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-71 06.08 Present Fault Record 06.09 Second Most Recent Fault Record 06.10 Third Most Recent Fault Record 06.11 Fourth Most Recent Fault Record 06.12 Fifth Most Recent Fault Record Factory Setting: 0 Readings 0 No fault 1 Over-current (oc) 2 Over-voltage (ov) 3 IGBT Overheat (oH1) 4 Reserved 5 Overload(oL) 6 Overload (oL1) 7 Motor Overload (oL2) 8 External Fault (EF) 9 Hardware protection failure (HPF) 10 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel.(ocA) 11 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel.(ocd) 12 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation (ocn) 13 Reserved 14 Phase-loss (PHL) 15 Reserved 16 Auto accel/decel failure (CFA) 17 Software/password protection (codE) 18 Power Board CPU WRITE Failure (cF1.0) 19 Power Board CPU READ Failure (cF2.0) 20 CC, OC Hardware protection failure (HPF1) 21 OV Hardware protection failure (HPF2) 22 GFF Hardware protection failure (HPF3) 23 OC Hardware protection failure (HPF4) 24 U-phase error (cF3.0) 25 V-phase error (cF3.1) 26 W-phase error (cF3.2) 27 DCBUS error (cF3.3) 28 IGBT Overheat (cF3.4)
  • 115. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-72 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 29-31 Reserved 32 ACI signal error (AErr) 33 Reserved 34 Motor PTC overheat protection (PtC1) 35-40 Reserved In Pr.06.08 to Pr.06.12 the five most recent faults that occurred, are stored. After removing the cause of the fault, use the reset command to reset the drive.
  • 116. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-73 Group 7: Motor Parameters 07.00 Motor Rated Current Unit: 1 Settings 30% FLA to 120% FLA Factory Setting: FLA Use the following formula to calculate the percentage value entered in this parameter: (Motor Current / AC Drive Current) x 100% with Motor Current=Motor rated current in A on type shield AC Drive Current=Rated current of AC drive in A (see Pr.00.01) 07.01 Motor No-load Current Unit: 1 Settings 0% FLA to 90% FLA Factory Setting: 0.4*FLA The rated current of the AC drive is regarded as 100%. The setting of the Motor no-load current will affect the slip compensation. The setting value must be less than Pr.07.00 (Motor Rated Current). 07.02 Torque Compensation Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.0 to 10.0 Factory Setting: 0.0 This parameter may be set so that the AC drive will increase its voltage output to obtain a higher torque. Too high torque compensation can overheat the motor. 07.03 Slip Compensation Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.00 to 10.00 Factory Setting: 0.00 While driving an asynchronous motor, increasing the load on the AC motor drive will cause an increase in slip and decrease in speed. This parameter may be used to compensate the slip by increasing the output frequency. When the output current of the AC motor drive is bigger than the motor no-load current (Pr.07.01), the AC drive will adjust its output frequency according to this parameter. 07.04 Reserved 07.05 Reserved 07.06 Reserved 07.07 Reserved 07.08 Reserved
  • 117. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-74 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 07.09 Reserved 07.10 Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Min.) Unit: 1 Settings 0~1439 Factory Setting: 0 07.11 Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Day) Unit: 1 Settings 0 ~65535 Factory Setting: 0 Pr.07.10 and Pr.07.11 are used to record the motor operation time. They can be cleared by setting to 0 and time is less than 1 minute is not recorded. 07.12 Motor PTC Overheat Protection Unit: 1 Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Disable 1 Enable 07.14 Motor PTC Overheat Protection Level Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.1~10.0V Factory Setting: 2.4 When the motor is running at low frequency for a long time, the cooling function of the motor fan will be lower. To prevent overheating, it needs to have a Positive Temperature Coefficient thermoistor on the motor and connect its output signal to the drive’s corresponding control terminals. When the source of first/second frequency command is set to AVI (02.00=1/02.09=1), it will disable the function of motor PTC overheat protection (i.e. Pr.07.12 cannot be set to 1). If temperature exceeds the setting level, motor will be coast to stop and is displayed. When the temperature decreases below the level of (Pr.07.15-Pr.07.16) and stops blinking, you can press RESET key to clear the fault. Pr.07.14 (overheat protection level) must exceed Pr.07.15 (overheat warning level). The PTC uses the AVI-input and is connected via resistor-divider as shown below. 1. The voltage between +10V to ACM: lies within 10.4V~11.2V. 2. The impedance for AVI is around 47kΩ. 3. Recommended value for resistor-divider R1 is 1~10kΩ. 4. Please contact your motor dealer for the curve of temperature and resistance value for PTC.
  • 118. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-75 AVI ACM +10V PTC VFD-EL 47kΩ resistor-divider R1 internal circuit Refer to following calculation for protection level and warning level. 1. Protection level Pr.07.14= V+10 * (RPTC1//47K) / [R1+( RPTC1//47K)] 2. Warning level Pr.07.16= V+10 * (RPTC2//47K) / [R1+( RPTC2//47K)] 3. Definition: V+10: voltage between +10V-ACM, Range 10.4~11.2VDC RPTC1: motor PTC overheat protection level. Corresponding voltage level set in Pr.07.14, RPTC2: motor PTC overheat warning level. Corresponding voltage level set in Pr.07.15, 47kΩ: is AVI input impedance, R1: resistor-divider (recommended value: 1~20kΩ) Take the standard PTC thermistor as example: if protection level is 1330Ω, the voltage between +10V-ACM is 10.5V and resistor-divider R1 is 4.4kΩ. Refer to following calculation for Pr.07.14 setting. 1330//47000=(1330*47000)/(1330+47000)=1293.4 10.5*1293.4/(4400+1293.4)=2.38(V) ≒2.4(V) Therefore, Pr.07.14 should be set to 2.4.
  • 119. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-76 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 550 1330 temperature ( )℃ resistor value ( )Ω Tr Tr-5℃ Tr+5℃ 07.15 Motor PTC Overheat Warning Level Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.1~10.0V Factory Setting: 1.2 07.16 Motor PTC Overheat Reset Delta Level Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.1~5.0V Factory Setting: 0.6 07.17 Treatment of the motor PTC Overheat Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Warn and RAMP to stop 1 Warn and COAST to stop 2 Warn and keep running If temperature exceeds the motor PTC overheat warning level (Pr.07.15), the drive will act according to Pr.07.17 and display . If the temperature decreases below the result (Pr.07.15 minus Pr.07.16), the warning display will disappear. 07.13 Input Debouncing Time of the PTC Protection Unit: 2ms Settings 0~9999 (is 0-19998ms) Factory Setting: 100 This parameter is to delay the signals on PTC analog input terminals. 1 unit is 2 msec, 2 units are 4 msec, etc.
  • 120. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-77 Group 8: Special Parameters 08.00 DC Brake Current Level Unit: 1 Settings 0 to 100% Factory Setting: 0 This parameter sets the level of DC Brake Current output to the motor during start-up and stopping. When setting DC Brake Current, the Rated Current (Pr.00.01) is regarded as 100%. It is recommended to start with a low DC Brake Current Level and then increase until proper holding torque has been achieved. 08.01 DC Brake Time during Start-up Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.0 to 60.0 sec Factory Setting: 0.0 This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current after a RUN command. When the time has elapsed, the AC motor drive will start accelerating from the Minimum Frequency (Pr.01.05). 08.02 DC Brake Time during Stopping Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.0 to 60.0 sec Factory Setting: 0.0 This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current during stopping. If stopping with DC Brake is desired, Pr.02.02 Stop Method must be set to 0 or 2 for Ramp to Stop. 08.03 Start-Point for DC Brake Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 0.00 This parameter determines the frequency when DC Brake will begin during deceleration. Run/Stop ON OFF 01.05 08.03 Output Frequency Minimum Output Frequency Start-Point for DC Brake Time during Stopping DC Brake Time during Stopping DC Brake Time
  • 121. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-78 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 DC Brake during Start-up is used for loads that may move before the AC drive starts, such as fans and pumps. Under such circumstances, DC Brake can be used to hold the load in position before setting it in motion. DC Brake during stopping is used to shorten the stopping time and also to hold a stopped load in position. For high inertia loads, a brake resistor for dynamic brake may also be needed for fast decelerations. 08.04 Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Operation stops (coast to stop) after momentary power loss. 1 Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the Master Frequency reference value. 2 Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the minimum frequency. This parameter determines the operation mode when the AC motor drive restarts from a momentary power loss. 08.05 Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.1 to 5.0 sec Factory Setting: 2.0 If the duration of a power loss is less than this parameter setting, the AC motor drive will resume operation. If it exceeds the Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time, the AC motor drive output is then turned off (coast stop). The selected operation after power loss in Pr.08.04 is only executed when the maximum allowable power loss time is ≤5 seconds and the AC motor drive displays “Lu”. But if the AC motor drive is powered off due to overload, even if the maximum allowable power loss time is ≤5 seconds, the operation mode as set in Pr.08.04 is not executed. In that case it starts up normally. 08.06 Base Block Speed Search Factory Setting: 1 Settings 0 Disable 1 Speed search starts with last frequency command 2 Speed search starts with minimum output frequency (Pr.01.05) This parameter determines the AC motor drive restart method after External Base Block is enabled.
  • 122. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-79 Output frequency (H) Output voltage(V) 08.08 Current Limit for Speed SearchSpeed FWD Run Time B.B. Fig 1:B.B. Speed Search with Last Output Frequency Downward Timing Chart (Speed Search Current Attains Speed Search Level) A Input B.B. signal Stop output voltage Disable B.B. signal Waiting time 08.07 Speed Search Synchronization speed detection Time B.B. Fig 2: B.B. Speed Search with Last Output Frequency Downward Timing Chart (Speed Search Current doesn't Attain Speed Search Level) A Input B.B. signal Stop output voltage Disable B.B. signal Waiting time 08.07 Speed Search Synchronization speed detection Output frequency (H) 08.08 Current Limit for Speed SearchSpeed FWD Run Time B.B. Fig3: B.B. Speed Search with Minimum Output Frequency Upward Timing Chart A Input B.B. signal Stop output voltage Disable B.B. signal Waiting time 08.07 Restart Synchronization speed detection Keep accelerating A Output frequency (H) 06.01 Over current stall prevention during acceleration FWD Run 08.07 Baseblock Time for Speed Search (BB) Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.1 to 5.0 sec Factory Setting: 0.5
  • 123. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-80 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 When momentary power loss is detected, the AC motor drive will block its output and then wait for a specified period of time (determined by Pr.08.07, called Base-Block Time) before resuming operation. This parameter should be set at a value to ensure that any residual regeneration voltage from the motor on the output has disappeared before the drive is activated again. This parameter also determines the waiting time before resuming operation after External Baseblock and Auto Restart after Fault (Pr.08.15). 08.08 Current Limit for Speed Search Unit: 1 Settings 30 to 200% Factory Setting: 150 Following a momentary power loss, the AC motor drive will start its speed search operation only if the output current is greater than the value set by Pr.08.08. When the output current is less than the value of Pr.08.08, the AC motor drive output frequency is at “speed synchronization point”. The drive will start to accelerate or decelerate back to the operating frequency at which it was running prior to the power loss. Output Frequency Output Voltage 08.06 08.05 08.04=1 08.06 08.05 08.04=2 Power Input Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time Baseblock Time Speed Search Speed Synchronization Detection Maximum Allowable Power Baseblock Time 08.09 Skip Frequency 1 Upper Limit Unit: 0.01 08.10 Skip Frequency 1 Lower Limit Unit: 0.01 08.11 Skip Frequency 2 Upper Limit Unit: 0.01 08.12 Skip Frequency 2 Lower Limit Unit: 0.01 08.13 Skip Frequency 3 Upper Limit Unit: 0.01 08.14 Skip Frequency 3 Lower Limit Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 0.00
  • 124. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-81 These parameters set the Skip Frequencies. It will cause the AC motor drive never to remain within these frequency ranges with continuous frequency output. These six parameters should be set as follows Pr.08.09 ≥ Pr.08.10 ≥ Pr.08.11 ≥ Pr.08.12 ≥ Pr.08.13 ≥ Pr.08.14. The frequency ranges may be overlapping. 0 08.09 08.10 08.11 08.12 08.13 08.14 setting frequency internalfrequencycommand 08.15 Auto Restart After Fault Unit: 1 Settings 0 to 10 Factory Setting: 0 0 Disable Only after an over-current OC or over-voltage OV fault occurs, the AC motor drive can be reset/restarted automatically up to 10 times. Setting this parameter to 0 will disable automatic reset/restart operation after any fault has occurred. When enabled, the AC motor drive will restart with speed search, which starts at the frequency before the fault. To set the waiting time before restart after a fault, please set Pr. 08.07 Base Block Time for Speed Search. 08.16 Auto Reset Time at Restart after Fault Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.1 to 6000 sec Factory Setting: 60.0 This parameter should be used in conjunction with Pr.08.15. For example: If Pr.08.15 is set to 10 and Pr.08.16 is set to 600s (10 min), and if there is no fault for over 600 seconds from the restart for the previous fault, the auto reset times for restart after fault will be reset to 10.
  • 125. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-82 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 08.17 Automatic Energy-saving Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Energy-saving operation disabled 1 Energy-saving operation enabled 70% 100% Output Voltage Output Frequency During auto-energy saving operation is the output voltage lowered as much as possible to keep the load. The output voltage is maximally lowered to 70% of the normal output voltage 08.18 Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR) Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 AVR function enabled 1 AVR function disabled 2 AVR function disabled for deceleration 3 AVR function disabled for stop The rated voltage of the motor is usually 230V/200VAC 50Hz/60Hz and the input voltage of the AC motor drive may vary between 180V to 264 VAC 50Hz/60Hz. Therefore, when the AC motor drive is used without AVR function, the output voltage will be the same as the input voltage. When the motor runs at voltages exceeding the rated voltage with 12% - 20%, its lifetime will be shorter and it can be damaged due to higher temperature, failing insulation and unstable torque output. AVR function automatically regulates the AC motor drive output voltage to the Maximum Output Voltage (Pr.01.02). For instance, if Pr.01.02 is set at 200 VAC and the input voltage is at 200V to 264VAC, then the Maximum Output Voltage will automatically be reduced to a maximum of 200VAC. When the motor ramps to stop, the deceleration time is longer. When setting this parameter to 2 with auto acceleration/deceleration, the deceleration will be quicker.
  • 126. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-83 08.19 Reserved 08.20 Compensation Coefficient for Motor Instability Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.0~5.0 Factory Setting: 0.0 The drift current will occur in a specific zone of the motor and it will make motor instable. By using this parameter, it will improve this situation greatly. The drift current zone of the high-power motors is usually in the low frequency area. It is recommended to set to more than 2.0.
  • 127. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-84 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Group 9: Communication Parameters There is a built-in RS-485 serial interface, marked RJ-45 near to the control terminals. The pins are defined below: RS-485 Serial interface 1: Reserved 2: EV 5: SG+ 6: Reserved 7: Reserved 8: Reserved 3: GND 4: SG- 8 1 Each VFD-EL AC motor drive has a pre-assigned communication address specified by Pr.09.00. The RS485 master then controls each AC motor drive according to its communication address. 09.00 Communication Address Settings 1 to 254 Factory Setting: 1 If the AC motor drive is controlled by RS-485 serial communication, the communication address for this drive must be set via this parameter. And the communication address for each AC motor drive must be different and unique. 09.01 Transmission Speed Factory Setting: 1 Settings 0 Baud rate 4800 bps (bits / second) 1 Baud rate 9600 bps 2 Baud rate 19200 bps 3 Baud rate 38400 bps This parameter is used to set the transmission speed between the RS485 master (PC, etc.) and AC motor drive. 09.02 Transmission Fault Treatment Factory Setting: 3 Settings 0 Warn and keep operating 1 Warn and RAMP to stop 2 Warn and COAST to stop 3 No warning and keep operating This parameter is set to how to react if transmission errors occur. See list of error messages below (see section 3.6.)
  • 128. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-85 09.03 Time-out Detection Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.0 to 120.0 sec Factory Setting: 0.0 0.0 Disable If Pr.09.03 is not equal to 0.0, Pr.09.02=0~2, and there is no communication on the bus during the Time Out detection period (set by Pr.09.03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad. 09.04 Communication Protocol Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,2> 1 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,1> 2 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,1> 3 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,2> 4 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,1> 5 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,1> 6 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,1> 7 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,2> 8 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,2> 9 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,1> 10 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,2> 11 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,2> 1. Control by PC A VFD-EL can be set up to communicate in Modbus networks using one of the following modes: ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) or RTU (Remote Terminal Unit). Users can select the desired mode along with the serial port communication protocol in Pr.09.04. Code Description: The CPU will be about 1 second delay when using communication reset. Therefore, there is at least 1 second delay time in master station. ASCII mode: Each 8-bit data is the combination of two ASCII characters. For example, a 1-byte data: 64 Hex, shown as ‘64’ in ASCII, consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex). Character ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘4’ ‘5’ ‘6’ ‘7’ ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H
  • 129. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-86 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Character ‘8’ ‘9’ ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘E’ ‘F’ ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H RTU mode: Each 8-bit data is the combination of two 4-bit hexadecimal characters. For example, 64 Hex. 2. Data Format For ASCII: ( 7.N.2) ( 7.E.1) Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Stop bit 10-bit character frame ( 7.O.1) Odd parity Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Stop bit 10-bit character frame Even parity Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Stop bit 7-bit character 10-bit character frame Stop bit 7-bit character 7-bit character ( 7.N.1) ( 7.E.2) Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Stop bit 11-bit character frame ( 7.O.2) Odd parity Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Stop bit 11-bit character frame Even parity Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Stop bit 7-bit character 9-bit character frame 7-bit character 7-bit character Stop bit Stop bit
  • 130. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-87 For RTU: Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Stop bit Stop bit 8-bit character 11-bit character frame ( 8.N.2 ) Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Even parity Stop bit 11-bit character frame ( 8.E.1 ) Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Stop bit 11-bit character frame ( 8.O.1 ) Odd parity 7 7 7 8-bit character 8-bit character Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Stop bit 8-bit character 10-bit character frame ( 8.N.1 ) Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Even parity Stop bit 12-bit character frame ( 8.E.2 ) Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Stop bit 12-bit character frame ( 8.O.2 ) Odd parity 7 7 7 8-bit character 8-bit character Stop bit Stop bit 3. Communication Protocol 3.1 Communication Data Frame: ASCII mode: STX Start character ‘:’ (3AH) Address Hi Address Lo Communication address: 8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes Function Hi Function Lo Command code: 8-bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes DATA (n-1) to DATA 0 Contents of data: Nx8-bit data consist of 2n ASCII codes n<=20, maximum of 40 ASCII codes
  • 131. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-88 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 LRC CHK Hi LRC CHK Lo LRC check sum: 8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCII codes END Hi END Lo End characters: END1= CR (0DH), END0= LF(0AH) RTU mode: START A silent interval of more than 10 ms Address Communication address: 8-bit address Function Command code: 8-bit command DATA (n-1) to DATA 0 Contents of data: n×8-bit data, n<=40 (20 x 16-bit data) CRC CHK Low CRC CHK High CRC check sum: 16-bit check sum consists of 2 8-bit characters END A silent interval of more than 10 ms 3.2 Address (Communication Address) Valid communication addresses are in the range of 0 to 254. A communication address equal to 0, means broadcast to all AC drives (AMD). In this case, the AMD will not reply any message to the master device. 00H: broadcast to all AC drives 01H: AC drive of address 01 0FH: AC drive of address 15 10H: AC drive of address 16 : FEH: AC drive of address 254 For example, communication to AMD with address 16 decimal (10H): ASCII mode: Address=’1’,’0’ => ‘1’=31H, ‘0’=30H RTU mode: Address=10H 3.3 Function (Function code) and DATA (data characters) The format of data characters depends on the function code. 03H: read data from register 06H: write single register 08H: loop detection The available function codes and examples for VFD-EL are described as follows:
  • 132. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-89 (1) 03H: multi read, read data from registers. Example: reading continuous 2 data from register address 2102H, AMD address is 01H. ASCII mode: Command message: Response message: STX ‘:’ STX ‘:’ ‘0’ ‘0’ Address ‘1’ Address ‘1’ ‘0’ ‘0’ Function ‘3’ Function ‘3’ ‘2’ ‘0’ ‘1’ Number of data (Count by byte) ‘4’ ‘0’ ‘1’ Starting data address ‘2’ ‘7’ ‘0’ ‘7’ ‘0’ Content of starting address 2102H ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ Number of data (count by word) ‘2’ ‘0’ ‘D’ ‘0’ LRC Check ‘7’ Content of address 2103H ‘0’ CR ‘7’ END LF LRC Check ‘1’ CR END LF RTU mode: Command message: Response message: Address 01H Address 01H Function 03H Function 03H 21HStarting data address 02H Number of data (count by byte) 04H 00H 17HNumber of data (count by word) 02H Content of address 2102H 70H
  • 133. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-90 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 CRC CHK Low 6FH 00H CRC CHK High F7H Content of address 2103H 00H CRC CHK Low FEH CRC CHK High 5CH (2) 06H: single write, write single data to register. Example: writing data 6000(1770H) to register 0100H. AMD address is 01H. ASCII mode: Command message: Response message: STX ‘:’ STX ‘:’ ‘0’ ‘0’ Address ‘1’ Address ‘1’ ‘0’ ‘0’ Function ‘6’ Function ‘6’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘1’ ‘0’ ‘0’ Data address ‘0’ Data address ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘1’ ‘7’ ‘7’ ‘7’ ‘7’ Data content ‘0’ Data content ‘0’ ‘7’ ‘7’ LRC Check ‘1’ LRC Check ‘1’ CR CR END LF END LF RTU mode: Command message: Response message: Address 01H Address 01H Function 06H Function 06H 01H 01H Data address 00H Data address 00H
  • 134. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-91 17H 17H Data content 70H Data content 70H CRC CHK Low 86H CRC CHK Low 86H CRC CHK High 22H CRC CHK High 22H 3.4 Check sum ASCII mode: LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check) is calculated by summing up, module 256, the values of the bytes from ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal representation of the 2’s-complement negation of the sum. For example, reading 1 word from address 0401H of the AC drive with address 01H. STX ‘:’ ‘0’Address 1 Address 0 ‘1’ ‘0’Function 1 Function 0 ‘3’ ‘0’ ‘4’ ‘0’ Starting data address ‘1’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ Number of data ‘1’ ‘F’LRC Check 1 LRC Check 0 ‘6’ CREND 1 END 0 LF 01H+03H+04H+01H+00H+01H=0AH, the 2’s-complement negation of 0AH is F6H.
  • 135. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-92 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 RTU mode: Address 01H Function 03H 21HStarting data address 02H 00HNumber of data (count by word) 02H CRC CHK Low 6FH CRC CHK High F7H CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps: Step 1: Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFH. Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of the 16-bit CRC register, putting the result in the CRC register. Step 3: Examine the LSB of CRC register. Step 4: If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling, then repeat step 3. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling, Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value A001H, then repeat step 3. Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 until eight shifts have been performed. When this is done, a complete 8-bit byte will have been processed. Step 6: Repeat step 2 to 5 for the next 8-bit byte of the command message. Continue doing this until all bytes have been processed. The final contents of the CRC register are the CRC value. When transmitting the CRC value in the message, the upper and lower bytes of the CRC value must be swapped, i.e. the lower order byte will be transmitted first. The following is an example of CRC generation using C language. The function takes two arguments: Unsigned char* data a pointer to the message buffer Unsigned char length the quantity of bytes in the message buffer The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer. Unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length){ int j; unsigned int reg_crc=0xFFFF; while(length--){ reg_crc ^= *data++;
  • 136. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-93 for(j=0;j<8;j++){ if(reg_crc & 0x01){ /* LSB(b0)=1 */ reg_crc=(reg_crc>>1) ^ 0xA001; }else{ reg_crc=reg_crc >>1; } } } return reg_crc; } 3.5 Address list The contents of available addresses are shown as below: Content Address Function AC drive Parameters GGnnH GG means parameter group, nn means parameter number, for example, the address of Pr 04.01 is 0401H. Refer to chapter 5 for the function of each parameter. When reading parameter by command code 03H, only one parameter can be read at one time. Bit 0-1 00B: No function 01B: Stop 10B: Run 11B: Jog + Run Bit 2-3 Reserved Bit 4-5 00B: No function 01B: FWD 10B: REV 11B: Change direction Bit 6-7 00B: Comm. forced 1st accel/decel 01B: Comm. forced 2nd accel/decel 2000H Bit 8-15 Reserved 2001H Frequency command Bit 0 1: EF (external fault) on Bit 1 1: Reset Command Write only 2002H Bit 2-15 Reserved
  • 137. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-94 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Content Address Function Error code: 0: No error occurred Status monitor Read only 2100H 1: Over-current (oc) 2: Over-voltage (ov) 3: IGBT Overheat (oH1) 4: Reserved 5: Overload (oL) 6: Overload1 (oL1) 7: Overload2 (oL2) 8: External fault (EF) 9: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel (ocA) 10: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel (ocd) 11: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation (ocn) 12: Ground Fault (GFF) 13: Reserved 14: PHL (Phase-Loss) 2100H 15: Reserved Status monitor Read only 16: Auto accel/decel failure (cFA) 17: Software protection enabled (codE) 18: Power Board CPU WRITE failure (CF1.0) 19: Power Board CPU READ failure (CF2.0) 20: CC, OC Hardware protection failure (HPF1) 21: OV Hardware protection failure (HPF2) 22: GFF Hardware protection failure (HPF3) 23: OC Hardware protection failure (HPF4) 24: U-phase error (cF3.0) 25: V-phase error (cF3.1) 26: W-phase error (cF3.2) 27: DCBUS error (cF3.3)
  • 138. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-95 Content Address Function 28: IGBT Overheat (cF3.4) 29: Reserved 30: Reserved 31: Reserved 32: ACI signal error (AErr) 33: Reserved 34: Motor PTC overheat protection (PtC1) Status of AC drive 00B: RUN LED is off, STOP LED is on (The AC motor Drive stops) 01B: RUN LED blinks, STOP LED is on (When AC motor drive decelerates to stop) 10B: RUN LED is on, STOP LED blinks (When AC motor drive is standby) Bit 0-1 11B: RUN LED is on, STOP LED is off (When AC motor drive runs) Bit 2 1: JOG command 00B: FWD LED is on, REV LED is off (When AC motor drive runs forward) 01B: FWD LED is on, REV LED blinks (When AC motor drive runs from reverse to forward) 10B: FWD LED blinks, REV LED is on (When AC motor drive runs from forward to reverse) Bit 3-4 11B: FWD LED is off, REV LED is on (When AC motor drive runs reverse) Bit 5-7 Reserved Bit 8 1: Master frequency Controlled by communication interface Bit 9 1: Master frequency controlled by analog signal Bit 10 1: Operation command controlled by communication interface 2101H Bit 11-15 Reserved 2102H Frequency command (F) 2103H Output frequency (H)
  • 139. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-96 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Content Address Function 2104H Output current (AXX.X) 2105H Reserved 2106H Display analog signal of PID feedback input terminal 2107H Reserved 2108H DC-BUS Voltage (UXXX.X) 2109H Output voltage (EXXX.X) 210AH Display temperature of IGBT (°C) 2116H User defined (Low word) 2117H User defined (High word) Note: 2116H is number display of Pr.00.04. High byte of 2117H is number of decimal places of 2116H. Low byte of 2117H is ASCII code of alphabet display of Pr.00.04. 3.6 Exception response: The AC motor drive is expected to return a normal response after receiving command messages from the master device. The following depicts the conditions when no normal response is replied to the master device. The AC motor drive does not receive the messages due to a communication error; thus, the AC motor drive has no response. The master device will eventually process a timeout condition. The AC motor drive receives the messages without a communication error, but cannot handle them. An exception response will be returned to the master device and an error message “CExx” will be displayed on the keypad of AC motor drive. The xx of “CExx” is a decimal code equal to the exception code that is described below. In the exception response, the most significant bit of the original command code is set to 1, and an exception code which explains the condition that caused the exception is returned. Example of an exception response of command code 06H and exception code 02H: ASCII mode: RTU mode: STX ‘:’ Address 01H ‘0’ Function 86HAddress Low Address High ‘1’ Exception code 02H ‘8’ CRC CHK Low C3HFunction Low Function High ‘6’ CRC CHK High A1H
  • 140. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-97 ‘0’ Exception code ‘2’ ‘7’LRC CHK Low LRC CHK High ‘7’ CREND 1 END 0 LF The explanation of exception codes: Exception code Explanation 01 Illegal function code: The function code received in the command message is not available for the AC motor drive. 02 Illegal data address: The data address received in the command message is not available for the AC motor drive. 03 Illegal data value: The data value received in the command message is not available for the AC drive. 04 Slave device failure: The AC motor drive is unable to perform the requested action. 10 Communication time-out: If Pr.09.03 is not equal to 0.0, Pr.09.02=0~2, and there is no communication on the bus during the Time Out detection period (set by Pr.09.03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad. 3.7 Communication program of PC: The following is a simple example of how to write a communication program for Modbus ASCII mode on a PC in C language. #include<stdio.h> #include<dos.h> #include<conio.h> #include<process.h> #define PORT 0x03F8 /* the address of COM1 */ /* the address offset value relative to COM1 */ #define THR 0x0000 #define RDR 0x0000
  • 141. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-98 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 #define BRDL 0x0000 #define IER 0x0001 #define BRDH 0x0001 #define LCR 0x0003 #define MCR 0x0004 #define LSR 0x0005 #define MSR 0x0006 unsigned char rdat[60]; /* read 2 data from address 2102H of AC drive with address 1 */ unsigned char tdat[60]={':','0','1','0','3','2','1','0',’2', '0','0','0','2','D','7','r','n'}; void main(){ int i; outportb(PORT+MCR,0x08); /* interrupt enable */ outportb(PORT+IER,0x01); /* interrupt as data in */ outportb(PORT+LCR,(inportb(PORT+LCR) | 0x80)); /* the BRDL/BRDH can be access as LCR.b7==1 */ outportb(PORT+BRDL,12); /* set baudrate=9600, 12=115200/9600*/ outportb(PORT+BRDH,0x00); outportb(PORT+LCR,0x06); /* set protocol, <7,N,2>=06H, <7,E,1>=1AH, <7,O,1>=0AH, <8,N,2>=07H, <8,E,1>=1BH, <8,O,1>=0BH */ for(i=0;i<=16;i++){ while(!(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x20)); /* wait until THR empty */ outportb(PORT+THR,tdat[i]); /* send data to THR */ } i=0; while(!kbhit()){ if(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x01){ /* b0==1, read data ready */ rdat[i++]=inportb(PORT+RDR); /* read data form RDR */ } } } 09.05 Reserved 09.06 Reserved 09.07 Response Delay Time Unit: 2ms Settings 0 ~ 200 (400msec) Factory Setting: 1 This parameter is the response delay time after AC drive receives communication command as shown in the following. 1 unit = 2 msec.
  • 142. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-99 RS485 BUS PC command Handling time of AC drive Response Delay Time Response Message of AC Drive Max.: 6msec Pr.09.07
  • 143. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-100 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Group 10: PID Control 10.00 PID Set Point Selection Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Disable 1 Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys 2 AVI 0 ~ +10VDC 3 ACI 4 ~ 20mA 4 PID set point (Pr.10.11) 10.01 Input Terminal for PID Feedback Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI (0 ~ +10VDC) 1 Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI (0 ~ +10VDC) 2 Positive PID feedback from external terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA) 3 Negative PID feedback from external terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA) Note that the measured variable (feedback) controls the output frequency (Hz). Select input terminal accordingly. Make sure this parameter setting does not conflict with the setting for Pr.10.00 (Master Frequency). When Pr.10.00 is set to 2 or 3, the set point (Master Frequency) for PID control is obtained from the AVI or ACI external terminal (0 to +10V or 4-20mA) or from multi-step speed. When Pr.10.00 is set to 1, the set point is obtained from the keypad. Negative feedback means: +target value – feedback Positive feedback means: -target value + feedback. 10.11 Source of PID Set point Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 0.00 This parameter is used in conjunction with Pr.10.00 set 4 to input a set point in Hz. 10.02 Proportional Gain (P) Unit: 0. 1 Settings 0.0 to 10.0 Factory Setting: 1.0 This parameter specifies proportional control and associated gain (P). If the other two gains (I and D) are set to zero, proportional control is the only one effective. With 10% deviation (error) and P=1, the output will be P x10% x Master Frequency.
  • 144. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-101 When P is greater than 1, it will decrease the deviation and get the faster response speed. But if setting too large value in Pr.10.02, it may cause the increased deviation during the stable area. NOTE The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning. 10.03 Integral Time ( I ) Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.00 to 100.0 sec Factory Setting: 1.00 0.00 Disable This parameter specifies integral control (continual sum of the deviation) and associated gain (I). When the integral gain is set to 1 and the deviation is fixed, the output is equal to the input (deviation) once the integral time setting is attained. It can use integral time to eliminate the deviation during the stable area. If setting too large value in Pr.10.03, it may cause lower system response. NOTE The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning. 10.04 Derivative Control (D) Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.00 to 1.00 sec Factory Setting: 0.00 This parameter specifies derivative control (rate of change of the input) and associated gain (D). With this parameter set to 1, the PID output is equal to differential time x (present deviation − previous deviation). It increases the response speed but it may cause over- compensation. NOTE The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning. 10.05 Upper Bound for Integral Control Unit: 1 Settings 0 to 100 % Factory Setting: 100
  • 145. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-102 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 This parameter defines an upper bound or limit for the integral gain (I) and therefore limits the Master Frequency. The formula is: Integral upper bound = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) x (Pr.10.05). This parameter can limit the Maximum Output Frequency. 10.06 Primary Delay Filter Time Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.0 to 2.5 sec Factory Setting: 0.0 To avoid amplification of measurement noise in the controller output, a derivative digital filter is inserted. This filter helps to dampen oscillations. The complete PID diagram is in the following: P 10.02 I 10.03 D 10.04 10.05 10.10 10.07 10.06 10.01 + - + + + Setpoint Input Freq. Gain PID feedback Integral gain limit Output Freq. Limit Digital filter Freq. Command 10.07 PID Output Frequency Limit Unit: 1 Settings 0 to 110 % Factory Setting: 100 This parameter defines the percentage of output frequency limit during the PID control. The formula is Output Frequency Limit = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) X Pr.10.07 %. This parameter will limit the Maximum Output Frequency. An overall limit for the output frequency can be set in Pr.01.07. 10.08 PID Feedback Signal Detection Time Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.0 to d 3600 sec Factory Setting: 60.0 This function in only for ACI signal. This parameter defines the time during which the PID feedback must be abnormal before a warning (see Pr.10.09) is given. It also can be modified according to the system feedback signal time. If this parameter is set to 0.0, the system would not detect any abnormality signal.
  • 146. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-103 10.09 Treatment of the Erroneous Feedback Signals (for PID feedback error) Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Warning and RAMP to stop 1 Warning and COAST to stop 2 Warning and keep operating This function in only for ACI signal. AC motor drive action when the feedback signals (analog PID feedback) are abnormal according to Pr.10.16. 10.10 Gain Over the PID Detection Value Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.0 to 10.0 Factory Setting: 1.0 This is the gain adjustment over the feedback detection value. Refer to PID control block diagram in Pr.10.06 for detail. 10.12 PID Feedback Level Unit: 0.1 Settings 1.0 to 50.0% Factory Setting: 10.0 10.13 Detection Time of PID Feedback Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.1 to 300.0 sec Factory Setting: 5.0 This parameter is used to set detection of the offset between set point and feedback. When the offset is higher than (the setting of Pr.10.12 X Pr.01.00) for a time exceeding the setting of Pr.10.13, the AC motor drive will output a signal when Pr.03.00 is set to 16 and will act according to Pr.10.20. 10.14 Sleep/Wake Up Detection Time Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.0 to 6550 sec Factory Setting: 0.0 10.15 Sleep Frequency Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.00 to 600.0 Hz Factory Setting: 0.00 10.16 Wakeup Frequency Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.00 to 600.0 Hz Factory Setting: 0.00 When the actual output frequency ≤ Pr.10.15 and the time exceeds the setting of Pr.10.14, the AC motor drive will be in sleep mode.
  • 147. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-104 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 When the actual frequency command > Pr.10.16 and the time exceeds the setting of Pr.10.14, the AC motor drive will restart. When the AC motor drive is in sleep mode, frequency command is still calculated by PID. When frequency reaches wake up frequency, AC motor drive will accelerate from Pr.01.05 minimum frequency following the V/f curve. The wake up frequency must be higher than sleep frequency. 10.16 10.15 01.05 10.14 Frequency The limit of decel. time frequency calculated by PID output frequency Time The limit of accel. time Fmin Fsleep Fcmd=0 Fout = 0 lower bound of frequency Fmin<Fsleep< lower bound of frequency When output frequency ≤ sleep frequency and time > detection time, it will go in sleep mode. When min. output frequency ≦ PID frequency ≦ lower bound of frequency and sleep function is enabled (output frequency ≤ sleep frequency and time > detection time), frequency will be 0 (in sleep mode). If sleep function is disabled, frequency command = lower bound frequency. When PID frequency < min. output frequency and sleep function is enabled (output frequency ≤ sleep frequency and time > detection time), output frequency =0 (in sleep mode). If output frequency ≤ sleep frequency but time < detection time, frequency command = lower frequency. If sleep function is disabled, output frequency =0.
  • 148. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-105 10.17 Minimum PID Output Frequency Selection Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 By PID control 1 By Minimum output frequency (Pr.01.05) This is the source selection of minimum output frequency when control is by PID. 10.18 PID Control Detection Signal Reference Unit: 0.1 Settings 1.0 to 99.9 Factory Setting: 99.9 When Pr.00.04 is set to 8, it will display 00:00 as follows. This parameter is used only for display and has no relation with Pr.00.13, Pr.00.14, Pr.02.18 and Pr.02.19. (the max. value you would like to convert) Setpoint Feedback value 10.19 PID Calculation Mode Selection Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Series mode 1 Parallel mode Series mode P 10.02 I 10.03 D 10.04 10.05 10.10 10.07 10.06 10.01 + - + + + Setpoint Input Freq. Gain PID feedback Integral gain limit Output Freq. Limit Digital filter Freq. Command Parallel mode
  • 149. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-106 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 P 10.02 I 10.03 D 10.04 10.05 10.10 10.07 10.06 10.01 + - + + + Setpoint Input Freq. Gain PID feedback Integral gain limit Output Freq. Limit Digital filter Freq. Command 10.20 Treatment of the Erroneous PID Feedback Level Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Keep operating 1 Coast to stop 2 Ramp to stop 3 Ramp to stop and restart after time set in Pr.10.21 In PID control mode, it will act according to Pr.10.20 when erroneous PID feedback level occurs. 10.21 Restart Delay Time after Erroneous PID Deviation Level Unit: 1 Settings 1 to 9999 sec Factory Setting: 60 10.22 Set Point Deviation Level Unit: 1 Settings 0 to 100% Factory Setting: 0 10.23 Detection Time of Set Point Deviation Level Unit: 1 Settings 1 to 9999 sec Factory Setting: 10 When the deviation is less than Pr.10.22 (in the range of PID set point to Pr.10.22 X PID set point) for a time exceeding the setting of Pr.10.23, the AC motor drive will decelerate to stop to be constant pressure status (This deceleration time is the setting of Pr.01.12). The system will be ready when the deviation is within the range of PID set point to Pr.10.22 X PID set point during deceleration.
  • 150. Chapter 4 Parameters| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4-107 Example: suppose that the set point of constant pressure control of a pump is 4kg, Pr.10.22 is set to 5%, Pr.10.23 is set to 15 seconds. It means that deviation is 0.2kg (4kgX5%=0.2kg), i.e. when feedback value is higher than 3.8kg for a time exceeding 15 seconds, the AC motor drive will decelerate to stop (this deceleration time will act according to Pr.01.12). When the feedback value is less than 3.8kg, the AC motor drive will start to run. 10.24 Offset Level of Liquid Leakage Unit: 1 Settings 0 to 50% Factory Setting: 0 In the constant pressure status, when the liquid leakage is higher than Pr.10.24 X PID set point, the AC motor drive will start to run. It is used to prevent frequent run/stop operation due to liquid leakage. 10.24 set point feedback value Offset level of liquid leakage 10.25 Liquid Leakage Change Detection Unit: 1 Settings 0 to 100% (0:disable) Factory Setting: 0 10.26 Time Setting for Liquid Leakage Change Unit: 0.1 Settings 0.1 to 10.0 sec (0:disable) Factory Setting: 0.5 When the change of feedback value is less than the settings of Pr.10.25 and Pr.10.26, it means that the liquid is leaking. When the system is in constant pressure status, the AC motor drive will start to run if the feedback value is higher than these two settings. set point feedback value 10.25 10.26
  • 151. Chapter 4 Parameters| 4-108 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Example: suppose that the set point of constant pressure control of a pump is 4kg, Pr.10.22 is set to 5%, Pr.10.23 is set to 15 seconds, Pr.10.24 is set to 25%, Pr.10.25 is set to 3% and Pr.10.26 is set to 0.5 seconds. It means that offset is 0.2kg (4kgX5%=0.2kg), i.e. when feedback value is higher than 3.8kg for a time exceeding 15 seconds, the AC motor drive will decelerate to stop (this deceleration time will act according to Pr.01.12). When the feedback value is less than 3.8kg, the AC motor drive will start to run. Status 1: Suppose that the AC motor drive is in the constant pressure status and the feedback change value is less than 0.12kg within 0.5 seconds. The AC motor drive won’t run until the feedback value is decreased by this proportion to the value less than 3kg. Status 2: When the AC motor drive is in constant pressure, it won’t run until the feedback change value is less than 3.88kg (4-4kgX3%=3.88kg) for a time exceeding 0.5 seconds. 10.27 | 10.33 Reserved
  • 152. Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 5-1 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5.1 Over Current (OC) ocA ocd OC Over-current during acceleration Over-current during deceleration Over current Check if there is any between the U, V, W and motor short circuits and grounding Yes No No No No No No Yes YesYes Remove short circuit or ground fault Reduce the load or increase the power of AC motor drive NoNo Reduce torque compensation Reduce torque compensation Suitable torque compensation No No No NoNo Yes Yes Yes YesYes Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or error due to noise. Please contact with DELTA. Can acceleration time be made longer? Can deceleration time be made longer? Reduce load or increase the power of AC motor drive Check braking method. Please contact DELTA Reduce load or increase the power of AC motor drive Has load changed suddenly? Check if acceleration time is too short by load inertia. Check if deceleration time is too short by load inertia. Increase accel/decel time Check if load is too large
  • 153. Chapter 5 Troubleshooting| 5-2 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 5.2 Ground Fault GFF Ground fault No Yes Is output circuit(cable or motor) of AC motor drive grounded? Remove ground fault Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise. Please contact DELTA. 5.3 Over Voltage (OV) Over voltage Yes No Yes No No No Is voltage within specification Reduce voltage to be within spec. Has over-voltage occurred without load Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise. Please contact with DELTA. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No When OV occurs, check if the voltage of DC BUS is greater than protection value Dose OV occur when sudden acceleration stops Increase deceleration time Increase setting time Increase acceleration time Reduce moment of inertia Reduce moment of load inertia Use braking unit or DC braking Need to check control method. Please contact DELTA. Need to consider using braking unit or DC braking
  • 154. Chapter 5 Troubleshooting| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 5-3 5.4 Low Voltage (Lv) Low voltage Is input power correct? Or power cut, including momentary power loss Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No Restart after reset Check if there is any malfunction component in power supply circuit or disconnection Change defective component and check connection Check if voltage is within specification Make necessary corrections, such as change power supply system for requirement Check if there is heavy load with high start current in the same power system Check if Lv occurs when breaker and magnetic contactor is ON Suitable transformer power capacity Check if voltage between +/B1 and - is greater than 200VDC (for 115V/230V models) 400VDC (for 460V models) Maybe AC motor drive has m alfunction. Please contact DELTA. Control circuit has malfunction or misoperation due to noise. Please contact DELTA. Yes
  • 155. Chapter 5 Troubleshooting| 5-4 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 5.5 Over Heat (OH1) AC motor drive overheats Heat sink overheats Check if temperature of heat sink is greater than 90 O C No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Reduce load No Temperature detection malfunctions. Please contact DELTA. If cooling fan functions normally Change cooling fan Check if cooling fan is jammed Remove obstruction Check if surrounding temperature is within specification Adjust surrounding temperature to specification Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise. Please contact DELTA. Is load too large 5.6 Overload OL1/ OL2OL Reduce load or increase the power of AC motor drive Check for correct settings at Pr. 06-06 and 06-07 Yes Yes No No Modify setting Is load too large Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise.
  • 156. Chapter 5 Troubleshooting| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 5-5 5.7 Keypad Display is Abnormal Abnormal display or no display Cycle power to AC motor drive No Yes Yes Yes No Display normal? AC motor drive works normally Fix connector and eliminate noise Check if all connectors are connect correctly and no noise is present AC motor drive has malfunction. Please contact DELTA. 5.8 Phase Loss (PHL) Phase loss No No Yes Yes Check wiring at R, S and T terminals Correct wiring Check if the screws of terminals are tightened No Tighten all screws Yes Please check the wiring and power system for abnormal power Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise. Please contact DELTA. Check if the input voltage of R, S, T is unbalanced
  • 157. Chapter 5 Troubleshooting| 5-6 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 5.9 Motor cannot Run Motor cannot run Check keypad for normal display No No No No No NoNo No No No No No No No Check if non-fuse breaker and magnetic contactor are ON Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Set them to ON Reset after clearing fault and then RUN Check if there is any fault code displayed Check if input voltage is normal Check if any faults occur, such as Lv, PHL or disconnection Input "RUN" command by keypad It can run when no faults occur Press RUN key to check if it can run Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise. Please contact DELTA. Press UP key to set frequency Yes Modify frequency setting Check if input FWD or REV command Check if the wiring of terminal MI1 and between MI2-DCM is correct Yes Change switch or relay Set frequency or not Press UP to check if motor can run Correct connection Check if the parameter setting and wiring of analog signal and multi-step speed are correct No Motor has malfunction No Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction. Please contact DELTA. Check if there is any output voltage from terminals U, V and W Check if motor connection is correct No Connect correctly Check if the setting of torque compensation is correct Increase the setting of torque compensation Motor is locked due to large load, please reduce load. For example, if there is a brake, check if it is released. If load is too large if upper bound freq. and setting freq. is lower than the min. output freq. Yes Change defective potentiometer and relay Yes
  • 158. Chapter 5 Troubleshooting| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 5-7 5.10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed Motor can run but cannot change speed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No Check if the setting of the max. frequency is too low If the setting of frequency is out of range(upper/lower) bound Modify the setting Modify the setting Yes If the setting of Pr.05-00 to Pr.05-14 are the same Press UP/DOWN key to see if speed has any change If there is any change of the signal that sets frequency (0-10V and 4-20mA) Check if the wiring between M1~M6 to DCM is correct Connect correctly Check if frequency for each step is different Check if the wiring of external terminal is correct Change frequency setting If accel./decel. time is very long Please set suitable accel./decel. time by load inertia Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise. Please contact DELTA. Change defective potentiometer No
  • 159. Chapter 5 Troubleshooting| 5-8 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 5.11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration Motor stalls during acceleration Check if acceleration time is too short Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No Increase setting time Yes Use special motor? Reduce load or increase the capacity of AC motor drive Check if the inertia of the motor and load is too high Check for low voltage at input Check if the load torque is too high Yes Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise. Please contact DELTA Increase torque compensation Check if the torque compensation is suitable Thicken or shorten the wiring between the motor or AC motor drive Reduce load or increase the capacity of AC motor drive 5.12 The Motor does not Run as Expected Check Pr. 01-01 thru Pr. 01-06 and torque compensation settings No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Adjust Pr.01-01 to Pr.01-06 and lower torque compensation Run in low speed continuously Is load too large Please use specific motor Reduce load or increase the capacity of AC motor drive Check if output voltage of U, V, W is balanced Motor has malfunction Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise. Please contact DELTA. Motor does not run as expected
  • 160. Chapter 5 Troubleshooting| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 5-9 5.13 Electromagnetic/Induction Noise Many sources of noise surround AC motor drives and penetrate it by radiation or conduction. It may cause malfunctioning of the control circuits and even damage the AC motor drive. Of course, there are solutions to increase the noise tolerance of an AC motor drive. But this has its limits. Therefore, solving it from the outside as follows will be the best. 1. Add surge suppressor on the relays and contacts to suppress switching surges. 2. Shorten the wiring length of the control circuit or serial communication and keep them separated from the power circuit wiring. 3. Comply with the wiring regulations by using shielded wires and isolation amplifiers for long length. 4. The grounding terminal should comply with the local regulations and be grounded independently, i.e. not to have common ground with electric welding machines and other power equipment. 5. Connect a noise filter at the mains input terminal of the AC motor drive to filter noise from the power circuit. VFD-EL can have a built-in filter as option. In short, solutions for electromagnetic noise exist of “no product”(disconnect disturbing equipment), “no spread”(limit emission for disturbing equipment) and “no receive”(enhance immunity). 5.14 Environmental Condition Since the AC motor drive is an electronic device, you should comply with the environmental conditions. Here are some remedial measures if necessary. 1. To prevent vibration, the use of anti-vibration dampers is the last choice. Vibrations must be within the specification. Vibration causes mechanical stress and it should not occur frequently, continuously or repeatedly to prevent damage to the AC motor drive. 2. Store the AC motor drive in a clean and dry location, free from corrosive fumes/dust to prevent corrosion and poor contacts. Poor insulation in a humid location can cause short- circuits. If necessary, install the AC motor drive in a dust-proof and painted enclosure and in particular situations, use a completely sealed enclosure. 3. The ambient temperature should be within the specification. Too high or too low temperature will affect the lifetime and reliability. For semiconductor components, damage will occur once any specification is out of range. Therefore, it is necessary to periodically check air quality and the cooling fan and provide extra cooling of necessary. In addition, the microcomputer may not work in extremely low temperatures, making cabinet heating necessary.
  • 161. Chapter 5 Troubleshooting| 5-10 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 4. Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing environment. Use an air conditioner and/or exsiccator. 5.15 Affecting Other Machines An AC motor drive may affect the operation of other machines due to many reasons. Some solutions are: High Harmonics at Power Side High harmonics at power side during running can be improved by: 1. Separate the power system: use a transformer for AC motor drive. 2. Use a reactor at the power input terminal of the AC motor drive. 3. If phase lead capacitors are used (never on the AC motor drive output!!), use serial reactors to prevent damage to the capacitors damage from high harmonics. serial reactor phase lead capacitor Motor Temperature Rises When the motor is a standard induction motor with fan, the cooling will be bad at low speeds, causing the motor to overheat. Besides, high harmonics at the output increases copper and core losses. The following measures should be used depending on load and operation range. 1. Use a motor with independent ventilation (forced external cooling) or increase the motor rated power. 2. Use a special inverter duty motor. 3. Do NOT run at low speeds for long time.
  • 162. Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 6-1 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance 6.1 Fault Code Information The AC motor drive has a comprehensive fault diagnostic system that includes several different alarms and fault messages. Once a fault is detected, the corresponding protective functions will be activated. The following faults are displayed as shown on the AC motor drive digital keypad display. The five most recent faults can be read from the digital keypad or communication. NOTE Wait 5 seconds after a fault has been cleared before performing reset via keypad of input terminal. 6.1.1 Common Problems and Solutions Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions Over current Abnormal increase in current. 1. Check if motor power corresponds with the AC motor drive output power. 2. Check the wiring connections to U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 for possible short circuits. 3. Check the wiring connections between the AC motor drive and motor for possible short circuits, also to ground. 4. Check for loose contacts between AC motor drive and motor. 5. Increase the Acceleration Time. 6. Check for possible excessive loading conditions at the motor. 7. If there are still any abnormal conditions when operating the AC motor drive after a short- circuit is removed and the other points above are checked, it should be sent back to manufacturer. Over voltage The DC bus voltage has exceeded its maximum allowable value. 1. Check if the input voltage falls within the rated AC motor drive input voltage range. 2. Check for possible voltage transients. 3. DC-bus over-voltage may also be caused by motor regeneration. Either increase the Decel. Time or add an optional brake resistor (and brake unit). 4. Check whether the required brake power is within the specified limits.
  • 163. Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance| 6-2 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions Overheating Heat sink temperature too high 1. Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within the specified temperature range. 2. Make sure that the ventilation holes are not obstructed. 3. Remove any foreign objects from the heatsinks and check for possible dirty heat sink fins. 4. Check the fan and clean it. 5. Provide enough spacing for adequate ventilation. (See chapter 1) Low voltage The AC motor drive detects that the DC bus voltage has fallen below its minimum value. 1. Check whether the input voltage falls within the AC motor drive rated input voltage range. 2. Check for abnormal load in motor. 3. Check for correct wiring of input power to R-S- T (for 3-phase models) without phase loss. Overload The AC motor drive detects excessive drive output current. NOTE: The AC motor drive can withstand up to 150% of the rated current for a maximum of 60 seconds. 1. Check whether the motor is overloaded. 2. Reduce torque compensation setting in Pr.07.02. 3. Use the next higher power AC motor drive model. Overload 1 Internal electronic overload trip 1. Check for possible motor overload. 2. Check electronic thermal overload setting. 3. Use a higher power motor. 4. Reduce the current level so that the drive output current does not exceed the value set by the Motor Rated Current Pr.07.00. Overload 2 Motor overload. 1. Reduce the motor load. 2. Adjust the over-torque detection setting to an appropriate setting (Pr.06.03 to Pr.06.05). CC (current clamp) OV hardware error GFF hardware error OC hardware error Return to the factory. External Base Block. (Refer to Pr. 08.07) 1. When the external input terminal (B.B) is active, the AC motor drive output will be turned off. 2. Deactivate the external input terminal (B.B) to operate the AC motor drive again.
  • 164. Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 6-3 Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions Over-current during acceleration 1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible poor insulation at the output lines. 2. Torque boost too high: Decrease the torque compensation setting in Pr.07.02. 3. Acceleration Time too short: Increase the Acceleration Time. 4. AC motor drive output power is too small: Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher power model. Over-current during deceleration 1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible poor insulation at the output line. 2. Deceleration Time too short: Increase the Deceleration Time. 3. AC motor drive output power is too small: Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher power model. Over-current during constant speed operation 1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible poor insulation at the output line. 2. Sudden increase in motor loading: Check for possible motor stall. 3. AC motor drive output power is too small: Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher power model. External Fault 1. When multi-function input terminals (MI3-MI9) are set to external fault, the AC motor drive stops output U, V and W. 2. Give RESET command after fault has been cleared. Internal EEPROM can not be programmed. Return to the factory. Internal EEPROM can not be programmed. Return to the factory. Internal EEPROM can not be read. 1. Press RESET key to set all parameters to factory setting. 2. Return to the factory. Internal EEPROM can not be read. 1. Press RESET key to set all parameters to factory setting. 2. Return to the factory. U-phase error V-phase error W-phase error OV or LV Temperature sensor error Return to the factory.
  • 165. Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance| 6-4 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions Ground fault When (one of) the output terminal(s) is grounded, short circuit current is more than 50% of AC motor drive rated current, the AC motor drive power module may be damaged. NOTE: The short circuit protection is provided for AC motor drive protection, not for protection of the user. 1. Check whether the IGBT power module is damaged. 2. Check for possible poor insulation at the output line. Auto accel/decel failure 1. Check if the motor is suitable for operation by AC motor drive. 2. Check if the regenerative energy is too large. 3. Load may have changed suddenly. Communication Error 1. Check the RS485 connection between the AC motor drive and RS485 master for loose wires and wiring to correct pins. 2. Check if the communication protocol, address, transmission speed, etc. are properly set. 3. Use the correct checksum calculation. 4. Please refer to group 9 in the chapter 5 for detail information. Software protection failure Return to the factory. Analog signal error Check the wiring of ACI PID feedback signal error 1. Check parameter settings (Pr.10.01) and AVI/ACI wiring. 2. Check for possible fault between system response time and the PID feedback signal detection time (Pr.10.08) Phase Loss Check input phase wiring for loose contacts.
  • 166. Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 6-5 6.1.2 Reset There are three methods to reset the AC motor drive after solving the fault: 1. Press key on keypad. 2. Set external terminal to “RESET” (set one of Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08 to 05) and then set to be ON. 3. Send “RESET” command by communication. NOTE Make sure that RUN command or signal is OFF before executing RESET to prevent damage or personal injury due to immediate operation. 6.2 Maintenance and Inspections Modern AC motor drives are based on solid-state electronics technology. Preventive maintenance is required to keep the AC motor drive in its optimal condition, and to ensure a long life. It is recommended to have a qualified technician perform a check-up of the AC motor drive regularly. Daily Inspection: Basic check-up items to detect if there were any abnormalities during operation are: 1. Whether the motors are operating as expected. 2. Whether the installation environment is abnormal. 3. Whether the cooling system is operating as expected. 4. Whether any irregular vibration or sound occurred during operation. 5. Whether the motors are overheating during operation. 6. Always check the input voltage of the AC drive with a Voltmeter. Periodic Inspection: Before the check-up, always turn off the AC input power and remove the cover. Wait at least 10 minutes after all display lamps have gone out, and then confirm that the capacitors have fully discharged by measuring the voltage between ~ . It should be less than 25VDC.
  • 167. Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance| 6-6 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 DANGER! 1. Disconnect AC power before processing! 2. Only qualified personnel can install, wire and maintain AC motor drives. Please take off any metal objects, such as watches and rings, before operation. And only insulated tools are allowed. 3. Never reassemble internal components or wiring. 4. Prevent static electricity. Periodical Maintenance Ambient environment Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half Year One Year Check the ambient temperature, humidity, vibration and see if there are any dust, gas, oil or water drops Visual inspection and measurement with equipment with standard specification Check if there are any dangerous objects in the environment Visual inspection Voltage Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half Year One Year Check if the voltage of main circuit and control circuit is correct Measure with multimeter with standard specification
  • 168. Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 6-7 Keypad Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half Year One Year Is the display clear for reading? Visual inspection Any missing characters? Visual inspection Mechanical parts Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half Year One Year If there is any abnormal sound or vibration Visual and aural inspection If there are any loose screws Tighten the screws If any part is deformed or damaged Visual inspection If there is any color change by overheating Visual inspection If there is any dust or dirt Visual inspection Main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half Year One Year If there are any loose or missing screws Tighten or replace the screw If machine or insulator is deformed, cracked, damaged or with changed color change due to overheating or ageing Visual inspection NOTE: Please ignore the color change of copper plate If there is any dust or dirt Visual inspection
  • 169. Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance| 6-8 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Terminals and wiring of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half Year One Year If the wiring shows change of color change or deformation due to overheat Visual inspection If the insulation of wiring is damaged or the color has changed Visual inspection If there is any damage Visual inspection DC capacity of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half Year One Year If there is any leakage of liquid, change of color, cracks or deformation Visual inspection Measure static capacity when required Static capacity ≥ initial value X 0.85 Resistor of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half Year One Year If there is any peculiar smell or insulator cracks due to overheating Visual inspection, smell If there is any disconnection Visual inspection or measure with multimeter after removing wiring between +/B1 ~ - Resistor value should be within ± 10%
  • 170. Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 6-9 Transformer and reactor of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half Year One Year If there is any abnormal vibration or peculiar smell Visual, aural inspection and smell Magnetic contactor and relay of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half Year One Year If there are any loose screws Visual and aural inspection. Tighten screw if necessary. If the contact works correctly Visual inspection Printed circuit board and connector of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half Year One Year If there are any loose screws and connectors Tighten the screws and press the connectors firmly in place. If there is any peculiar smell and color change Visual inspection and smell If there is any crack, damage, deformation or corrosion Visual inspection If there is any leaked liquid or deformation in capacitors Visual inspection
  • 171. Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance| 6-10 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Cooling fan of cooling system Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half Year One Year If there is any abnormal sound or vibration Visual, aural inspection and turn the fan with hand (turn off the power before operation) to see if it rotates smoothly If there is any loose screw Tighten the screw If there is any change of color due to overheating Change fan Ventilation channel of cooling system Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half Year One Year If there is any obstruction in the heat sink, air intake or air outlet Visual inspection
  • 172. Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Appendix A Specifications There are 115V, 230V and 460V models in the VFD-EL series. For 115V models, it is 1-phase models. For 0.25 to 3HP of the 230V models, there are 1-phase/3-phase models. Refer to following specifications for details. Voltage Class 115V Class Model Number VFD-XXXEL 002 004 007 Max. Applicable Motor Output (kW) 0.2 0.4 0.75 Max. Applicable Motor Output (hp) 0.25 0.5 1.0 Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 0.6 1.0 1.6 Rated Output Current (A) 1.6 2.5 4.2 Maximum Output Voltage (V) 3-Phase Proportional to Twice the Input Voltage Output Frequency (Hz) 0.1~600 Hz OutputRating Carrier Frequency (kHz) 2-12 Rated Input Current (A) 6.4 9 18 Rated Voltage/Frequency Single phase, 100-120V, 50/60Hz Voltage Tolerance ± 10%(90~132 V) InputRating Frequency Tolerance ± 5%(47~63 Hz) Cooling Method Natural Cooling Weight (kg) 1.1 1.1 1.4 Voltage Class 230V Class Model Number VFD-XXXEL 002 004 007 015 022 037 Max. Applicable Motor Output (kW) 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 Max. Applicable Motor Output (hp) 0.25 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 0.6 1.0 1.6 2.9 4.2 6.5 Rated Output Current (A) 1.6 2.5 4.2 7.5 11.0 17 Maximum Output Voltage (V) 3-Phase Proportional to Input Voltage Output Frequency (Hz) 0.1~600 Hz OutputRating Carrier Frequency (kHz) 2-12 Rated Input Current (A) 4.9 6.5 9.5 15.7 24 -- XXXEL 21A Rated Voltage/Frequency 1-phase, 200-240 V, 50/60Hz Rated Input Current (A) 1.9 2.7 4.9 9 15 20.6 XXXEL 23A Rated Voltage/Frequency 3-phase, 200-240V, 50/60Hz Voltage Tolerance ± 10%(180~264 V) InputRating Frequency Tolerance ± 5%(47~63 Hz) Cooling Method Natural Cooling Fan Cooling Weight (kg) 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.7 1.7 1.7
  • 173. Appendix A Specifications| A-2 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Voltage Class 460V Class Model Number VFD-XXXEL 004 007 015 022 037 Max. Applicable Motor Output (kW) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 Max. Applicable Motor Output (hp) 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 1.2 2.0 3.3 4.4 6.8 Rated Output Current (A) 1.5 2.5 4.2 5.5 8.2 Maximum Output Voltage (V) 3-Phase Proportional to Input Voltage Output Frequency (Hz) 0.1~600 Hz OutputRating Carrier Frequency (kHz) 2-12 Rated Input Current (A) 1.8 3.2 4.3 7.1 9.0 Rated Voltage/Frequency 3-phase, 380-480V, 50/60Hz Voltage Tolerance ± 10%(342~528V) InputRating Frequency Tolerance ± 5%(47~63Hz) Cooling Method Natural Cooling Fan Cooling Weight (kg) 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.7 1.7 General Specifications Control System SPWM(Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation) control (V/f control) Frequency Setting Resolution 0.01Hz Output Frequency Resolution 0.01Hz Torque Characteristics Including the auto-torque/auto-slip compensation; starting torque can be 150% at 5.0Hz Overload Endurance 150% of rated current for 1 minute Skip Frequency Three zones, setting range 0.1-600Hz Accel/Decel Time 0.1 to 600 seconds (2 Independent settings for Accel/Decel time) Stall Prevention Level Setting 20 to 250% of rated current DC Brake Operation frequency 0.1-600.0Hz, output 0-100% rated current Start time 0-60 seconds, stop time 0-60 seconds Regenerated Brake Torque Approx. 20% (up to 125% possible with optional brake resistor or externally mounted brake unit, 1-15hp (0.75-11kW) models have brake chopper built-in) ControlCharacteristics V/f Pattern Adjustable V/f pattern Keypad Setting by Frequency Setting External Signal Potentiometer-5kΩ/0.5W, 0 to +10VDC, 4 to 20mA, RS-485 interface; Multi- function Inputs 3 to 6 (15 steps, Jog, up/down) Keypad Set by RUN and STOPOperation Setting Signal External Signal 2 wires/3 wires ((MI1, MI2, MI3)), JOG operation, RS-485 serial interface (MODBUS), programmable logic controller Multi-function Input Signal Multi-step selection 0 to 15, Jog, accel/decel inhibit, 2 accel/decel switches, counter, external Base Block, ACI/AVI selections, driver reset, UP/DOWN key settings, NPN/PNP input selection Multi-function Output Indication AC drive operating, frequency attained, zero speed, Base Block, fault indication, overheat alarm, emergency stop and status selections of input terminals OperatingCharacteristics Analog Output Signal Output frequency/current
  • 174. Appendix A Specifications| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 A-3 General Specifications Operation Functions AVR, accel/decel S-Curve, over-voltage/over-current stall prevention, 5 fault records, reverse inhibition, momentary power loss restart, DC brake, auto torque/slip compensation, auto tuning, adjustable carrier frequency, output frequency limits, parameter lock/reset, PID control, external counter, MODBUS communication, abnormal reset, abnormal re-start, power-saving, fan control, sleep/wake frequency, 1st/2nd frequency source selections, 1st/2nd frequency source combination, NPN/PNP selection Protection Functions Over voltage, over current, under voltage, external fault, overload, ground fault, overheating, electronic thermal, IGBT short circuit, PTC Display Keypad (optional) 6-key, 7-segment LED with 4-digit, 4 status LEDs, master frequency, output frequency, output current, custom units, parameter values for setup and lock, faults, RUN, STOP, RESET, FWD/REV Built-in EMI Filter For 230V 1-phase and 460V 3-phase models. Enclosure Rating IP20 Pollution Degree 2 Installation Location Altitude 1,000 m or lower, keep from corrosive gasses, liquid and dust Ambient Temperature -10o C to 50o C (40o C for side-by-side mounting) Non-Condensing and not frozen Storage/ Transportation Temperature -20 o C to 60 o C Ambient Humidity Below 90% RH (non-condensing) EnviromentalConditions Vibration 9.80665m/s2 (1G) less than 20Hz, 5.88m/s2 (0.6G) at 20 to 50Hz Approvals
  • 175. Appendix A Specifications| A-4 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 This page intentionally left blank
  • 176. Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-1 Appendix B Accessories B.1 All Brake Resistors & Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives Note: Please only use DELTA resistors and recommended values. Other resistors and values will void Delta’s warranty. Please contact your nearest Delta representative for use of special resistors. The brake unit should be at least 10 cm away from AC motor drive to avoid possible interference. Refer to the “Brake unit Module User Manual” for further details. Applicable Motor Voltage hp kW Models Full Load Torque KG-M Equivalent Resistor Value (suggestion) Brake Unit Model and No. of Units Used Brake Resistors Model and No. of Units Used Brake Torque 10%ED Min. Equivalent Resistor Value for each AC Motor Drive 0.25 0.2 VFD002EL11A 0.110 200W 250Ω BUE- 20015 1 BR200W250 1 320 200Ω 0.5 0.4 VFD004EL11A 0.216 200W 250Ω BUE- 20015 1 BR200W250 1 170 100Ω 115VSeries 1 0.75 VFD007EL11A 0.427 200W 150Ω BUE- 20015 1 BR200W150 1 140 80Ω 0.25 0.2 VFD002EL21A/23A 0.110 200W 250Ω BUE- 20015 1 BR200W250 1 320 200Ω 0.5 0.4 VFD004EL21A/23A 0.216 200W 250Ω BUE- 20015 1 BR200W250 1 170 100Ω 1 0.75 VFD007EL21A/23A 0.427 200W 150Ω BUE- 20015 1 BR200W150 1 140 80Ω 2 1.5 VFD015EL21A/23A 0.849 300W 100Ω BUE- 20015 1 BR300W100 - 107 80Ω 3 2.2 VFD022EL21A/23A 1.262 600W 50Ω BUE- 20037 1 BR300W100 2 150 25Ω 230VSeries 5 3.7 VFD037EL23A 2.080 900W 30Ω BUE- 20037 1 - - 150 25Ω
  • 177. Appendix B Accessories| B-2 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 NOTE 1. Please select the brake unit and/or brake resistor according to the table. “-“ means no Delta product. Please use the brake unit according to the Equivalent Resistor Value. 2. If damage to the drive or other equipment is due to the fact that the brake resistors and the brake modules in use are not provided by Delta, the warranty will be void. 3. Take into consideration the safety of the environment when installing the brake resistors. 4. If the minimum resistance value is to be utilized, consult local dealers for the calculation of the power in Watt. 5. Please select thermal relay trip contact to prevent resistor over load. Use the contact to switch power off to the AC motor drive! 6. When using more than 2 brake units, equivalent resistor value of parallel brake unit can’t be less than the value in the column “Minimum Equivalent Resistor Value for Each AC Drive” (the right-most column in the table). 7. Please read the wiring information in the user manual of the brake unit thoroughly prior to installation and operation. 8. Definition for Brake Usage ED% Explanation: The definition of the barke usage ED(%) is for assurance of enough time for the brake unit and brake resistor to dissipate away heat generated by braking. When the brake resistor heats up, the resistance would increase with temperature, and brake torque would decrease accordingly. Suggested cycle time is one minute Applicable Motor Voltage hp kW Models Full Load Torque KG-M Equivalent Resistor Value (suggestion) Brake Unit Model BUE No. of Units Used Brake Resistors Model and No. of Units Used Brake Torque 10%ED Min. Equivalent Resistor Value for each AC Motor Drive 0.5 0.4 VFD004EL43A 0.216 300W 400Ω BUE- 40015 1 BR300W400 1 400 400Ω 1 0.75 VFD007EL43A 0.427 300W 400Ω BUE- 40015 1 BR300W400 1 200 200Ω 2 1.5 VFD015EL43A 0.849 400W 300Ω BUE- 40015 1 BR200W150 2 140 160Ω 3 2.2 VFD022EL43A 1.262 600W 200Ω BUE- 40037 1 BR300W400 2 150 100Ω 460VSeries 5 3.7 VFD037EL43A 2.080 900W 120Ω BUE- 40037 1 - 150 100Ω
  • 178. Appendix B Accessories| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-3 100% T0 T1 Braking Time Cycle Time ED% = T1/T0x100(%) 9. For safety reasons, install a thermal overload relay between brake unit and brake resistor. Together with the magnetic contactor (MC) in the mains supply circuit to the drive it offers protection in case of any malfunctioning. The purpose of installing the thermal overload relay is to protect the brake resistor against damage due to frequent brake or in case the brake unit is continuously on due to unusual high input voltage. Under these circumstances the thermal overload relay switches off the power to the drive. Never let the thermal overload relay switch off only the brake resistor as this will cause serious damage to the AC Motor Drive. R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 NFB MC VFD Series MOTOR O.L. U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 + P - N ( ) ( ) B1 B2 SA R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 MC IM BR O.L. Thermal Overload Relay or temperature switch Surge Absorber Thermal Overload Relay Brake ResistorBrake Unit + P - N ( ) ( ) Note1: When using the AC drive with DC reactor, please refer to wiring diagram in the AC drive user manual for the wiring of terminal +(P) of Brake unit. Note2: wire terminal -(N) to the neutral point of power system.Do NOT Temperature Switch
  • 179. Appendix B Accessories| B-4 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B.1.1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors (Dimensions are in millimeter) Order P/N: BR080W200, BR080W750, BR300W100, BR300W250, BR300W400, BR400W150, BR400W040 Model no. L1 L2 H D W Max. Weight (g) BR080W200 BR080W750 140 125 20 5.3 60 160 BR200W150 165 150 40 5.3 BR200W250 165 150 40 5.3 BR300W100 BR300W250 BR300W400 215 200 30 5.3 60 750 BR400W150 BR400W040 265 250 30 5.3 60 930
  • 180. Appendix B Accessories| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-5 Order P/N: BR500W030, BR500W100, BR1KW020, BR1KW075 Model no. L1 L2 H D W Max. Weight (g) BR500W030 BR500W100 335 320 30 5.3 60 1100 BR1KW020 BR1KW075 400 385 50 5.3 100 2800
  • 181. Appendix B Accessories| B-6 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Order P/N: BR1K0W050 Order P/N: BR1K0W050, BR1K2W008, BR1K2W6P8, BR1K5W005, BR1K5W040
  • 182. Appendix B Accessories| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-7 B.2 No Fuse Circuit Breaker Chart For 1-phase/3-phase drives, the current rating of the breaker shall be within 2-4 times rated input current. 1-phase 3-phase Model Recommended no-fuse breaker (A) Model Recommended no-fuse breaker (A) VFD002EL11A 15 VFD002EL23A 5 VFD002EL21A 10 VFD004EL23A 5 VFD004EL11A 20 VFD004EL43A 5 VFD004EL21A 15 VFD007EL23A 10 VFD007EL11A 30 VFD007EL43A 5 VFD007EL21A 20 VFD015EL23A 20 VFD015EL21A 30 VFD015EL43A 10 VFD022EL21A 50 VFD022EL23A 30 VFD022EL43A 15 VFD037EL23A 40 VFD037EL43A 20
  • 183. Appendix B Accessories| B-8 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B.3 Fuse Specification Chart Smaller fuses than those shown in the table are permitted. Line Fuse Model I (A) Input I (A) Output I (A) Bussmann P/N VFD002EL11A 6.4 1.6 15 JJN-15 VFD002EL21A 4.9 1.6 10 JJN-10 VFD002EL23A 1.9 1.6 5 JJN-6 VFD004EL11A 9 2.5 20 JJN-20 VFD004EL21A 6.5 2.5 15 JJN-15 VFD004EL23A 2.7 2.5 5 JJN-6 VFD004EL43A 1.8 1.5 5 JJS-6 VFD007EL11A 18 4.2 30 JJN-30 VFD007EL21A 9.3 4.2 20 JJN-20 VFD007EL23A 4.9 4.2 10 JJN-10 VFD007EL43A 3.2 2.5 5 JJS-6 VFD015EL21A 15.7 7.5 30 JJN-30 VFD015EL23A 9 7.5 20 JJN-20 VFD015EL43A 4.3 4.2 10 JJS-10 VFD022EL21A 24 11 50 JJN-50 VFD022EL23A 15 11 30 JJN-30 VFD022EL43A 7.1 5.5 15 JJS-15 VFD037EL23A 20.6 17 40 JJN-40 VFD037EL43A 9.0 8.2 20 JJS-20
  • 184. Appendix B Accessories| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-9 B.4 AC Reactor B.4.1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value 230V, 50/60Hz, 1-Phase Inductance (mH) kW HP Fundamental Amps Max. continuous Amps 3~5% impedance 0.2 1/4 4 6 6.5 0.4 1/2 5 7.5 3 0.75 1 8 12 1.5 1.5 2 12 18 1.25 2.2 3 18 27 0.8 460V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase Inductance (mH) kW HP Fundamental Amps Max. continuous Amps 3% impedance 5% impedance 0.4 1/2 2 3 20 32 0.75 1 4 6 9 12 1.5 2 4 6 6.5 9 2.2 3 8 12 5 7.5 3.7 5 8 12 3 5 B.4.2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value 115V/230V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase Inductance (mH) kW HP Fundamental Amps Max. continuous Amps 3% impedance 5% impedance 0.2 1/4 4 4 9 12 0.4 1/2 6 6 6.5 9 0.75 1 8 12 3 5 1.5 2 8 12 1.5 3 2.2 3 12 18 1.25 2.5 3.7 5 18 27 0.8 1.5
  • 185. Appendix B Accessories| B-10 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 460V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase Inductance (mH) kW HP Fundamental Amps Max. continuous Amps 3% impedance 5% impedance 0.4 1/2 2 3 20 32 0.75 1 4 6 9 12 1.5 2 4 6 6.5 9 2.2 3 8 12 5 7.5 3.7 5 12 18 2.5 4.2 B.4.3 Applications Connected in input circuit Application 1 Question When more than one AC motor drive is connected to the same mains power, and one of them is ON during operation. When applying power to one of the AC motor drive, the charge current of the capacitors may cause voltage dip. The AC motor drive may be damaged when over current occurs during operation. Correct wiring M1 M2 Mn reactor AC motor drive AC motor drive AC motor drive motor motor motor
  • 186. Appendix B Accessories| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-11 Application 2 Question Silicon rectifier and AC motor drive are connected to the same power. Switching spikes will be generated when the silicon rectifier switches on/off. These spikes may damage the mains circuit. Correct wiring DC power reactor reactor AC motor drive motor Silicon Controlled Rectifier Application 3 Question Used to improve the input power factor, to reduce harmonics and provide protection from AC line disturbances. (surges, switching spikes, short interruptions, etc.). The AC line reactor should be installed when the power supply capacity is 500kVA or more and exceeds 6 times the inverter capacity, or the mains wiring distance ≤ 10m. When the mains power capacity is too large, line impedance will be small and the charge current will be too high. This may damage AC motor drive due to higher rectifier temperature. Correct wiring large-capacity power reactor small-capacity AC motor drive motor
  • 187. Appendix B Accessories| B-12 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B.5 Zero Phase Reactor (RF220X00A) Dimensions are in millimeter and (inch) Recommended Wire SizeCable type (Note) AWG mm2 Nominal (mm2 ) Qty. Wiring Method ≦10 ≦5.3 ≦5.5 1 Diagram ASingle- core ≦2 ≦33.6 ≦38 4 Diagram B ≦12 ≦3.3 ≦3.5 1 Diagram AThree- core ≦1 ≦42.4 ≦50 4 Diagram B Note: 600V Insulated unshielded Cable. Power Supply Zero Phase Reactor MOTOR U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 Power Supply Zero Phase Reactor MOTOR Note 1: The table above gives approximate wire size for the zero phase reactors but the selection is ultimately governed by the type and diameter of cable fitted i.e. the cable must fit through the center hole of zero phase reactors. Note 2: Only the phase conductors should pass through, not the earth core or screen. Note 3: When long motor output cables are used an output zero phase reactor may be required to reduce radiated emissions from the cable. Diagram B Please put all wires through 4 cores in series without winding. Diagram A Please wind each wire 4 times around the core. The reactor must be put at inverter output as close as possible.
  • 188. Appendix B Accessories| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-13 B.6 Remote Controller RC-01 Dimensions are in millimeter AFM ACM +10VAVI DCM MI5 MI1 MI2 MI6 8 6 5 4 16 15 14 13 11 RC-01Terminal block (Wiring connections) VFD-EL I/O block VFD-EL Programming: Pr.02.00 set to 2 Pr.02.01 set to 1 (external controls) Pr.04.04 set to 1 (setting Run/Stop and Fwd/Rev controls) Pr.04.07 (MI5) set to 5 (External reset) Pr.04.08 (MI6) set to 8 (JOG operation)
  • 189. Appendix B Accessories| B-14 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B.7 PU06 B.7.1 Description of the Digital Keypad VFD-PU06 U F H VFD-PU06 JOG RUN RESET STOP LED Display Indicates frequency, voltage, current, user defined units, read, and save, etc. Status Display Display the driver's current status. Model Number STOP/RESET Stops AC drive operation and reset the drive after fault occurred. PU EXT PU Right key Move the cursor to the right RUN Key Start AC drive operation. Frequency Command Status indicator Output Frequency Status indicator User Defined Units Status indicator JOG By pressing JOG key, Jog frequency operation. MODE Change between different display mode. Left Key Move cursor to the left. UP and DOWN Key Set the parameter number and changes the numerical data, such as Master Frequency. FWD/REV Key Select FWD/REV operation. B.7.2 Explanation of Display Message Display Message Descriptions The AC motor drive Master Frequency Command. The Actual Operation Frequency present at terminals U, V, and W. The custom unit (u) The output current present at terminals U, V, and W. Press to change the mode to READ. Press PROG/DATA for about 2 sec or until it’s flashing, read the parameters of AC drive to the digital keypad PU06. It can read 4 groups of parameters to PU06. (read 0 – read 3) Press to change the mode to SAVE. Press PROG/DATA for about 2 sec or until it’s flashing, then write the parameters from the digital keypad PU06 to AC drive. If it has saved, it will show the type of AC motor drive.
  • 190. Appendix B Accessories| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-15 Display Message Descriptions The specified parameter setting. The actual value stored in the specified parameter. External Fault “End” displays for approximately 1 second if the entered input data have been accepted. After a parameter value has been set, the new value is automatically stored in memory. To modify an entry, use the or keys. “Err” displays if the input is invalid. Communication Error. Please check the AC motor drive user manual (Chapter 5, Group 9 Communication Parameter) for more details. B.7.3 Operation Flow Chart XX XX-XX XXXXX -END- VFD-PU06 Operation Flow Chart Cannot write in -ERR- Or Succeed to Write in Press UP key to select SAVE or READ. Press PROG/DATA for about 2 seconds or until it is flashing, then save parameters or read parameters . from PU06 to AC drive from AC drive to PU06
  • 191. Appendix B Accessories| B-16 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B.8 Fieldbus Modules B.8.1 DeviceNet Communication Module (CME-DN01) B.8.1.1 Panel Appearance and Dimensions 1. For RS-485 connection to VFD-EL 2. Communication port for connecting DeviceNet network 3. Address selector 4. Baud rate selector 5. Three LED status indicators for monitor. (Refer to the figure below) 72.2 [2.84] 57.3[2.26] 14.3[0.57] 59.7[2.35] 3.5 [0.14]35.8 [1.41] CME-DN01 ADD1 ADD2 SP 500K 250K 125K BAUD MODNET UNIT: mm(inch) 1 543 2 B.8.1.2 Wiring and Settings Refer to following diagram for details. CME-DN01 ADD1 ADD2 SP 500K 250K 125K BAUD MODNET MAC address Date Rate CAN-LV+ Empty Pin CAN-H V- 1: Reserved 2: EV 5: SG+ 6: Reserved 7: Reserved 8: Reserved 3: GND 4: SG- Setting baud rate BAUD 0 Switch Value Baud Rate 0 125K 1 250K 2 500K Other AUTO Setting MAC addresses: use decimal system. ADD1 ADD2
  • 192. Appendix B Accessories| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-17 B.8.1.3 Power Supply No external power is needed. Power is supplied via RS-485 port that is connected to VFD-EL. An 8 pins RJ-45 cable, which is packed together with this communication module, is used to connect the RS-485 port between VFD-EL and this communication module for power. This communication module will perform the function once it is connected. Refer to the following paragraph for LED indications. B.8.1.4 LEDs Display 1. SP: Green LED means in normal condition, Red LED means abnormal condition. 2. Module: Green blinking LED means no I/O data transmission, Green steady LED means I/O data transmission OK. Red LED blinking or steady LED means module communication is abnormal. 3. Network: Green LED means DeviceNet communication is normal, Red LED means abnormal B.8.2 LonWorks Communication Module (CME-LW01) B.8.2.1 Introduction Device CME-LW01 is used for communication interface between Modbus and LonTalk. CME- LW01 needs be configured via LonWorks network tool first, so that it can perform the function on LonWorks network. No need to set CME-LW01 address. This manual provides instructions for the installation and setup for CME-LW01 that is used to communicate with Delta VFD-EL (firmware version of VFD-EL should conform with CME- LW01 according to the table below) via LonWorks Network. B.8.2.2 Dimensions 57.3[2.26] 72.2 [2.84] 59.7[2.35] 9.5[0.37] 3.5 [0.14]34.8 [1.37] SP CME-LW01
  • 193. Appendix B Accessories| B-18 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B.8.2.3 Specifications Power supply: 16-30VDC, 750mW Communication: Modbus in ASCII format, protocol: 9600, 7, N, 2 LonTalk: free topology with FTT-10A 78 Kbps. LonTalk terminal: 4-pin terminals, wire gauge: 28-12 AWG, wire strip length: 7-8mm RS-485 port: 8 pins with RJ-45 B.8.2.4 Wiring SP CME-LW01 Power LED SP LED Service LED Service Pin 1: Reserved 2: EV 3: GND 4: SG- 5: SG+ 6: Reserved 7: Reserved 8: Reserved LonTalk 1 2 3 4 LonTalk Terminal definition for LonTalk system Terminal Symbol Function 1 2 3 4 These are twisted pair cables to connect to LonTalk system. Terminals 1 and 2 should be used as one group, and the same for terminals 3 and 4. B.8.2.5 LED Indications There are three LEDs in front panel of CME-LW01. If the communication is normal, power LED, SP LED should be green (red LED means abnormal communication) and service LED should be OFF. If LEDs display do not match, refer to user manual for details.
  • 194. Appendix B Accessories| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-19 B.8.3 Profibus Communication Module (CME-PD01) B.8.3.1 Panel Appearance 1: Reserved 2: EV 5: SG+ 6: Reserved 7: Reserved 8: Reserved 3: GND 4: SG- Profibus-DP Interface (DB9) RS-485 (RJ45) ADDH ADDL SPNET CME-PB01 SP LEDNET LEDAddress Switches 1. SP LED: Indicating the connection status between VFD-EL and CME-PD01. 2. NET LED: Indicating the connection status between CME-PD01 and PROFIBUS-DP. 3. Address Switches: Setting the address of CME-PD01 on PROFIBUS- DP network. 4. RS-485 Interface (RJ45): Connecting to VFD-EL, and supply power to CME-PD01. 5. PROFIBUS-DP Interface (DB9): 9-PIN connector that connects to PROFIBUS-DP network. 6. Extended Socket: 4-PIN socket that connects to PROFIBUS-DP network.
  • 195. Appendix B Accessories| B-20 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B.8.3.2 Dimensions 57.3[2.26] 59.7[2.35] 3.6[0.14] 72.2 [2.84] 34.8 [1.37] ADDH ADDL SPNET CME-PB01 UNIT: mm(inch) B.8.3.3 Parameters Settings in VFD-EL VFD-EL Baud Rate 9600 Pr.09.01=1 RTU 8, N, 2 Pr.09.03=3 Freq. Source Pr.02.00=4 Command Source Pr.02.01=3 B.8.3.4 Power Supply The power of CME-PD01 is supplied from VFD-EL. Please connect VFD-EL to CME-PD01 by using 8 pins RJ-45 cable, which is packed together with CME-PD01. After connection is completed, CME-PD01 is powered whenever power is applied to VFD-EL. B.8.3.5 PROFIBUS Address CME-PD01 has two rotary switches for the user to select the PROFIBUS address. The set value via 2 address switches, ADDH and ADDL, is in HEX format. ADDH sets the upper 4 bits, and ADDL sets the lower 4 bits of the PROFIBUS address.
  • 196. Appendix B Accessories| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-21 Address Meaning 1..0x7D Valid PROFIBUS address 0 or 0x7E..0xFE Invalid PROFIBUS address B.8.4 CME-COP01 (CANopen) CME-COP01 CANopen communication module is specifically for connecting to CANopen communication module of Delta VFD-EL AC motor drive. B.8.4.1 Product Profile COM port CANopen connection port RUN indicator ERROR indicator SP (Scan Port) indicator Baud rate switch 1 2 7 6 3 4 5 Unit: mm Address switch B.8.4.2 Specifications CANopen Connection Interface Pluggable connector (5.08mm) Transmission method CAN Transmission cable 2-wire twisted shielded cable Electrical isolation 500V DC
  • 197. Appendix B Accessories| B-22 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 Communication Process Data Objects (PDO) Service Data Object (SDO) Synchronization (SYNC) Emergency (EMCY) Message type Network Management (NMT) Baud rate 10 Kbps 20 Kbps 50 Kbps 125 Kbps 250 Kbps 500 Kbps 800 Kbps 1 Mbps Product code Delta VFD-EL AC motor drive 22 Device type 402 Vendor ID 477 Environmental Specifications Noise Immunity ESD(IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-2): 8KV Air Discharge EFT(IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-4): Power Line: 2KV, Digital I/O: 1KV, Analog & Communication I/O: 1KV Damped-Oscillatory Wave: Power Line: 1KV, Digital I/O: 1KV RS(IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-3): 26MHz ~ 1GHz, 10V/m Environment Operation: 0°C ~ 55°C (Temperature), 50 ~ 95% (Humidity), Pollution degree 2; Storage: -40°C ~ 70°C (Temperature), 5 ~ 95% (Humidity) Vibration / Shock Resistance Standard: IEC1131-2, IEC 68-2-6(TEST Fc/IEC1131-2 & IEC 68-2-27 (TEST Ea) Certifications Standard: IEC 61131-2,UL508 B.8.4.3 Components Pin Definition on CANopen Connection Port To connect with CANopen, use the connector enclosed with CME-COP01 or any connectors you can buy in the store for wiring. Pin Signal Content 1 CAN_GND Ground / 0 V / V- 2 CAN_L Signal- 3 SHIELD Shield 4 CAN_H Signal+ 5 - Reserved 1 2 3 4 5 Baud Rate Setting Rotary switch (BR) sets up the communication speed on CANopen network in hex. Setup range: 0 ~ 7 (8 ~F are forbidden) 012 345 6 7 8 9 A BCD EF BR
  • 198. Appendix B Accessories| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-23 Example: If you need to set up the communication speed of CME-COP01 as 500K, simply switch BR to “5”. BR Value Baud rate BR Value Baud rate 0 10K 4 250K 1 20K 5 500K 2 50K 6 800K 3 125K 7 1M MAC ID Setting Rotary switches (ID_L and ID_H) set up the Node-ID on CANopen network in hex. Setup range: 00 ~ 7F (80 ~FF are forbidden) 012 345 6 7 8 9 A BCD EF 012 345 6 7 8 9 A BCD EF ID_H ID_L Example: If you need to set up the communication address of CME-COP01 as 26(1AH), simply switch ID_H to “1” and ID_L to “A”. Switch Setting Content 0 … 7F Valid CANopen MAC ID setting Other Invalid CANopen MAC ID setting B.8.4.4 LED Indicator Explanation & Troubleshooting There are 3 LED indicators, RUN, ERROR and SP, on CME-COP01 to indicate the communication status of CME-COP01. RUN LED LED Status State Indication OFF No power No power on CME-COP01 card Single Flash (Green) STOPPED CME-COP01 is in STOPPED state Blinking (Green) PRE-OPERATIONAL CME-COP01 is in the PRE- OPERATIONAL state Green ON OPERATIONAL CME-COP01 is in the OPERATIONAL state Red ON Configuration error Node-ID or Baud rate setting error
  • 199. Appendix B Accessories| B-24 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 ERROR LED LED Status State Indication OFF No error CME-COP01 is working condition Single Flash (Red) Warning limit reached At least one of error counter of the CANopen controller has reached or exceeded the warning level (too many error frames) Double Flash (Red) Error control event A guard event or heartbeat event has occurred Red ON Bus-off The CANopen controller is bus-off SP LED LED Status State Indication OFF No Power No power on CME-COP01 card LED Blinking (Red) CRC check error Check your communication setting in VFD-EL drives (19200,<8,N,2>,RTU) Red ON Connection failure/No connection 1. Check the connection between VFD-EL drive and CME-COP01 card is correct 2. Re-wire the VFD-EL connection and ensure that the wire specification is correct Green ON Normal Communication is normal LED Descriptions State Description LED ON Constantly on LED OFF Constantly off LED blinking Flash, on for 0.2s and off for 0.2s LED single flash On for 0.2s and off for 1s LED double flash On for 0.2s off for 0.2s, on for 0.2s and off for 1s
  • 200. Appendix B Accessories| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B-25 B.9 MKE-EP & DIN Rail B.9.1 MKE-EP EMC earthing plate for Shielding Cable C CLAMP TWO HOLE STRAP 1 TWO HOLE STRAP 2
  • 201. Appendix B Accessories| B-26 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 B.9.2 DIN Rail: MKEL-DRA (Only for frame A) Dimensions This DIN rail (MKEL-DRA) is only for frame A. For frame B, it is shipped with DIN rail (MKEL-DRB). Refer to chapter 1.3 for VFD-EL dimension. NOTE Frame A: VFD002EL11A/21A/23A, VFD004EL11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007EL21A/23A/43A, VFD015EL23A/43A Frame B: VFD007EL11A, VFD015EL21A, VFD022EL21A/23A/43A, VFD037EL23A/43A
  • 202. Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 C-1 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive The choice of the right AC motor drive for the application is very important and has great influence on its lifetime. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too large, it cannot offer complete protection to the motor and motor maybe damaged. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too small, it cannot offer the required performance and the AC motor drive maybe damaged due to overloading. But by simply selecting the AC motor drive of the same capacity as the motor, user application requirements cannot be met completely. Therefore, a designer should consider all the conditions, including load type, load speed, load characteristic, operation method, rated output, rated speed, power and the change of load capacity. The following table lists the factors you need to consider, depending on your requirements. Related Specification Item Speed and torque characteristics Time ratings Overload capacity Starting torque Load type Friction load and weight load Liquid (viscous) load Inertia load Load with power transmission ● ● Load speed and torque characteristics Constant torque Constant output Decreasing torque Decreasing output ● ● Load characteristics Constant load Shock load Repetitive load High starting torque Low starting torque ● ● ● ● Continuous operation, Short-time operation Long-time operation at medium/low speeds ● ● Maximum output current (instantaneous) Constant output current (continuous) ● ● Maximum frequency, Base frequency ● Power supply transformer capacity or percentage impedance Voltage fluctuations and unbalance Number of phases, single phase protection Frequency ● ● Mechanical friction, losses in wiring ● ● Duty cycle modification ●
  • 203. Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive| C-2 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 C.1 Capacity Formulas 1. When one AC motor drive operates one motor The starting capacity should be less than 1.5x rated capacity of AC motor drive The starting capacity= )(_____5.1 375cos973 2 kVAdrivemotorACofcapacitythe t NGD T Nk A L ×≤⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ×+ ×× × ϕη 2. When one AC motor drive operates more than one motor 2.1 The starting capacity should be less than the rated capacity of AC motor drive Acceleration time ≦60 seconds The starting capacity= ( )[ ] ( ) )(_____5.11 cos 111 kVAdrivemotorACofcapacitythek n n Pknn Nk sCss T s T ×≤+=+ × × ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ −− ϕη Acceleration time ≧60 seconds The starting capacity= ( )[ ] ( ) )(_____1 cos 111 kVAdrivemotorACofcapacitythek n n Pknn Nk sCss T s T ≤+=+ × × ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ −− ϕη 2.2 The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A) Acceleration time ≦60 seconds )(______5.111 AdrivemotorACofcurrentratedthekn nIn SM T S T ×≤++ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ⎟ ⎠ ⎞⎜ ⎝ ⎛ − Acceleration time ≧60 seconds )(______11 AdrivemotorACofcurrentratedthekn nIn SM T S T ≤++ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ⎟ ⎠ ⎞⎜ ⎝ ⎛ −
  • 204. Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 C-3 2.3 When it is running continuously The requirement of load capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive(kVA) The requirement of load capacity= )(_____ cos kVAdrivemotorACofcapacitythe Pk M ≤ × × ϕη The motor capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive )(_____103 3 kVAdrivemotorACofcapacitytheIVk MM ≤×××× − The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A) )(______ AdrivemotorACofcurrentratedtheIk M ≤× Symbol explanation MP : Motor shaft output for load (kW) η : Motor efficiency (normally, approx. 0.85) ϕcos : Motor power factor (normally, approx. 0.75) MV : Motor rated voltage(V) MI : Motor rated current(A), for commercial power k : Correction factor calculated from current distortion factor (1.05-1.1, depending on PWM method) 1CP : Continuous motor capacity (kVA) Sk : Starting current/rated current of motor Tn : Number of motors in parallel Sn : Number of simultaneously started motors 2 GD : Total inertia (GD2 ) calculated back to motor shaft (kg m2 ) LT : Load torque At : Motor acceleration time N : Motor speed
  • 205. Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive| C-4 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 C.2 General Precaution Selection Note 1. When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power transformer (600kVA or above) or when a phase lead capacitor is switched, excess peak currents may occur in the power input circuit and the converter section may be damaged. To avoid this, use an AC input reactor (optional) before AC Motor Drive mains input to reduce the current and improve the input power efficiency. 2. When a special motor is used or more than one motor is driven in parallel with a single AC Motor Drive, select the AC Motor Drive current ≥1.25x(Sum of the motor rated currents). 3. The starting and accel./decel. characteristics of a motor are limited by the rated current and the overload protection of the AC Motor Drive. Compared to running the motor D.O.L. (Direct On-Line), a lower starting torque output with AC Motor Drive can be expected. If higher starting torque is required (such as for elevators, mixers, tooling machines, etc.) use an AC Motor Drive of higher capacity or increase the capacities for both the motor and the AC Motor Drive. 4. When an error occurs on the drive, a protective circuit will be activated and the AC Motor Drive output is turned off. Then the motor will coast to stop. For an emergency stop, an external mechanical brake is needed to quickly stop the motor. Parameter Settings Note 1. The AC Motor Drive can be driven at an output frequency up to 400Hz (less for some models) with the digital keypad. Setting errors may create a dangerous situation. For safety, the use of the upper limit frequency function is strongly recommended. 2. High DC brake operating voltages and long operation time (at low frequencies) may cause overheating of the motor. In that case, forced external motor cooling is recommended. 3. Motor accel./decel. time is determined by motor rated torque, load torque, and load inertia. 4. If the stall prevention function is activated, the accel./decel. time is automatically extended to a length that the AC Motor Drive can handle. If the motor needs to decelerate within a certain time with high load inertia that can’t be handled by the AC Motor Drive in the
  • 206. Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 C-5 required time, either use an external brake resistor and/or brake unit, depending on the model, (to shorten deceleration time only) or increase the capacity for both the motor and the AC Motor Drive. C.3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor Standard motor When using the AC Motor Drive to operate a standard 3-phase induction motor, take the following precautions: 1. The energy loss is greater than for an inverter duty motor. 2. Avoid running motor at low speed for a long time. Under this condition, the motor temperature may rise above the motor rating due to limited airflow produced by the motor’s fan. Consider external forced motor cooling. 3. When the standard motor operates at low speed for long time, the output load must be decreased. 4. The load tolerance of a standard motor is as follows: 3 6 20 60 100 82 70 60 50 0 60%40% 25% torque(%) continuous Frequency (Hz) Load duty-cycle 5. If 100% continuous torque is required at low speed, it may be necessary to use a special inverter duty motor. 6. Motor dynamic balance and rotor endurance should be considered once the operating speed exceeds the rated speed (60Hz) of a standard motor.
  • 207. Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive| C-6 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 7. Motor torque characteristics vary when an AC Motor Drive instead of commercial power supply drives the motor. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be connected. 8. Because of the high carrier frequency PWM control of the VFD series, pay attention to the following motor vibration problems: Resonant mechanical vibration: anti-vibration (damping) rubbers should be used to mount equipment that runs at varying speed. Motor imbalance: special care is required for operation at 50 or 60 Hz and higher frequency. To avoid resonances, use the Skip frequencies. 9. The motor fan will be very noisy when the motor speed exceeds 50 or 60Hz. Special motors: 1. Pole-changing (Dahlander) motor: The rated current is differs from that of a standard motor. Please check before operation and select the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When changing the pole number the motor needs to be stopped first. If over current occurs during operation or regenerative voltage is too high, please let the motor free run to stop (coast). 2. Submersible motor: The rated current is higher than that of a standard motor. Please check before operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. With long motor cable between AC motor drive and motor, available motor torque is reduced. 3. Explosion-proof (Ex) motor: Needs to be installed in a safe place and the wiring should comply with the (Ex) requirements. Delta AC Motor Drives are not suitable for (Ex) areas with special precautions. 4. Gear reduction motor: The lubricating method of reduction gearbox and speed range for continuous operation will be different and depending on brand. The lubricating function for operating long time at low speed and for high-speed operation needs to be considered carefully. 5. Synchronous motor: The rated current and starting current are higher than for standard motors. Please check before operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When the AC
  • 208. Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive| Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 C-7 motor drive operates more than one motor, please pay attention to starting and changing the motor. Power Transmission Mechanism Pay attention to reduced lubrication when operating gear reduction motors, gearboxes, belts and chains, etc. over longer periods at low speeds. At high speeds of 50/60Hz and above, lifetime reducing noises and vibrations may occur. Motor torque The torque characteristics of a motor operated by an AC motor drive and commercial mains power are different. Below you’ll find the torque-speed characteristics of a standard motor (4-pole, 15kW): AC motor drive Motor 180 155 140 100 80 55 38 0320 60 120 60 seconds Base freq.: 60Hz V/F for 220V/60Hz 180 155 100 55 38 0320 60 120 torque(%) Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz) 60 seconds60 seconds torque(%) Base freq.: 60Hz V/F for 220V/60Hz 130 140 100 85 45 35 0320 50 120 180 150 100 45 35 0 50 120 68 80 torque(%) torque(%) 60 seconds 60 seconds Frequency (Hz)Frequency (Hz) 3 20 Base freq.: 50Hz V/F for 220V/50Hz Base freq.: 50Hz V/F for 220V/50Hz
  • 209. Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive| C-8 Revision August 2008, 2ELE, V1.02 This page intentionally left blank.